Home

OXF-R3 - v3.0 - Complete

1. X ST METERS OSCILLATOR ETERS a e E 2 res 9 gt 5 SELECT LON 5 097 Ema ea e 5 en aa Lu SS EJ amp SOUR wm fem ne STUDIO LS EXT SOURCES e ms E RES 21 D XXXXXXXX ES Eis m XXXXXXXX ur m amp Eie Ee
2. 45 46 47 48 SELECT TO PANS GRP MULTITRACK D SEND ISEND Bi E E RET ISEND ECORD ISEND ISEND E XIX XXXI SHOW E NPU GRP M T TEANA TRIM ee TRIM 5 Multi Channel routing and surround panning 4 42 Chapter 4 Signal Paths Multi Channel routing and surround panning The following applies to the channels which are the sources for Multi Channel Stems STEMS Press one of A H to select the desi
3. lt SELECT FADERS SEND SEND SEND SEND SEND ISEND SEND SEND 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 SEND SEND SEND SEND SENO SEND SEND SEND 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SEND SEND SEND SEND SEND ISENDI 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 SUB SUPER SHOW E3 SEL 10 1010 10 INPUT GROUP MIT SENDs 5 5 GAIN TRIM MON 1 8 0 0 MIT SENDs SEND CHANS 9 16 5 5 5 5 SENDs CHs CHs CHs 17 24 1 24 25 48 49 72 SUPER CHs CHs SSGs 1 8 73 96 97 120 Gs SUPER SSGs 9 16 GROUPs 2 p BS amp SELECT L GROUPs TO CUTs MASTERS 9 16 1 ABS amp SELECT R GROUPs AAR AK AIA AA AAA TO FADs MASTERS 17 24 ES Setting automation of Cuts locally 7 70 Chapter 7 Session Management set up Cuts automation locally
4. SELECTOR 1 SELECTORS 2 7 SELECTOR 8 MAIN sls gt ale als als ab BYPASS e H 5 5 of hes 5 Jeg o FILTERS SUPER o _ o Le 5BANDEQ y pee ko of DYNAMICS ro MT 9 D 0 0 0 o o 9 0 o ko 9 INSERT EUR of Lk o DELAY FX L 51 1 48 ke o Fe 9 9 feo 9 FADER J UP 48 M T LINE O jeans eof of eoo of Le MULTITRACK STEMS bof bof 16 of zx AUXILIARY l SENDS 1 24 CHs 1 48 SELECTOR 1 SELECTORS 2 7 SELECTOR 8 MAIN sla gt L sls ar elle aru 55 sl nd 5 of fo of Jeg of FILTERS s o 9 Less gt 9 sBANDEO B Wire GPs 9 o ke 9 9 O e 9 9 9 DYNAMICS M T 9 of INSERT l ST MT LCRS H BUSSES oof koe oof less DELAY FX 54 1 48 bef feo bp of 1 amp
5. art AFL CUT er FORMAT amp STEREO SUB GROUPS 1 16 XE SEE ae E T SET SET L L C C RIC R attto LOCK lt amp E SU alala nee XX XX XX E Sd EXT EXT EXT Face a SU We x 1 4 7 A 4 Appendixes Calibration Procedure The following calibration procedure should be carried out for each format The settings are stored with the system Before calibration can begin make sure CAL is set to ON in the PREFERENCES GUI found on the channel LCDs 1 Press to unlock and its light goes off It is linked to the set up buttons and times out 10 seconds after the last button press A N Whilst unlocked select SET MAIN WIDTH and it lights Whilst unlocked select the desired format such that it includes all the LS outputs that need calibration Whilst unlocked press and hold until it starts to flash At the same instant all knobs and displays enter set up mode automatically
6. SENDS 1 24 Upper section of SENDS 1 24 panel OUTPUT sur 1 in channels sections INPUT CHANNEL amp INSERT FILTE E CH INPUT SEND RETURN AES 2 _ ___ m L amp R DAS J MIC MAIN GAIN RETURN fone 4 H OUTPUT DYN _ 7 al 28 7 j CH OUTPU ol CIE M T SEND 1 SEND ROUTING CHANNEL FADER Send 1 Post Fader headphones feed 6 36 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions Post M T Send Fader headphones feed To change the previous set up to post multitrack send fader simply toggle the SOURCE window to MTSEND The will light indicating a new Selection is available Press it to invoke the new source point This action rearranges the schematic as per the illustration below CH INPUT SENDS 1 24 EX MTSEND sues 1 1 SOURCE SELECT SOURCE FOR INPUT CHANNEL amp INSERT LTER _ _ 2 55 Jul I
7. cec oaoseoouo Oooo eje e e De oe 515155 259595959 995990659 L3 L3 r3 m SISISIs STISIS IS EY TESTE 3 GOE t 010 0 oojo pagi 000 000 ua oooooooo 5 alll loodo oeooo 000 Glo a Qo cacata pna rao Fer 4O naa E 5565 C m ojo 050 99099 o xl c o Eli 599 OOO 00 000 0 9099 EH O g HEOR BBBB 555 me oo CERES COD 5 im 0 2982 8859 225 0 000 o plola amsae apoa eo sss gy 0 ol 5 aiu oo 00 5 5 Oo 28 ri gompmmipilibsiimuru riim HPBHEBBH eH 00050 99899569 99959999 99999994 99295995 OOO Ooo Dojo opopoo00 0 888 2698990
8. Sends 1 24 panel Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 1 3 e paners 3 8 Select To Faders The main purpose of faders on a mixing console is to control the levels of the signals through the channels Once a balance is achieved the fader positions give an extremely useful graphical representation It is common with in line analogue console channel strips to split the signal flow into channel and monitor paths with a fader for each The OXF R3 takes this concept a stage further allowing all level and gain control to be accomplished using the faders This is achieved by assigning the faders to all gain and level functions via the SELECT TO FADERS
9. Fader panel ACCESS Push Button Selects the set of channel process and routing controls above the faders area to its channel SOLO Push Button The function of fader Solo push buttons is dependent upon the master status set on the Monitor Panel in the centre section Master Status SOLO Allows a destructive SOLO function which works on CHANS at all times and M T SEND faders when in Multi format mode only In this mode CUT buttons light on other channels AFL After Fader Listen functions for all other selections INPUT GAIN GROUP TRIM and M T MON AFL does not function for Sends 1 24 Master Status AFL Sends the AFL signal to the monitor LS for whichever function is assigned to the faders at the time not including Sends 1 24 Master Status PFL Sends the PFL Pre Fader Listen signal to the monitor LS for CHANS at all times and SEND faders when in Multi format mode only CUT Push Button Mutes the signal for whichever level function the fader is performing at the time Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 7 suonduoseg 1 9 1 suonduoseg 9
10. 6 40 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions CR MONITOR Section Q LEVEL Knob Controls the level to 3 sets of Monitor LS the LS1 main set LS2 and LS3 151 and LS2 are surround outputs up to 7 1 and LS3 is stereo DIM Push Button Dims all Monitor LS outputs according to the dim level setting Set on automatically when Oscillator button is selected but can be turned off manually CUT Push Button Cuts all Monitor LS outputs simultaneously CUT L CUT R S Push Buttons Individual Monitor LS Cuts 151 Push Button Selects the Main Surround Monitor LS set and inter cancels with 1 52 The Calibration settings button selected on MULTI FORMAT panel in the centre section apply to LS1 LS2 Push Button Selects the Secondary Surround Monitor LS set and inter cancels with LS1 The Calibration settings do not apply to LS2 LS3 Push Button Independent Stereo LS which may be switched on simultaneously with 1 51 LS2 Once LS3 is selected LS1 and 1 52 can be de selected If LS3 has been selected and LS1 or LS2 has been de selected 53 can be de selected too This means there will not be any monitor LS signal Asa warni
11. SEND OUTPUTS 1 24 STEREO o a Eo I ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS E E E 7 21 21 XX XXX XIK XX XX XIK XX XX X XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX AFL CUT AFL CUT AFL CUT AFL CUT AFL CUT AFL CUT AFL CUT SELECT I 9 16 mu SEND OUTPUTS 1 24 panel section This section of the panel allows control of up to 24 Send Outputs in blocks of eight 1 8 9 16 and 17 24 The default gain setting for the Send Outputs is unity or OdB They do not have gain controls in their panel area but their output level can be adjusted using the multi purpose faders in the centre section described in section 6 2 2 Chapter 6 Tech
12. lt SLS ao IXXXXXXXX sucer fem 5 X XX X X X X X SELECT n X XX X XX X X XXXXXXXX 5 4 External Sources The External Source selector allows selection of multiple surround and stereo external audio sources SELECT Push Buttons Feed the source indicated in their adjacent displays to the monitor LS in place of the current monitor source De selecting will return to the Main Output source The 6 SELECT buttons inter cancel Refer to Chapter 5 for details of External I O Input assignments 8 Character Displays Indicate External Source names Push Buttons Allow selection of external sources for each individual button MIX Push Buttons SELECT push buttons normally inter cancel unless is selected in which case the switches do not inter cancel and the sources add together Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 47 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 suolduoseg 29 9
13. 1 2 Press ACCESS forthe first Channel to have a dynamics side chain link At the Input Channel amp Inserts panel select DYN in one of the eight windows Do this using the and buttons and then press the large button At the Free Assign Area amp Dynamics section selectthe COMPRESS 1N Its ACCESS will be selected automatically assigning the Compressor controls to the panel for adjustment 5 6 7 On the LCD screen above the dynamics controls press the Dynamics softkey to view the parameters and transfer curve graph Select SC TO G1 in the middle window Select SC FM G1 in the lower window Repeat Steps 1 to 4 for further channels required in the side chain link group 3 31 Chapter 3 Getting Started e paners 3 10 Basic Console Operations 3 10 14 To Link Compressor Side Chains so that One Channel Controls a Second Channel t 009 1000 quB 905 O 005105 onlo
14. 000000000 0000 50000 58 C Q D 5 2 e a F 5 EIE C AEN H 0009 0 1 203803180 05 HO 100 09015015550 0 s el 000000000 24 C 0 Control Surface Configuration Left Hand 24 Fader Channels Section Right Hand 24 Fader Channels Section Central Master Section Meter Bridge Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 3 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9
15. SENDS 1 24 Upper section of SENDS 1 24 panel EK cH ourPuT ps 1 in channels sections INPUT CHANNEL amp INSERTS FILTER 2 Jil N El B Jul o o 188 SEND RETURN uw J L INSERT J Sum SORS PAN MULTI RETURN CH OUTPUT AUX 1 CHANNEL FADER SEND 1 post fader headphones feed Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 11 sujed jeublg Jeldeyo HAI 4 9 Broadcast Mode 4 12 Chapter 4 Signal Paths General In Broadcast Mode the operator is able simultaneously to a Mix individual inputs to the Main Output Bus and b Record a multitrack backup as a parallel operation The multitrack output can be monitored separately via a stereo bus accessed by the External Source Selector in the Monitor panel in the centre section of the console Setting up At the Input Channel amp Inserts panel set the channel path as for Mix down Although a signal will be recorded to the multitrack MULTI should not be selected in any of the 8 channel path windows Select or and make sure is selected at the Routing panel for each channel required to feed the Main Output bus Cross patch input sources via the LCD screens above the Channels sections Refer to Chapter 5
16. 0 0 0 0 a d a 590 8 0 5 olo D On ele D 010 o alla 0 G CO All Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 5 papes 3 1 The Control Surface OXF R3 panel locations 3 6 Chapter 3 Getting Started Q Meter Bridge Mono Meters Meter Bridge Stereo Meters Channel Screens 6 Routing Panels Multi Channel Set up Panel Super Send Group Masters Sends Masters Central Control Screen Sends Panels QD Free Assign Area Dynamics Panels Input amp Equaliser Panels QD Multitrack Panels QD Track Monitoring Controls QD Assignable Pan Knobs Select to Pans Panels Monitor amp Foldback Panel G Control Keyboard amp Automation Controls Assignable Channel Faders Select to Faders Panels 6 Multi Purpose Faders Main Output Fader AE Trackerballs QWERTY Keyboard beneath sliding cover Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 7 e paners geideuo 3 2 Fader Pag
17. Upper section of SENDS 1 24 panel in channels sections SEND RETURN INSERT Lar RETURN PAN CH OUTPUT SEND 1 CHANNEL FADER Send 1 Post M T Send Fader headphones feed This flexible set up procedure allows each Send to be sourced from any point in the channel signal path Once a useful set up has been created it can be copied to other channels or saved in a Snapshot to be recalled later Procedures for these functions are described in Chapter 7 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 37 suonduoseg 1 9 1 suonduoseq jeoiuuoe 9 Jaydeyo 6 3 Central Section Panels 6 3 1 Master Fader Panel The Master Fader panel contains a linear touch sensitive motorised fader with associated electronic dot character scribble display and local dynamic automation controls This centrally placed master fader controls the level of the MAIN Stereo Output bus SHOW VALUE ood E XXXXXXXX ACCESS 6 38 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions ACCESS Push Button Allows access to an Insert full featured Stereo C
18. LCD Channel Screen panel x 8 Push Buttons Select screen pages as indicated by labels within the screen above each button A gt Push Buttons Allow page selection within sub divisions of screen pages see Chapter 3 for details OSELECT Push Button Selects the cursor to the centre of the LCD screen Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 31 suonduoseg eoiuuoe 9 1 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 6 2 Channels Section Panels e __ 6 2 10 Sends 1 24 Panel This panel contains a Level control and an ON button for each Send and allows control of the signals sent from the channel currently accessed The source point can be set individually for each Send Ei kasis SENDS 1 24 sus SOURCE SELECT SOURCE FOR XXXXXXJ XXXXXXIXXXXXXJIXXXXXX XXXXXXIXXXXXXIXXXXXX IXXXXXX XXXXXXIXXXXXXIXXXXXX XXXXXXIXXXXXX
19. 1 592 643 7 8 1 Press for the first Channel to be routed to a Super Send Group SSG Select or LINE asrequired Set the gain Make sure is selected on the Select To Faders panel fire up default Make sure SUPER SGs 1 8 is selectedin SSG masters section At the Routing panel de select 8 A N At the same panel select the SSGs required 3 20 Chapter 3 Getting Started and 2 10 inthis case 7 At the Select Faders panel SEL section select SUPER SGs 1 8 then adjust the Fader to OdB in the Central Faders panel 8 Above the SSG 1 level knob select and its 9 atthe top of the Routing panel select 10 Repeat steps 7 and 8 for SSG 2 but select R at the Routing panel 1 1 Repeat steps 1 to 6 for further channels 3 10 3 To Send Signals to Tracks on 0 H 908500 gBoBumgmuu 0
20. ACCESS CANCEL T B T B T B T B F Back 3 amp 2 F Back 3 4 CR MONITOR MAIN FADER Block Schematic of Multi Stem Scheme illustrating interconnections of all components including monitoring 4 30 Chapter 4 Signal Paths INPUT CH amp NSERTS EQ amp DYN ETC MULTI FORMAT NPUT CH amp INSERTS EQ amp DYN ETC INPUT CH amp INSERTS EQ amp INPUT CH amp NSERTS amp DYN ETC INPUT CH amp INSERTS EQ amp MULTI FORMAT 2 E3 E3 E3 E3 E3 E3 E3 EJ E3 a pnr prre MAMMA MAIL MM STEMS STEMS STEMS STEMS STEMS STEMS ooog EJ 33 93 Hoo UJ 5 93 2 Hoo GJ CJ EJ CJ lt CJ CJ
21. CH amp amp INPUT CH amp INPUT CH amp INSERTS INSERTS INSERTS NSERTS EQ amp amp EQ amp EQ amp DYN DYN ETC DYN DYN INDIVIDUAL LS TRIMS IN CALIBRATION MODE 1 HAN tetto Datta en Fe AS ud el SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND t MULTI FORMAT MULT FORMAT gt a 5 d MULTI FORMAT STEREO SUB GROUPS 1 16 E 5 x x KX xxj KX xx 8948 SPL e EJ food EE 2 wow E iftis MOS rex fF E XX m rec TRACK S SET MAIN OUTPUT BUS FOR 7 1 5 1 LCRS or STEREO 1 1
22. AFL Zz Soo _ SELECT SEND FADER IN ORDER THAT THE SURROUND ROUTING BUTTONS ARE ASSIGNED TO THE M T SURROUND PANNER OUTPUT STEMS D 8X8 GROUP TRIMs _ esr 1 7 0001 o one 268
23. ACCS JOY FOLL BY STICK SOLO TOUCH EN AUTO CUE SOLO ISOL OO DYNA MICS 58 55 Section of the Monitor panel indicating the buttons related to QUICK COPY COPY DYN Push Button This is a latching function and applies to all COPY and QUICK COPY functions that are performed using button push operations If is selected any copy operations will include dynamic automation data inter cancels with or it can be turned on and off when it returns to defaults COPY STATIC Push Button This is a latching function and applies to all COPY and QUICK COPY functions that are performed using button push operations If is selected any copy operations will be limited to static settings only inter cancels with or it can be turned on and off when it returns to defaults according to the COPY GUI 7 56 Chapter 7 Session Management Q USE MASK Push Button Sets Copy and Link operations according to the DEFAULTS in the SNAPSHOTS COPY amp LINK GUI EQ A Push Button Limits Copy and Link functions to Equaliser A settings EQ B Push Button Limits Copy and Link functions to Equaliser B settings Q DYNAMICS Push Button Limits
24. TEES g U Press for the desired Channel 5 On the Select To Faders panel press At the Input Channel amp Inserts panel press either 6 To pan between tracks press if itis lit or as required and set the input GAIN which sets the pan into operation and adjust the knob to a suitable setting Pan Knob accordingly At the same panel select MULTT in one of the 7 Adjust the level to tape using the Fader Check the eight windows Do this using the and meter level for the track to which the signal is buttons and then press the large button routed At the Routing panel select the tracks required in the ROUTE TO TRACKS section The Pan works across odd and even numbers in Stereo Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 21 peuels e jeydeuo paners 3 10 Basic Console Operations 3 10 4 To Monitor Signals To and From Tape
25. 2 CH ROUTING TOP MORE 1108 9 to 16 171024 251032 331040 41 to 48 FURTHER PAGES FOR CHANNELS 49 56 57 64 etc 3 MORE 1108 910 16 171024 251032 331040 41 to 48 4 FURTHER PAGES OF I O FOR CHANNELS 49 56 57 64 etc 4 EQ FILT TOP EQ FILT FILTER EQ DYN 5 DYN TOP EQ FILT DYN 6 PREF TOP ALIAS DIALOG FIO SRC System Preferences 5 5 7 M STEM TOP FOLD 1 FOLD 2 MASTER SSGS SENDS SCRIBBLES S EXTSRC MONITORS W Channel Screens hierarchy 1st level All the console input and output assignments can be set and displayed on the channel screens They include MIC LINE and M T Inputs INSERT Sends and Returns The MASTER GUlis used to assign all bus outputs Monitor LS and External Source inputs GUIs related to EQ Filters and Dynamics allow their transfer curves to be displayed Preference pages allow real labels such as MIC 1 to be set for I O Each category of I O has apage that allows custom electronic scribble names to be specified which appear in the naming pop ups 5 6 Chapter 5 Control Screens A Fast Insert set up facility allows I O an input and an output plus a name to be set as asingle entity A single click on that name in the Fast Insert pop up assi
26. XXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX SELECT JXXXXXXXX XXXXXXX Ed 5 E ETERS SHOW I a H FOLLOW 11 ue aa be 4 11 1 9 EXT SOURCES gt frecoro 1 ft repr Ss XXXXXXXX E ua El peer 9 1 22 53 H 24 ss 11 1 XXXXXXXX weet MULTI FORMAT MULTI FORMAT TAI 209 009886 LY Le 11 1 1 1 J XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX se E 8 CH MONITOR BUS FOLDBACK GROUPS 1 4 1 2 ST MON ST MON ST MON ST Frac to F Back F 8sck XXXXXX SELECT RE HEARSE LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL CHs SET
27. See the diagram Setting automation of Cuts locally 4 Their red LEDs flash to indicate their ready status 1 The ABS TRM buttons above the faders are assigned to the faders by default Press for cuts to be automated where cut ABS FADs will be lit to indicate this data is to be modified or added to 2 Press ABS TRM TO CUTs to assign the 6 Their green LEDs will flash to indicate their and buttons to the cuts ready status 3 Press for the cuts to be automated where 7 To set a bank of 24 cuts into ready status press new data is to be written This will overwrite and hold CHS 1 24 for example until it turns previous data amber and then press any a a SELECT OOOO GO GLOBAL DROP OUT REDO 2 SPAC COICOICOICO OOOO COICOICOICO Qog GO CANCEL REPEAT JOG OO MOCO oO OOO GDICO Automation master keys
28. INPUT CHANNEL amp INSERTS XXXXxxxxJ ixxxxxxxx Lixxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx oLbJalobyJalo LJ olo LJ o XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX xxxxxxxx XXXXXXXX Input Channel 4 Inserts Equaliser and Filters panel 3 1 0 Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 5 Free Assign Area and Dynamics FREE ASSIGN AREA amp DYNAMICS THRESHLD ATTACK DYNAMICS RELEASE T EXPANDER COMPRESS LIMITER 4 s 7 7 gt gt gt gt gt gt o o o o o o o 5 2 5 5 5 5 Lot Free Assign Area amp Dynamics panel The Dynamics function area lower left contains GATE EXPANDER COMPRESSOR there are a number of Compressor options LIMITER SIDE CHAIN EQUALISER S C EQ Each section of the Dynamics has its own side chain and allows very comprehensive control equivalent to that of high specific
29. 3 IX X X XK X XI IXIX 1X X Xx EU XXXXXXXX BUS SET LOCK SET Uc ru ES SES pw gt ex re m XX XX XX 5 Track LS sus RS er 2 5 8 4 24 4 Signal Paths Master Section set up functions The 8 character dot display to the left of this panel can display the format for the Main Output Bus and that of M T Stems If the SET MAIN WIDTH button is lit the format for the Main Output Bus is displayed STEREO LCRS 5 1 or 7 1 The current format for the Main Output Bus is also displayed in the 8 character display above the central Master fader If the SET MT STEMS button is lit the format for the Bus is displayed STEREO LCRS 5 1 or 7 1 1 The push button is normally lit indicating that the set up is locked Press to unlock indicated by the light going off This button will time out back to lock status 10 seconds after the last button push A Config Set up option enables the LOCK button as a level of security i e it must be unlocked to allow bus assignment set up 2 While the system is unlocked press the MAIN WIDTH button to check the Main Bus width matc
30. EC SEND 9 11 12 16 SEND SEN 17 18 19 2 24 13 gt 505 1 16 INPUT GAIN ON 18 M T SENDs 25 48 49 72 E L GROUPs 8 ABS amp TRM SELECT L OUPs ABS amp SELECT 5 4 E 32 M M rh SELECT TO FADERS panel 6 1 0 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions CHANS Push Button Default Allows faders to be switched to control the level sent to the Main Output busses M T SEND Push Button Allows faders to be switched to control the level sent to the Multitrack Busses during recording Channel Page Push Button Allows selection of Channel Fader Pages 1 24 25 48 and so on INPUT GAIN Push Button Allows faders to be switched to control Mic M T Return and Line input gain according to the input source currently selected GROUP TRIM Push Button Allows faders to be switched to control the gain of the M T bus output to the track on the M T recorder M T MON Push Button Allows faders to be switched to control the level sent to the independent M T monitor bus for a live mix situation when a multitrack is being recorded in parallel SENDS 1 24 Push Buttons Allow faders to be switched to control the levels sent to effects and foldback busses SUPER SGs 1 16 Push Buttons SUPER SEND GROUPS Act as a shift function for the buttons SEN
31. Fa ax i B IN B B o IN B A e E GAIN ALU OL o CY g INPUT CHANNEL amp INSERTS and EQUALISER amp FILTERS panel INPUT CHANNEL amp INSERTS section MIC Push Button Selects the MIC input amp as the source as assigned on the Mic Inputs GUI M T Push button Selects the digital or analogue M T return input as assigned Return Inputs GUI Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 1 7 suonduoseg 1 9 1 suonduoseg 9 1 14 6 2 Channels Section Panels ee eS ES SEE 6 18 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions LINE Push Button Selects the digital or analogue LINE input as assigned on the LINE Inputs GUI Push Button Reverses phase of the selected input source GAIN Knob Allows gain adjustment for the selected source Q 8 Character Display Indicates the gain for the current source in dBs The gain and phase settings may be different for all three inputs simultaneously Channel Path Selectors The channel signal passes through each selector block from top left to right and then from bottom left to right Each selector block may have a single process element such as EQ Insert or Dynamics from the pool available The sequence of processing may be set up in an
32. 0 na ao 2 Ho mo mo sco 20 0 000000000 24 C 0 Control Surface Configuration 3 2 Chapter 3 Getting Started Control Surface Elements Left hand 24 Fader Channels Section Central Master Section Right hand 24 Fader Channels Section Meter Bridge The Control Surface in general A key feature of the OXF R3 is its Assignable Panels which divide further into four basic areas INPUT CHANNEL EQUALISER and FILTERS FREE ASSIGN AREA amp DYNAMICS MULTITRACK ROUTING for MULTITRACK SUPER SEND GROUPS and MULTI FORMAT SENDS For Foldback and Effects feeds The channel section panel areas are mirrored so that every function can be operated from either side of the console allowing two operators to work on the same channels simulta
33. XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXXMXXXXXX n n n SENDS 1 24 panel Bus Access Push Buttons The and Push buttons large rectangular type allow access to each bus in turn in order to allow source point selection for each Send individually The 8 character display indicates the bus number or name 6 32 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions SOURCE Selection Push Buttons The and Push buttons small square type allow the source points within the channel signal path to be viewed one at a time on the 8 character display by stepping through them The Push button allows selection of the Source point displayed for the Send bus indicated in The signal will always be sourced from a point directly after the process displayed The button will illuminate as a warning as soon as a different source from the current one is displayed in the SOURCE window In other words once lit the source point will change if it is pushed Then its light will go out Global selection Selecting the Main L R fader before pressing the Send Source SELECT will cause the Source point to be selected on all channels end Bus Levels and
34. FOLLOW 1 MONITOR 2 6 Torf 8 INPUT 3 DISP PEAK CLEAR PEAK HOLD PEAK 6 44 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions CENTRE SECTION METERS The meters in the centre section consist of two sets of 8 stereo meters one set each side of a central stereo meter They can be switched to monitor a number of sources and their function can also depend on whether the Main Output Bus is set for Stereo or Surround operation Left set of 8 Meters The left hand 8 meters will display the output levels of SSGs 1 16 and Sends 1 24 according to the meter selector described later in this section This is irrespective of whether Stereo or Surround is in operation Central Stereo Meter The signal source for the Central Stereo Meter is set as follows MAIN Push Button selected Can indicate the L and R signals from the Main Output Bus or L and R from the Fold Down Matrix This option is set in the PREFERENCES GUI described in section 5 2 5 FOLLOW MONITOR Push Button selected Indicates the L and R signals from the Main Output Bus or the L amp R signals selected as monitor sources for the CR Monitor LS Right set of 8 Meters The sources for the right hand 8 meters depend on whether the Main Output Bus is set for Stereo or Surround Stereo Main Output Indicate output level for SSGs 1 16 and Sends 1 24
35. mue g Li go Bo ao io Jg m 000 00 1 Press for the desired Channel 2 At the Input Channel amp Inserts panel select in window number 5 using the and buttons either side Select its large CIN button to insert the multitrack into the signal path 3 At the same panel select EQ in a window after window 5 window 8 for example and select the large button to insert the equaliser into the signal path after the multitrack 4 On the upper section of the same panel select the individual buttons for the bands required and adjust as necessary 5 Select the EQ softkey for the screen above the equaliser panel to view the parameters and response curve graph Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 25 e jeydeuo paners 3 10 Basic Console Operations 3 10 8 To Inse
36. ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS o _ IN IN IN IN IN M T MAIN M T MAIN M T MAIN M T MAIN M T MAIN M T MAIN M T MAIN M T MAIN J LRoute to Route to Route to LRoute to Route to to gt XX XXXXXX KXXXXX KXXXXX gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt 6 80 Chapter6 Technical Descriptions SUPER SEND GROUPS 5505 1 16 panel section The SSGs can configured flexibly in a number of combinations Mono Stereo LCR LCRS 5 0 5 1 7 0 7 1 Any groups that are set up cannot span across the two pages 1 8 and 9 16 Any group must consist only of consecutively numbered SSGs Q SUPER SGs 1 8 Push Button Assigns SSGs 1 8 to control section Q SUPER SGs 9 16 Push Button Assigns SSGs 9 16 to control section SSG set up procedure The fire up def
37. 4 MULTI FORMAT MULTI FORMAT MULTI FORMAT MULTI FORMAT MULTI FORMAT MULTI FORMAT ELECT TO FADERS pamm 06086 00089 08089 086080 4 __ 5 Sa wo Fev 39 EL 59 m fo 3 3 E3 5 ve LS vow 3 we amp 5 v 15 x eno sexo E a E 3 E 2 w xv B SEN E ey 1221 E23 a SEL AS SURROUND SOUND GROUP MASTERS Y foe __ m masaa __ gt CHs UP m 8 Le AS GROUP MASTERS MAY BE ASSIGNED REMOTE GUI SETUP amp OPERATED AS AN INDIVIDUAL MACHINE OR PART OF A VIRTUAL MACHINE THIS ALLOWS GROUPED SOLOs CUTs READYs amp RECORD FUNCTIONS ALL OF THESE FUNCTIONS CAN BE CONTROLLED EXTERNALLY SELECT CHANs FADER IN ORDER THAT THE SURROUND ROUTING BUTTONS ARE ASSIGNED TO THE CHANNEL OUTPUT AS THE MONITOR MATRIX Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 31 y
38. H rem vemm Gian 0000000 Q D a E 5 D 590 uo HO 100 110 09 Eo juu oan E DICIT 00000000055 000000000 08965 E 008 oojo 21010400 i 555989998 556999599 0501520100110 0
39. SUPER SEND GROUPS and SEND OUTPUTS Meters block CENTRE SECTION METERS The meters in the centre section consist of two sets of 8 stereo meters one set each side of a central stereo meter They can be switched to monitor a number of sources and their function also depends on whether the Main Output Bus is set for Stereo or Surround operation Left set of 8 Meters The left hand 8 meters will display the output levels of SSGs 1 16 and Sends 1 24 according to the meter selector on the Monitor panel described in section 6 3 2 This is irrespective of whether Stereo or Surround is in operation Right set of 8 Meters The sources for the right hand 8 meters depend on whether the Main Output Bus is set for Stereo or Surround Stereo Main Output Indicate output level for SSGs 1 16 and Sends 1 24 according to the meter selector on the Monitor panel described in section 6 3 2 6 92 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions e Surround Main Output Indicate output levels for the Main Output Bus Central Stereo Meter The source for the Central Stereo Meter is dependent upon whether the MAIN or FOLLOW MONITOR is selected under the METERS heading at the top right of the central monitor panel Can indicate the L and R signals from the Main Output Bus or L and R from the Fold Down Matrix This option is set in the PREFERENCES GUI described in section 5 2 5 FOLLOW MONITOR Indicates t
40. 7 18 Chapter 7 Session Management 7 5 5 To Save a Mix A mix or part mix can be saved at any time So far the automation data for any cuts has been resident in the working mix and has not been saved to the internal hard drive MIXES amp CUES 0070618 MIXES 14 59 03 Jun 1998 CUES TIME 1 RHYTHM INTRO 1 3 4 5 6 8 H 11 12 E 13 START OF TITLE 00 00 54 21 GUITAR INTRO KIT INTRO 00 01 09 13 00 01 13 02 00 01 23 02 00 01 31 08 VERSE 1 CHORUS 1 00 02 03 15 VERSE 2 CHORUS 2 00 02 26 22 00 02 58 03 PRE SOLO BREAK SAX SOLO VERSE KEY CHANGE 00 03 46 23 00 03 51 24 00 04 23 01 5 TRACKS OFFLINE SCREEN Mixes amp Cues screen To save a mix To save a mix for the first time press on the Control Keyboard A pop up dialogue box will appear for a name entry Type in an appropriate name on the QWERTY keyboard or press once more or click on OK for the default name MIX 1 This will appear as the first entry in the MIXES list To edit mix names later either highlight and click on or press for the name dialogue pop up If SAVE MIX ENTER is used again the new mix will overwrite the previous one in just the same way as SAVE works on a word processor Use MIX ASNEW ENTER to avoid overwriting the previ
41. TONE ACCESS M T MAIN Bill Bil JE o ae 5 m D e 5 D T MAIN VT MAIN Route to Route to Route to XXXXXX XXX XXX M T Route to gt lt gt lt gt lt amp STEREO SU XXXXXXXX XX X Ser C R C gt KX SELECT TRACK SUB R S 6 76 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions SEND OUTPUTS 1 24 x foe E T E E BEIBEIEIBEIE Kxxxx 3 SELECT
42. jeoiuuoe 9 6 3 Central Section Panels XXXXXXXX SENDS XXXXXXXX gt gt gt e gt 5 8 J Le XXXXXXXX 6 74 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions Tape Remotes The assignment of machines to Tape Remotes is accomplished using the MACHINE REMOTES in the Session Management amp Dynamic Automation system Each set of remotes may be assigned to an individual machine Q Transports Push Buttons Are marked and function according to international standards 8 Character Displays To the left of the Tape Remotes display the machine names or numbers as assigned in the Machines GUI 8 Character Displays To the right of t
43. 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000OOODOOOOONN STUDIO LS1 ON LS2 ON Central Stereo Meter with additional flags SOLO and AFL To the left of Main L R meter SOLO or AFL legends indicate the current mode Larger rectangular flags illuminate to indicate an active function RED LIGHT ON The Red Light function has an ON indicator situated to the middle left of the Central Stereo Meter REHEARSE ON The Rehearse function has an ON indicator situated to lower left of the Central Stereo Meter OSC ON MAIN GROUPS The Oscillator has ON MAIN and GROUPS indicators situated to the middle right of the Central Stereo Meter STUDIO LS1 ON LS2 ON The Studio LS switching has Studio LS1 and LS2 indicators situated to the lower right of the Central Stereo Meter Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 95 suonduoseg eoiuuoe 9 1 9 6 5 Signal Processing Rack The Signal Processing SP Rack is one standard size for all OXF R3 installations 670 0 15U e SP Rack 6 5 1 SP Rack Modules The SP rack contains the following modules 1 x SP Buffer Module Interface between SP rack and
44. m Press for the desired Channel At the Input Channel amp Inserts panel select MULTT in window number 5 using the and buttons either side Select its large CIN button to insert the multitrack into the signal path At the same panel select DYN in a window after window 5 window 8 for example and select the large button to insert the dynamics processor into the signal path before the multitrack In the Dynamics section located in the Free Assign Area select buttons for the processing 5 6 required Gate Compressor etc indicated by 8 character dot displays On the LCD screen above the dynamics controls press the Dynamics softkey to see the parameters and transfer curve graph The dynamics processing is set and displayed via definable knobs and switches Set their functions via the local keys according to the processes in use Adjust whilst viewing the settings on the LCD screen The settings for all functions are displayed simultaneously 3 27 Chapter 3 Getting Started peuels e jeydeuo paners geideuo 3 10 B
45. IN ro tee m PAN CH INPUT SEND RETURN QI 0 8 MIC CH OUTPUT MULTITRACK EXT SOURCES CH INPUT p CHANNEL sama FADER Bu o El E B 0 o E Hel rm E B gt L amp R o El Es 0 SEND ROUTING MON Broadcast Mode Channel Input source INPUT CHANNEL amp INSERTS DYN INSERT et MAIN PAN CH OUTPUT O E MIC MULTITRACK EXT SOURCES ECH OUTPUTE CHANNEL FADER a mam gung E r Ej A MONITOR L amp R qe a Ao a E 0 SEND ROUTING MON Broadcast Mode Channel Output source Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 1 3 F D A v U 2 o sujed Jeldeyo HAI 4 9 Broadcast Mode 4 14 Chap
46. 6 JC 7 8 ANE gt gt olb cJ Jo CHANNEL FADER 6 34 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions Source point options for Sends Input channel source points for the Sends in detail This diagram illustrates the channel path as laid out at the Input Channel amp Inserts panel Source points may be taken from after any of the processing block windows 1 8 as well as before the first block and after the last one post the channel fader The diagram shows the extra source points as imaginary windows within the channel path The Source point pre window 1 will be displayed as CH INPUT which takes a totally clean signal from post the input gain stage The Source post fader is labelled C OUTPUT as displayed on the 8 character display in the SOURCE selector area M T Send Fader source point for Sends A further option as a source point for Sends is the signal post the M T Send Fader This is indicated by MT SEND in the Source display see page 6 37 for more details Pre Fader headphones feed The example below illustrates an in line channel set up at the Input Channel amp Inserts panel The right hand window in the Sends panel has Send 1 selected The left hand window shows the
47. TRACK LS sus Selecting MIDI Control Pages Chapter 7 Session Management 7 89 juewebeueyy uoisses 9 uoissas Ja deyo 7 9 MIDI Accessing MIDI Control Pages Although not directly related the 24 MIDI Pages are accessed using the buttons for Send Outputs 1 24 See the illustration Selecting MIDI Control Pages on the previous page 7 9 2 Setting MIDI Parameters General The system allows control of MIDI parameters via 6 assignable knobs and 6 assignable switches Their settings are displayed on the MIDI GUI which is laid out to reflect the positions of the knobs and switches The MIDI port channel and command type can be selected for each control as well as 2 parameters for each control GUI Upper Right The panel at the upper right of the GUI indicates which MIDI page of 1 24 is displayed Clicking on Clear will select the NOTE OFF command and set all MIDI values to 0 Clicking on Enabled will toggle to Disabled switching off transmission of MIDI data Controls can be adjusted when the Disabled flag is displayed SETTINGS for KNOBS and The settings for the 6 knobs are displayed on the left and right panels in the GUI Clicking on each field in turn going from top to bottom allows set up and control as follows CARD Upper field Click on for a pop up to select the MIDI I
48. 6 3 Central Section Panels HIT a Se Sy 6 48 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions SPLIT Push Button All 6 external source selections will normally feed both Control Room Monitor LS and Studio LS outputs If is selected the upper pair of SELECT SOURCE buttons feed the studio LS only and the lower 4 selectors feed the Control Room Monitors Their functions are also separated MON Indicators Are displayed when is selected and indicate that the four lower external sources will feed the CR Monitor LS only 4515 Indicator Is displayed when is selected and indicates that the two upper external sources will feed the Studio LS only STUDIO LS access o TUBIO 7 ACCESS SLS 1 SLS 2 Studio LS This section allows control of 2 pairs of Studio LS The source selection for the Studio LS has been described in the previous section LEVEL Knob Controls the level to the 2 stereo Studio LS outputs 51 51 and SLS2 Push Buttons Allow the two Studio LS outputs to be switched on individually AFL Push Button Sends After Fader Listen AFL signal to CR monitor LS regardless of the status of SLS1 and SLS2 push buttons CUT Push Button Mutes SLS regardless of
49. 4 1 The Basic Default Signal Path When the OXF R3 is switched on the system sets a default configuration as described in this section INPUT CHANNEL amp INSERTS 2 SJ SIN CH INPUT KUA E Ae CS J Jo J GAIN 27 i 8 CHANNEL FADER Default signal path Signal paths are built using the controls on the Input Channel amp Inserts section of the Input and Equaliser Module Section 6 2 5 in Chapter 6 provides details of these controls In the default configuration shown the M T source button is selected and its signal feeds the multitrack phase reverse switch and gain control The windows labelled 1 to 8 are available to insert processing elements such as EQ and dynamics but in this default configuration none are selected From the phase reverse switch and input gain stage the signal is passed directly on to the channel fader through the channel pan and on to the MAIN L R output bus The MIC LINE and M T inputs each have their own individual phase switches and gain control stages 4 2 Chapter 4 Signal Paths Moving on from the very simple default channel signal path a selection of processing e
50. MOND LISTEN LISTEN 1 2 MONDS FOLLOW MONITOR SELECT XXXXXXXX SELECT T B T B F Back 1 F Back 2 T B F Back 4 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 39 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 suonduoseq jeoiuuoe 9 6 3 Central Section Panels MONITOR LS JX XXXXXX XE
51. suonduoseq jeoiuuoe 9 Jadeyo 6 3 Central Section Panels ee 6 42 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions Only the LS currently on will be affected by this operation In other words if an LS is cut before selecting the button it will remain cut illuminated red Pressing for any other LS will cause a phase reversal for that LS It will flash alternating between amber and red Any number of LS can be phase reversed De selecting the button will return to normal operation with all LS in phase again Selecting again will return to the previous phase reverse set up which is memorised allowing comparison MONO Push Buttons Select and it will flash lighting orange A mono mix of the monitor source will be fed to either the Centre LS or both the L and R LS according to the MONO MEANS Preference in the PREFS GUI Monitor LS can be freely turned on and off using the cut switches including any which were cut before selecting MONO The LS Cuts are independent of the Mono function and their settings will remain having de selected in order to return to normal operation The overall level is compensated in accordance with the number or sources which make up the Mono signal MON SOLO Push Button Sets the LS Cut switches into a Solo mode which is totally independent of their cut functions Having selected MONO SOLO selecting any will cause its LS to be soloed indicated by its b
52. 7 80 Chapter 7 Session Management 1 AUTO ISOL can be pressed at any time to check which channels are isolated It has a momentary action whilst the tape is rolling 2 Saving a MIX or SNAPSHOT will cause the isolated settings to be stored A COPY from an isolated channel will also take the isolated settings 3 Loading a MIX or SNAPSHOT will cause the isolated settings to be overwritten A COPY to isolated channels will overwrite isolated settings Film Modefor Switches Pressing a switch will change its state from on to off or vice versa and set it into ready absolute mode at the same time Its effect will also be heard or auditioned Press GLOBAL DROP IN to write the new setting and GLOBAL DROP OUT when complete The switch will return to its orignal state Note that the switch will still be in a ready status This can be verified by selecting READY ABSOLUTE when all switches in ready absolute will flash Press READY CANCEL to return to a safe mode READY CANCEL will not work for switches with an audition setting To return a switch to its previous non audition setting de select and re select AUDITION Copy Audition values QUICK COPY see section 7 6 8 used in Film Mode works on automation ready controls only The following conditions must be in place Film Mode must be enabled must be set on COPY 5 must be set on or both COPY STATIC and C
53. A Prieto ntn n titititi STEMS STEMS STEMS STEMS D C 5 How on Wn MF d Fo v lt 5 CJ EJ 2 lt 5 2 ULTI FORMAT STEREO SUB GROUPS 1 16 D EIxxxxxxxx 8998 SPL ou SELECT track E iid SURROUND ROUTING SWITCHES MAY BE SET MAIN OUTPUT BUS FOR 7 1 5 1 LCRS or STEREO _____ ASSIGNED IN ORDER TO UTILISE SOME OR ALL OF THE MULTITRACK BUSSES AS STEMS USE THESE CONTROLS TO ASSIGN M T BUSSES TO DESIRED LS ON APPROPRIATE STEMS v GROUP TRIM GROUP TRIM AFL AFL
54. panel INPUT GAIN WZ 4 f CZF es E SENDS f EY gt RE GROUP TRIM 050090000 99990000 1 Us SEND HHHE d aaaa nonong Boone o8 l CHANNEL FADER 5 T Select to Faders 3 1 4 Chapter 3 Getting Started As an example on the SELECT FADERS panels adjacent to the channel faders on either side of the centre section there are buttons marked CHANS WTSEND The default is which assigns the faders to the channel outputs when they control the level to the Main Output Bus Selecting M T SEND is equivalent to selecting the small fader function to the OXF R3 faders The combined use of Fader Paging and the Select to Faders functionality allows control of all channel level functions using the 48 conveniently placed high quality faders in the left and right channels sections Ez a m com e gt e m rz am m a Lm oz rz Lm z a m e 2 m oz e a norm oz a norm coz a m s y zz 2 C o SUPER SGs 1 8 a ROUPs Gs 9 16
55. General The Routing GUI displays the channel output routing buttons for 8 channels according to the bank of faders below it and which faders page is selected on the SELECT TO FADERS panel For example if channels 1 24 selected to the faders and the ROUTING GUlis selected for the middle screen it will display routing buttons for channels 9 16 There is just one set of actual routing buttons on the ROUTING panel ateach side of the control surface between the second and third screens Thereforea single channel strip is highlighted to indicate which channel the routing switches are assigned to control Thisis set according to the channel currently accessed The GUI has been designed to reflect the physical layout of the buttons the panel Operations of the real routing switches will be reflected on the screens Buttons canalso be selected via Trackerballs Press below any order to set the cursor to the centre of that screen 5 8 Chapter 5 Control Screens Direct the cursor with the Trackerball and press the central red button above the Trackerball to operate button All routing assignments are indicated by buttons turning red To display other groups of 8 channels click on the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the GUI or push its button below the screen Select MORE for further groups of channels Upper Surround buttons The set of 8 buttons at the top of the GUI set outina 7 1 LS arrangement indicate su
56. accessi IN gt pure IN access laccess acoess FREE ASSIGN AREA virtual panels illustration Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 23 suonduoseg jeoiuuoe 9 1 suonduoseg 09 9 6 2 Channels Section Panels m A Dynamics Side Chain Equaliser The Side Chain EQ is a two band parametric covering a bandwidth from 20Hz to 20 7 It can be used as an additional EQ in the signal path as well as the Dynami
57. 7 10 5 3 Set Cue Points seen eerte ie 7 11 7 5 4 Automate Cuts ener 7 13 7 5 5 Mix ance ER 7 19 7 5 6 To Automate Fader Moves sse 7 20 7 5 7 Dropping Out of Write on Subsequent Mix Passes 7 21 7 5 8 To Record Absolute Moves for a Number of Faders 7 22 7 5 9 Trim Fader Moves esee 7 22 7 5 10 To Trim Moves for a Number of Faders 7 22 7 5 11 To Automate a Pan Move or any other Knob 7 23 7 5 12 To Assemble a Mix 1 essere 7 24 7 6 The Session Management Screen Pages 7 27 7 6 1 The Start up Logo Screen sese 7 27 726 2 Th system 7 28 7 6 3 The Machines 7 30 7 6 4 Artists Projects amp Titles Screen 7 32 7 635 Mixes amp Cues ineo e ceret Sgen 7 35 7 6 6 Merge Assemble Screen 7 40 J 6zp Track Lists S Cree 7 46 7 6 8 Snapshots Copy amp Link Screen esses 7 49 7 6 9 Copy Channel Fader Balance to M T Faders and M T to Channels 7 60 7 6 10 Copy Monitor Send Fader Balance to Cues 7 60 7 6 11 Quick Copy EQ A to B and B 7 60 7 6 12 Machine Remotes Screen
58. GUI layout This GUI allows I O assignments for MONO channels STEREO Return channels The I O GUI Screen contains dialogue blocks for the following Mic Inputs Line Inputs Multitrack Inputs Channel Inserts Multitrack Group Send Outputs and Inserts Softkeys 3 8 may be used to select other groups of channels i e the first screen gives immediate access to channels 1 48 For further pages of channel groups selectthe softkey MORE Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 11 SueeJoS 9 5 2 Channel Screens pec a sz IMPORTANT Pop up COLOUR CODING The pop ups which allow I O assignments are colour coded as follows Text Black 4 Channel ADCs DACs and AES I O Yellow 8 Channel ADCs and DACs Background colour of pop up buttons e Mauve Blue T O SP LINK 0 General Purpose Light Blue SP LINK 1 General Purpose Light Blue SP LINK 2 Multitrack Machines Dark Blue T O SP LINK 3 Insert Device I O MADI Links in general The OXF R3 has up to4 SP LINK modules each with 2 MADI circuits allowing direct connection from the S P Rack to remote I O Racks and Dash tape machines Possible I O assignments for each loop are as below The numbers of inputs and outputs vary according to system requirements product type and software variant The followin
59. sse 7 61 7 7 Dynamic Automation Moves eee scene eene eene enata etta setenta sena 7 64 7 7 1 Motorised Fader Controls see 7 64 7 7 2 Automating 7 65 7 7 3 Automate 7 70 7 7 4 Automate Other Switches 7 76 7 7 5 Automate a Pan Move or any other knob 7 77 7 7 6 Dropping Out of Write on Subsequent Mix Passes for Knobs 7 78 7 7 7 To Trim Pan Moves or any other 7 78 7 7 8 Automation Off and Selective Automation Isolate 7 79 TAI 7 80 7 7 10 Global Ready Enable esee 7 81 7 8 Offline Automation 4 esee eese e ta stato setae nens 7 84 FE SIL cT 7 89 7 9 1 MIDI Control Pages eseeeseeeeeerennenenne 7 89 7 9 2 Setting MIDI parameters 7 90 7 9 3 MIDI Bars amp Beats sess 7 93 7 10 edere rte teen ea eee Tun oss 7 95 7 11 Preferences 7 101 Chapter 7 Session Management 7 1 juewebeueyy uoisses 9 5595 Jejdeu 7 1 The Basics 7 2 Chapter 7 Session Management Historically console automation systems ha
60. 069 1 067 IDEA NNI er RIGHT vsum 3 098 3 088 tor rooe General The two Fold Down GUIs allow control of the levels for the fold down of signal sources when an output is derived from another which has a greater number of outputs As an example the Main Output Bus is set up for a 5 1 output and a Stereo Output is required simultaneously or a Stereo version must be listened to for compatibilty checking Operation Each Fold Down destination in the GUIs has a control module for each source For example when deriving 5 1 from 7 1 the 5 1 LEFT input is being fed from the LEFT and L CENT of the 7 1 with a level control module for each Levels can be set in two ways Click on to set the Default values Click on and buttons to set levels manually 4 52 Chapter 4 Signal Paths FOLDDOWN MATRIX 5 1 gt STEREOQ gt MONO 3 008 3 008 d d d E 1 Defaults The Defaults are defined in the start up Config File settings HF Filter A low pass filter is available in the Sub channel when folding down from 7 1 to 5 1 Click on HF FILT to the right of the GUI to insert a filter with a corner frequency of 120Hz and a slope of 24dB Octave Snapshots The Fold Down settings are stored in Snapshots as part of the
61. 5558555 H 505 oo0000000 goog Ol 015 fee sv lesa O00 888 88 888 peee sume Sa fo gen psed e ca 000 eooo 5 ekak 8888 8889 oS ce c n alla wen wen wen wen oo ooe 2 E3 C3 ED OOOO CO 555995859 ooo 295085885 coro aloes 555555550 25551 5 599 soos cooso gt 58588 oojoo oooo0o0 JOO O 8 sso 0000009094 29299099 OjoOjo o oo p000 Oooo 090900009 pooogo00g 25555999 29595999 5555995058 255959959 29599959 7 m oO 00 2 oo oOo o0 oO rr r3 CHE oOo OOOO oionn E Lon Lal 529210060 JOJO 1 10 oo 1 At the Send Outputs 1 24 panel in the console 3 Turn off the buttons and set up the balance centre section select 17 24 and then select and pan positions using the Faders and their Pans STEREO between Send Masters 17 and 18 Turn off the Pan if necessary Sends 17 and 18 are a dedicated assignment to Stereo Foldback 1 Select t
62. A NN N SN NN NS N EISSN N NI KNAAANA NS N SSAA Rs gt NS NS SS N S SS NS 0000 GROUP TRIM Y X X NN M T SEND S NS NSS NANN IAM PP A 8 n a H 1 a a a a a a a a CIS Jgo Select to Pans 3 17 Chapter 3 Getting Started e peueis g seideyo 3 10 Basic Console Operations 3 18 Chapter 3 Getting Started General The following series of illustrations and brief step by step procedures are designed to allow new OXF R3 operators to begin using the console in a very short space of time without having detailed knowledge of the system System Set up The examples shown assume that signal sources such as microphones line level signals and multitrack or hard disc recorder are already connected and routed to appropriate inputs with machine control in place They also assume that the control room monitor LS are hooked up to the OXF R3 system Main Bus Set up The Main Output Bus can be set for the following widths Stereo LCRS 5 1 and 7 1 For the purposes of the example
63. 8 Press READY CANCEL ENTER once cuts have been completed Lr As soon as any automation has been recorded the message New 1 DYNAMIC LAYER is displayed on the MIXES amp CUES GUI at the top right to indicate that unsaved automation data is resident in the system UNDO and REDO functions As passes are made by rolling forwards and back a set of unsaved passes is built up which is resident in the system memory Use to step backwards through individual passes to the last SAVE command and to go forwards Press to go all the way back in one step and to go all the way forwards in one step Howto modify cuts using READY TRIM Note Although it is often easier to rewrite cuts rather than modify them the following online functions are available Offline adjustments can be made using the OFFLINE CUTS GUI 1 Ready Trim enable the cuts to be automated with the central button or Ready Trim enable the cuts using the local method described at the beginning of this section 3 Press GLOBAL DROP IN either before or after rolling the tape to drop all ready enabled cuts into automation record or press switches individually To add a new cut Adding a new cut in between previous cuts with no overlap is straightforward Implement as previously described 4 Press GLOBAL DROP OUT after writing cuts followed by PLAY ENTER to hear the result and note that automated cuts are indicated
64. LOCAL IN ACCESS EXPANDER E access COMPRESS N lt laccess LIMITER IN E laccess S C EQ IN laccess N Soars lAccess 6 20 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions FREE ASSIGN AREA amp DYNAMICS panel 12 x Selector Blocks Lower Left amp Right These selectors display and allow selection of available processing elements which may be accessed in the channel path selectors on the Input Channel amp Inserts panel section 8 Character Displays Indicate the processing elements available IN Push Button s Puts its displayed process element into operation ACCESS Push Button s Allows Free Assign controls to access control of selected process Selecting any IN button selects its associated ACCESS automatically 6 Definable Knobs and 6 Switches 8 Character Displays Indicate the functions of adjacent definable knobs and switches DEFINABLE Knobs Allow adjustment of parameter indicated Push Buttons Allow switched function as indicated Dynamics Meters 4 x 20 segment meters indicate gain reduction within the Dy
65. SELECT 355 TONE TONE TONE ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS Access ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS IN IN IN wr Ewr pus Route to Route to to Route tol Route Route to Route to X X X X X XIX X X X X XIX X X X X XIX X X X X XI X X X X XIX X X X X XIX X X X X XI Route to art our MULTI FORMAT amp STEREO SUB GROUPS 1 16 XXX XXX XX X X Xx XX XXXXXXXX s sc SET IN foc SET Uc XX KX SELECT
66. 6 1 OXF R3 System Description 1 6 4 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions A key feature of the OXF R3 is that it has Assignable Panels These can be broken down into 4 basic areas INPUT CHANNEL EQUALISER and FILTERS FREE ASSIGN and DYNAMICS AREA ROUTING and MULTITRACK SENDS AREA for feeding effects and foldbacks etc INPUT CHANNEL EQUALISER and FILTERS The Input Channel section is much more flexible than a conventional in line analogue channel strip in that it allows processing elements to be configured in almost any order The 5 Band Equaliser and High and Low Filters sections are independent and can be assigned separately to any position in the channel signal path FREE ASSIGN AREA and DYNAMICS GATE EXPANDER COMPRESSOR LIMITER SIDE CHAIN EQUALISER S C EQ Each section of the Dynamics has its own side chain and allows very comprehensive control equivalent to that of high spec outboard units All the side chains operate on a single gain control element The Side Chain EQ is a 2 band fully parametric element which may be inserted in three ways in the Dynamics Side Chain only in the Signal Path and the Side Chain in the Signal Path only as a second EQ DELAY EFFECT This area includes space for additional effects to be controlled as software upgrades are introduced ROUTING and MULTITRACK e MULTITRACK The Multitrack section is configurable in two ways e
67. H O 9081000 BOGE fae 0 9009 99 9006 100902505 000 D IET EU 598 OO Oa OO O O O oO em aCe aco fog of zm 090 m 000000090 000000000 4 17 5 1 Press for the desired Channel 2 Select on the Select To Faders panel fire up default 3 At the Input Channel amp Inserts panel select MULT in window number 4 using the and buttons either side Select its large button to insert the multitrack into the signal path 4 At the Pans panel press to select the signal being fed to tape 3 22 Chapte
68. TITLE Current is default e MIX or SNAPSHOT WORKING is default FM Time can be a Cue Point TO Time can be a Cue Point Independent Ramp or Butt Joins for FM amp TO ALL Complete Console CHS Source Channels specify which ones CEN Central Master Section Which Channel Sections e g Fader EQ etc DESTINATION Specify FM Time can be a Cue Point TO Time Entered Automatically can be Edited CHS Destination Channels same 15 Default ADD LAYER example The following example involves copying mix data within a Title from Verse 1 to Verse 2 1 Select the source data using the upper section of the GUI The default source is the current Artist Project Title and its Working Mix The mix data for Verse 1 is already resident in the Working Mix so this is the correct source mix for this example Any other source can be selected by clicking on the appropriate Wto the right of its name strip for a pop up list 2 Having established the correct source set a start time for the source data in the SOURCE FM section which may be a Cue point or timecode entry VERSE 1 is displayed in the example Click on Vto the right of the name strip in the FM section for a different from point as a Cue point or click on the timecode entry for an edit pop up Clicking on the large Aand Wbuttons nudges the timecode The merge transition can be selected as a butt or timed ramp according to the
69. uin SYSTEM PROJECTS MIXES GLOBAL nevores SCREEN mem o SYSTEM PROJECTS MIXES SNAPSHOT ASSEMBLE BACKUPS SCREEN 6 E Control Screens structure 1 Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 3 sueeJog Jeydeuo SueeJoS 9 5 1 The Master Control Screens 14 GLOBAL 15 PREFS SYSTEM PROJECTS MIXES SNAPSHOT COMMIT MACHINES SCREEN PREV SCRN Displays list of the screens available in alphabetical order ASSEMBLE BACKUPS DIAGS GLOBAL MACHINES MIXES OFFLINE PREFERENCES PROJECTS REMOTES SNAPSHOTS SYSTEM TOP TRACKS amp SYSTEM PROJECTS mixes PREFS Backups SCREEN 4 PREV SCRN 8 SYSTEM 5 MIXES ASSEMBLE REMOTES SCREEN SYSTEM PROJECTS MIXES BACKUPS REMOTES SCREEN 4 PREV SCRN 10 afe 5 MIXES MACHINES REMOTES SNAPSHOT BACKUPS SCREEN 4 PREV SCRN 10 8 5
70. 188 Central Stereo Meters These functions apply to the 16 Stereo Meters in two groups of 8 above the centre section of the control surface Their function depends on whether the Main Output Bus is set for Stereo or Surround Stereo Main Output Both groups of 8 meters are used for this function allowing 16 outputs to be metered simultaneously e Surround Main Output Just the left hand groups of 8 meters are used for this function allowing 8 outputs to be metered simultaneously SENDs 1 8 9 16 17 24 Push Button If not already selected pressing SENDs 1 8 9 16 17 24 for the first time sets the meters source as Sends 1 8 and 9 16 for when the Main Output is Stereo or 1 8 if the Main Output is Surround Further presses rotate the sequence Q SUPER SGs 1 8 9 16 Push Button If not already selected pressing SUPER SGs 1 8 9 16 for the first time sets the meters source as Super SGs 1 8 and 9 16 for when the Main Output is Stereo or 1 8 if the Main Output is Surround Further presses rotate the sequence for Surround Main Output MTRs TO FADs Push Button Sources for the Meters are selected depending on which faders are assigned in the SEL section of the SELECT TO FADERS panel 6 46 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions EXT SOURCES pum Ez IXXXXXXXX sucer p
71. In the Dynamics section located in the Free Assign Area select buttons for the processing Chapter 3 Getting Started 5 required Gate Compressor etc indicated by 8 character dot displays On the LCD screen above the dynamics controls press the Dynamics softkey to view the parameters and transfer curve graph The dynamics processing is set and displayed via definable knobs and switches Set their functions via the local keys according to the processes in use Adjust whilst viewing the settings on the LCD screen The settings for all functions are displayed simultaneously 3 10 9 To Insert Dynamics Post Multitrack Return 5 H H 99090 010150115 900 00 09 00 008199905 0 um Ec 9900 95 000090 ino Huc 00 ac 10 00000 j g U Lp U o g U g U
72. LINE 5 NI EM oot koe oof boo 6 of MULTITRACK STEMS ot 5 of L of 9 FUTURE SP TES AUXILIARY l SENDS 1 24 CHs 49 96 SELECTOR 1 SELECTORS 2 7 SELECTOR 8 ST MAIN H OUTPUT gt als pii gt BYPASS MIC offs p L keee 54 SUPER kepe o of gt pese 5 4 of r1 H p 2 Om 0 9 9 o 1 9 9 o I INSERT fo o Le ot Le of lo DELAY FX a o ke o Le of gt FADER J meo e lee d ok ke Q o lao FUTURE SP CUES U AUXILIARY SENDS 1 24 RETURN CHs 97 120 signal flow 1 6 Chapter 1 Overview MAIN OUTPUT BUS STEREO LCRS 5 1 or 7 1 EXTERNAL SOURCES 1 8 o gt 8X STEREO MONITOR FK a gr a EXTERNAL SOURCES 9 12 Oe fu 4X8WIDE SURROUND LO MONITOR INPUTS o e i TY i z SOLO O 2 5 lt AFL O J I z zt EL PFL O Q 2 e TALKBACK O gt gt O 2 al 7 LISTEN MIC 1 2 LU gt o cc gt lt 5 gt lt 1 8 2 O O O lt cc cc 2 eo i a SEI MONITOR SECTION j SN 151 CONTROL ROOM MONITOR LS 152 CONTROL ROOM
73. Select the solo for the centre LS 6 Adjust the trim for the centre LS to read 0 0dB in its associated dot character display 7 Adjust the overall trim which trims all LS in tandem until the measuring equipment reads the required reference level Its calibration setting will be reflected in its dot character display The calibration for the centre LS is complete for the first format chosen 8 Solo another LS using its button 9 Adjust its trim until the measuring equipment reads the correct level 1 0 Repeat 8 and 9 for the remaining LS for the current format 1 1 Repeat the whole procedure for other formats Appendixes A 5 sexipueddy Specifications General Performance and Temperature Range Operation of the complete system to performance specification guaranteed 10 C to 35 C Operation guaranteed from 5 C to 40 C AC Input Power Requirements Control Panel OXF CP3048 AC100 240V 50 60Hz 500W7 5Ax2 SP Rack OXF SP3000 USA Canada AC120V 50 60Hz 750W10A Other destinations AC220 240V 50 60Hz 700W 5A Rack 103000 USA Canada AC120V 50 60Hz 240W3A Other destinations AC220 240V 50 60Hz 240W 2A Session Management System Control and storage of data for Projects Titles Mixes Snapshots amp Cue points Fully integrated dynamic automation including machine control Mix and set up data easily transferred between systems Analogue I O 2 Types 4 or 8 channels per m
74. Snapshots File Structure Related NOTES may be compiled within all levels of the Session Management System on associated pages Chapter 7 Session Management 7 5 juewebeueyy uoisses 9 5 9 7 2 Files Hierarchy and Automatable Controls 7 2 2 Automatable Controls 7 6 Chapter 7 Session Management Controls that can be automated The following controls can be dynamically automated but note that the static settings of all controls are stored alongside dynamic automation data Dynamics Delay MIDI Parameters Channel Faders Control Group Faders and Main Output Fader Channel Cuts and Control Group Cuts Channel Pans and In Out Buttons Multitrack Pans including Multi Format Surround Pans Multitrack Send Levels and Cuts Send Levels Send Cuts Send Pans The 8 IN Buttons on the Input Channel amp Inserts panel The A and B Equaliser buttons MIC M T and LINE Input Selector Push buttons Knobs and Switches Assigned to MIDI Outputs The 8 IN buttons allow all channel processes such as EQ Dynamics and Insert to be switched in and out of the channel path 7 3 File Data Storage General Data for any files created is normally stored on the system hard drive and may be transferred between systems using M O discs via the drive at the Host Computer Systems in the same installation can have data tra
75. aig oo L1 mio Ere oOojoClo EO lo n o 99 uo mno Inu EO loojoo m g 1 2 Press the ACCESS button for the controlling Channel At the Input Channel amp Inserts panel select DYN in one of the eight windows Do this using the and buttons and then press the large button At the Free Assign Area amp Dynamics section selectthe COMPRESS 1N Its ACCESS will be selected automatically assigning the Compressor controls to the panel for adjustment 3 32 Chapter 3 Getting Started 4 On the LCD screen above the dynamics controls press the Dynamics softkey to view the parameters and transfer curve graph
76. e ARTIST PROJECT Once selected click on the banner to the right of ARTIST PROJECT to cycle through Artist Projects one by one Alternatively click on V for a pop up and highlight the desired Artist Project After clicking on it will reverse indicating that the pop up will close if clicked on once more 7 52 Chapter 7 Session Management FACTORY LIB Click on this option for a list of read only FACTORY LIBRARY Snapshots supplied with the system STUDIO LIB Click on this option to access STUDIO LIBRARY Snapshots designed for safe keeping of studio specific set ups This library has a password option USER LIB Click on this option to access individual USER LIBRARIES Click on the right side of the banner for a pop up of Users Click on the appropriate User name for the Snapshot list A password option is available for USER LIB entries User names must be set up using the SYSTEM GUI TITLE Title is visible only when ARTIST PROJECT is selected Click on the banner to its right to cycle through Titles available for the current ARTIST PROJECT one by one Alternatively click on V for a pop up and highlight the desired Title After clicking on it will reverse indicating that the pop up will close if clicked on once more It is sometimes useful to leave open the pop up displaying Titles allowing all Titles to be displayed for each Artist Project as they are cycled through Click on the banner t
77. 20dB for all LS Individual trims of 10dB for each LS Normal rotation of the knobs gives a fine resolution multi turn adjustment Push and turn knobs for coarse adjustment Appendixes A 3 sexipueddy UAM Multi Format LS Calibration N OO 9 16 8 SSGS SELECT TONE fone TONE hocess ACCESSI ACCESSI ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS n man Cer an pvc an Ce an wo pw man Ce pur an CRoute to L Route to Route to J Route to Route to LRoute to L Route to L Route to XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX X X X X XIX X X X X XIX X X X X XIX X X X X XI 9 E e e Sy
78. 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 139 40 41 42 143 44 45 46 47 48 GRP ULTITRAC DIR 0 8868 1 8 56 8 16 1 9 3 11 42 5 3 6 14 745 8 16 STEMS BOUNCE 4 9 ox ROUTING panel MULTI FORMAT Section QMULTI FORMAT L L C R C L S SUB R S Push Buttons These allow surround routing for a number of sources Their function is set depending on which function is selected to the faders in the channels section 6 28 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions The button layout mimics the Multi Format LS set up for easy recognition when routing Multi Channel sources With this scheme it is not necessary to remember track numbers Channel Faders If is selected on the SELECT TO FADERS panel then the surround routing buttons assign th
79. 5 Select SC TO G1 button sends the side chain control signal to side chain bus 1 Make sure LOCAL is selected in the lower window 6 Press ACCESS forthesecond channel 7 At the Input Channel amp Inserts panel select DYN and its button in one of the eight windows 8 At the Free Assign Area amp Dynamics section select SC FM G1 in the lower window 9 adjustments are made on the first channel Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 33 peuels e jeydeuo Chapter 4 Signal Paths The OXF R3 system can be used to build a wide variety of signal paths with maximum flexibility from a basic default configuration Creating configurations is simple Signal paths created can be stored as Snapshots to be copied and or recalled later Chapter 4 Contents 9 4 1 TheBasic Default Signal Path scscsscssssssscsssssssscecessesscecacecees 4 2 8 4 2 Mix Down Signal Path with Processing Inserted 4 4 4 3 Mix Down with Post Channel Fader Insert 4 6 2 4 4 Recording to a Multitrack csscscssscecssecscsccessesscececesssescncaceeees 4 7 E 4 5 In Line Channel Multitrack Recording Set up 4 8 4 6 In Line Channel with Insert Post Channel Fader s Monitor FUnction sssccccssssccssssscccssssccccsssscccsssccscsnsccesssssese 4 9 4 7 SEND 1 Pre Fader Headphones Feed eee 4 10 4 8 SEN
80. 6 SUB MONO NG ACCESS RAC 5568 1 8 SSGs 9 16 2A0 3 11 442 53 4 TAB 8 6 BOUNCE Surround routing and panning when mixing to the Main Output Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 27 syld p sued leuis 19 deyo WA 4 12 Mixing to the Main Output Bus Sa IIM 4 28 Chapter 4 Signal Paths Routing Stereo and Surround Panning
81. AFL Push Buttons Send After Fader Listen AFL signals to CR monitor LS CUT Push Buttons Mute individual Foldback Group outputs T B F Back 1 4 Push Buttons Enable individual talkback feeds to be sent to each of the four Foldback Groups T B F Backs may be assigned to Talkback Groups 1 and 2 Q ST MON to F back Push Buttons Replace the signal from the Send Busses with the Stereo Monitor signal when the Main Output Bus is set for stereo Replace the Send Bus signals with the Stereo Output from the Fold Down Matrix for a surround Main Output Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 51 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 suonduoseq jeoiuuoe 9 Jadeyo 6 3 Central Section Panels ae eS EE ee st TALKBACK amp LISTEN 7 KXXXXXxx 38 75 KXXXXxxx TALKBACK amp LISTEN X XXXXXXX XXXXXX X X Q XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX RE HEARSE CUE 9 RED 6 52 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions Talkback
82. Timecode amp Tallies Transport Commands 988 Automation Audition i Trimmed Automation Moves i PRIMARY SYSTEM N gt N gt lt 2 LLI Audio Monitor Signal Verbal Communication via Telephone De Overview of RSL connections RSL Set up GUI The set up procedure applies to both the P S and the 5 5 and the set ups at each end do not need to match It may be that the P S will send lots of data in order that the S S can monitor a full mix whilst the S S returns data for just a few important channels The instructions that follow apply for systems set up for RSL The set up configuration requires help from Sony Support Personnel Data sent from the Primary System 1 Click on the button to the right of the STUDIO legend for a pop down listing 4 remote locations Click on the one that is required Chapter 7 Session Management 7 1 09 juewebeueyy uoisses 9 5 9 7 11 Preferences Sr 2 Click on the button to the right of the MODE legend to set the status of the local OXF R3 which can be the Master Client or Disabled The local system will then seek and set up appropriate communications 3 In the TRANSMIT CHANNEL MASK section select the range of channels that data wi
83. within Section 10 DIR pace peas amy Operation To equalise the signal to multitrack Step number 1 Press the ACCESS button for the desired Channel 4 On the upper section of the same panel press the individual IN buttons for the bands required 2 At the Input Channel amp Inserts panel select Adjust as necessary MULT in window no 5 Select the large IN button to insert the multitrack into the signal path 5 Select the EQ soft key for the screen above the equaliser panel to view the parameters and 3 At the same panel select EQ in window no 4 response curve graph and select the large IN button to insert the Cross reference within equaliser into the signal path Refer to Chapter 5 Control Screens for details of the manual this screen Important note The screen defaults to a combination display of 5 Band Equaliser and High and Low Filter curves 6 About This Manual Related manuals In addition to this operation manual the following manuals are available for the OXF R3 Installation Manual Service Manual About This Manual 7 Glossary of Terms ABS ADC AES AFL ATR AUX CAL CH CMRR CR DAC DAT DIV DYN EBU EDL EQ EXT FILT FS GDC GPI GUI HF HMF I O LCD LED LF LMF L R LS MADI MIC MIDI M O MON M T MTR Absolute Analogu
84. 4 13 Multi Stem Set up 4 13 1 Multi Stem Set up Procedure The Main Output Bus for the OXF R3 which doubles as the M T Monitor Bus has two basic modes of operation Stereo or Surround For Stem or Multi Stem operation the Main Output Bus must be set to a Surround mode Then M T Busses can be assigned to stems which are configured automatically to use the Main Output Bus for monitoring purposes The width of stems e g the number of busses in stems is limited to a maximum width no greater than the width of the Main Output Bus 214 6 9 MULTI FORMAT amp STEREO SUB GROUPS 1 16 3 5 HE i L uc C RC R i 5 ugs oc lt imono gt _ DIM e BT SELECT ada ps T LS SUB R S ER i 7 10 Master Section set up functions The 8 character dot display to the left of this panel can display the format for the Main Output Bus and that of M T Stems If the SET MAIN WIDTH button is lit the format for the Main Output Bus is displayed STEREO LCRS 5 1 or 7 1 If the SET MT STEMS button 15 lit the
85. A 8 Appendixes Audio Specifications 1 Wherever dB values are specified the following conventions apply OdBu 0 775 RMS Reference 1mW 0 775V RMS into 60022 dBfs Referenced to Digital Full Scale dBr Referenced to Max Analogue Operating Level dB Referenced to Unity Gain 2 Noise figures are measured with a bandwidth from 20Hz 20kHz 3 The following specifications apply with FS at 48 kHz and the internal Operating Level set to 20dBu 4 The measurements apply to a complete OXF R3 system Sample Rates 44 1 48kHz 12 5 The OXF R3 always requires an external BNC audio word clock and will chase a varispeed reference 4 Ch Analogue MIC amp LINE Inputs Gain Control MIC 20dB to 80dB in 1dB steps LINE 30dB to 20dB in 1dB steps Input Impedance MIC 1 5kQ or 100kQ switchable LINE 16kQ Max Input Level 50V 50Hz for 1 Minute LINE 200V DC 1kHz for 1 Minute Noise Floor e MIC lt 124dBfs Equivalent Input Noise Zin 2009 Gain 80dB LINE 108dBfs Gain OdB CMRR e MIC gt 45dB 20Hz 20kHz Gain OdB LINE gt 50dB 20Hz 20kHz Gain OdB Frequency Response e 20Hz 20kHz 0 248 Distortion 20Hz 20kHz Full Scale Signal lt 96dBfs 0 005 THD 20dBfs Harmonic content lt 115dBfs Appendixes A 9 sexipueddy Specifications E _ Phantom Power 48V for MIC inputs individual
86. FADERS Push Button Assigns the and buttons above the faders to the Faders SELECT R MASTER Push Button 24 C 0 Control Surface only Causes the function selected under SEL in the right hand SELECT TO FADERS panel to be assigned to the right hand 8 centre section faders This push button inter cancels with SELECT L MASTER push button D SELECT L MASTER Push Button 24 C 0 Control Surface only Causes the function selected under SEL in the left hand SELECT TO FADERS panel to be assigned to the left hand 8 centre section faders This push button inter cancels with SELECT R MASTER push button 6 2 3 Pans Panel Each of the 6 Pans Panels 3 each side of the control surface contains 8 definable knobs with associated electronic dot display AFL and CUT buttons Although the primary purpose of these knobs is panning their functions may be defined Any pan or gain function may be selected at the SELECT TO PANS panel Channel SEND RET urn monitor selection RECORD remotes and ACCESS buttons are also present on this panel Use the SELECT TO PANS panel to control PAN Left Right Pan for all occasions where the Fader Output is feeding a Stereo Bus or Front Surround INPUT GAIN Gain of Mic M T Return amp Line GROUP TRIM Gain of M T Bus Output to M T channel MON Level sent to Independent M T Monitor M T SEND Level sent to M T Bus CHANS Controls the Level to the Main Output Bus SENDS 1 24 Levels se
87. aos ATO mre co ow EQUALISER amp FILTERS GUI layout This GUI displays the 5 Band Equaliser High and Low Filter curves as a combination default or individually The parameters for each section are also indicated Viewing EQ and Filter curves Press softkeys below the LCD screen e EQ FILT Thecombination of EQ and Filters is displayedin White Redline EQ contribution Green Filters contribution e FILTER Combined HFandLF Filters response curve only EQ Equaliser response curve only To view the individual contribution of any particular band click on its name field e g MFIN The colour coded individual curve will be displayed along withthe combined response Click torelease The vertical scale for boost and cut can be set using the Weys below the screen The scale options are 2 5dB 5dB 10dB 15dB 20dB 40dB 1008 and AUTO whichis the default 5 28 Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 2 4 Dynamics GUI Gate T HOLD 56dB RANGE 1 4 ATTACK 5 8 HOLD 10 0ms RELEASH 7 8m8 fes msn SS Ss Expander IN T HOLD RANGE 26d8 RATIO 224 26005 HOLD 10 0ms RELEASH 51905 Exe Compressor IM T HOLD 20dB RATIO 71 1 51906 HOLD 10 0m8 RELEASH 52 8 2138 TIHOLD 144 116 5 HOLD 50m8
88. GROUPS SSGs and MAIN To select Sends For Send levels for a particular channel click on CHSEND it highlights red and the channels are displayed in the numbers field Click on the required channel and its Sends 1 24 are displayed in the numbers field Click on the required Sends and they highlight red For a mix of all channels for a particular Send bus click on SNDMIX it highlights red and Sends 1 24 are displayed in the numbers field Click on the required Send and the channels are displayed in the numbers field Click on the required channels and they highlight red Using ALL NONE and RANGE To select all faders of any type click on ALL and all numbers will be highlighted red ALL will change to NONE Chapter 7 Session Management 7 85 juewebeueyy uoisses 9 7 8 Offline Automation OFFLINE FADERS CUTS 24 RANGE 59572 1 START OF TITLE 00 00 54 07 2 GUITAR PICS 00 01 04 02 3 auraR INTRO 00 01 0913 4 KIT INTRO 00 01 13 02 5 VOX INTRO 00 01 23 02 00 01 09 13 z nae juowebeuey 5 9 1 1 7 25 26 27 28 so 32 5 36 37 38 40 v 43 so 51 52 53 54 55 56 gt 00 01 31 08 00 01 31 08 00 01 31 08 00 01 31 08 00 01 31 08 00 01 55 10 00 01 55 24 00 01 56 14 OFFLINE CUTS automation edit GUI To select a number of consecutive faders clic
89. Layoutoverview The BACKUPS GUI primarily consists of two rows of scrolling lists each with three columns and their own buttons Either row can select the Internal Network or Removable drive via a pop up The Removable drive must be mounted first before data can be accessed which will occur automatically when it is selected The following description applies to the operation of both drives Columns The left column displays a list of all Projects on the relevant drive This allows all Projects to be viewed on both Drives simultaneously Clicking on the FACTORY legend gives access to further source options FACTORY SNAPSHOTS Basic set up Read Only Snapshots supplied with the system accessible by User ADMIN only in the Backups GUI STUDIO SNAPSHOTS Read Only Snapshots set up relating to the Studio accessible by User ADMIN only in the Backups GUI USERS Allows access to Snapshots belonging to the current User User ADMIN has access to Snapshots belonging to all Users For ADMIN the list of Users will be displayed in the left column and Snapshots will be displayed in the middle column depending upon which User is highlighted The middle column displays all Titles for a single Project when a single Project is selected If more than one Project is highlighted then the middle column is blank The right column displays all Mixes and Snapshots for a Title when a single Title is selected Selecting anything
90. MONITOR LS 153 MONITOR LS STUDIO LS 1 STUDIO LS 2 FOLDBACK 1 FOLDBACK 2 FOLDBACK 3 FOLDBACK 4 ALKBACK 1 Chapter 2 Powering The OXF R3 Chapter 2 Contents This chapter provides step by step procedures for starting up the OXF R3 including the power up sequence and the booting of the Host Computer It also includes the procedure for controlled shutdown of the OXF R3 2 1 OXE RS Start U pi 23 iccsscoscesosesessdeocsesnsvedosancecshsceseobesesecsdsesasstasveedeonse 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 OXF R3 Shutdown 2 4 2 2 1 Shutdown Procedure 2 4 Chapter 2 Powering the OXF R3 2 1 H JXO eu 2 H JXO 2 1eideuo 2 1 OXF R3 Start Up CAUTIONS 1 2 1 1 Start Up Procedure 2 2 Chapter 2 Powering the OXF R3 1 4 Before starting the OXF R3 check that all Monitor Loudspeaker Power Amps are turned off or muted Switch on equipment in the sequence given here to ensure trouble free start up Check that the motionworker and Lynx Time Code Module are already switched on and running normally Switch on the power to the SP Rack Switch on the power to the Host Computer Switch on the power to the I O Rack
91. RELEASH 100m8 mI LT Jb f son ovv DYNAMICS GUI layout This GUIfunctions in asimilar mannerto the Equaliser amp Filters screen displaying the knob setting parameters for the Gate Expander Compressor and Limiter simultaneously The related dynamics transfer curve is displayed forthe channel currently accessed In the graph displayed on this screen the X axis has a range of 80dB left to OdB right full scale for the input scale The Y axis represents the output scale from 80dB to 20dB The output scale is expanded to 20dB at the top end to allow for any gain make up to be displayed Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 29 sueeJog 9 SueeJog G 5 2 Channel Screens 5 2 5 Preferences GUI PREFERENCES STEALING SELECT MONO MEANS CUE AUTO LEVEL BOOST centre _ REPEAT RAISE RIGHT PAN OUT RESET ST METER L53 __ __ ___ ___ PREFERENCES GUI layout General Click on Preference options according to the following descriptions STEALING ASK Awarning dialogue will appear when re assigning I O already inuse allowing the previous assignmentto be retained FORCE Ocanbere assigned without dialogue irrespective ofotherassignments Note The warning will never appear whe
92. ROUPs 1 8 ABS amp TO CUTs SELECT L MASTERS ABS 8 TO FADs SELECT R MASTERS L L E 0 Select To Faders panel layout Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 1 5 peuels e eydeuo paners 3 8 Select To Faders ae ee ee ee Sy Exploiting this approach even further the faders can also be assigned to control Input Gain Group Trim and all Send Bus levels The Select to Faders diagram at the beginning of this section is a visual guide showing how the OXF R3 accommodates conventional in line channel strip level controls on its faders Note that all level controls are still available in parallel within the assignable panels in a more conventional manner This approach is very convenient for checking foldback or effects send balances The faders and their selector system are very close at hand allowing any balance to be quickly checked at a glance and adjusted A copy function allows the user to take the balance set up as the monitor mix and transfer it to any of the Send Bus mixes The fader balance copy function applies to M T Send Faders to Channel Faders and vice versa This is described in detail in Chapter 6 The 16 centre section master faders are also assignable in two groups of 8 faders They are assigned via the SEL
93. Time Code Time Code Frame Thin Film Transistor Track List Trim Uninterruptable Power Supply Voltage Controlled Amplifier Video Display Unit Video Graphics Array Chapter 1 Overview Chapter 1 Contents This chapter introduces the OXF R3 digital audio mixing console and describes the main features An example system configuration and a signal flow diagram are included OVERVIEW 1 2 1 2 Data FlOW 1 4 1 3 Signal FloW 1 6 Chapter 1 Overview 1 1 iro BET 1 1 Overview The OXF R3 is a high end digital audio mixing console system It comprises four main components Control Console with Modular Control Surface Host Computer Signal Processing SP Rack Digital and Analogue I O Racks The following illustration shows a basic system concept diagram SP Rack Host Computer Multitrack Tape Recorder s 1 2 Chapter 1 Overview System Concept diagram Digital and Analogue I O Racks Control Console Control Console Compared with traditional console designs the OXF R3 offers greater flexibility
94. auditioned levels are to be written e g set Cue points with A ENTER and B ENTER Cue points already available in the Cues List may be used or timecode points can be entered 2 Having made sure that is selected set the fader balance for any faders in ready ABS or TRM mode as desired 3 Enter the following command using the Control Keyboard A and B are assumed as the time points in the following example but Cue or timecode entries are legal too MIX A B ENTER The system will then roll back past point A to include the Pre Roll Time and then play forward The previous automation balance will be heard up until point A At point A the auditioned faders will drop into automation write and the previous balance will change to the new audition levels At point B the faders will drop out of automation write and the previous underlying balance will be heard once more 7 69 Chapter 7 Session Management juewebeueyy uoisses 1 uoisses 7 7 Dynamic Automation Moves ee 7 7 3 To Automate Cuts Cuts may be set up for automation in two ways using the local absolute and trim buttons above the faders or using the master keys READY ABSOLUTE and READY TRIM buttons beneath the central LCD screen The method for local buttons will be described first 3 4 6 5
95. f sees scrmsesf sexrsecfuonronsf Figure 5 42 MASTER GUI MAIN OUTPUT BUS insert pop up MAIN INSERT SEND Upper field Click on an upper field of one of the 8 block pairs for the Insert Send pop updisplaying possible destinations Figure C shows analogue destinations inthe form of DAC outputs Click on desired DAC number to assigna Send Fora digital output click on AES for the list of digital destinations Click OFF to disable a Send MAIN INSERT RETURN lower field Click ona lower field of one of the 8 block pairs for the Insert Return pop up in order to display sources Click on the desired analogue return source or click on AES forthe digital return sources list WORD LENGTH MAIN INSERT 1 lower middle left When digital outputs are assigned the Word Length is displayed here Clicking on it cycles through 16 20 and 24 bit settings NAME MAIN INSERT 1 lower middle right Click on this to display a pop up Either click onaname already in the list or select NEW ENTRY and use the QWERTY keyboard to type ina new name of up to 8 characters Press ENTER when finished SAMPLE RATE CONVERTER MAIN INSERT 1 lower right This indicator turns red andreads SRC ON when digital I O is selected which has its SRC turned on SRCs are controlled via the PREFERENCES GUI described earlier in this chapter Chapter 5 Control Screens _ ___ __ __ ___ MASTER GUI SUPER
96. filters GUI 5 28 hierarchy 1st level 5 6 hierarchy 2nd amp 3rd levels 5 7 I O GUI 5 11 27 line inputs 5 19 master GUI 5 39 48 mic inputs 5 15 multitrack group inserts and outputs 5 25 multitrack inputs 5 19 preferences GUI 5 30 38 routing GUI 5 8 Command lines 6 64 72 command key functions 6 65 examples 6 65 72 function keys 6 64 quick rollback 6 73 ranges amp lists 6 65 using numeric keypad to enter timecode 6 73 Control keyboard panel 6 62 command lines 6 64 72 jog wheel functions 6 63 keyboard entry to record arm channel tracks 6 75 tape remotes section 6 74 75 Control LCD screen panel 6 87 Control screens master control screens 5 2 structure 5 3 4 Control surface assignable panels 3 3 3 9 basic elements 3 3 configurations 3 2 6 3 layout 3 6 7 6 3 5 location of assignable panels 3 4 5 main areas of operation 3 3 Conventions used in this manual 6 Copy channel fader balance 7 60 Copy monitor and M T send fader balance 7 60 Cue points to adjust the time of a cue point offline 7 12 to obtain a rough balance 7 12 to set a cue point offline 7 12 to set cue points on the fly 7 11 Cuts add a new cut 7 16 7 73 advance the in point 7 17 7 74 advance the out point 7 17 7 74 automate cuts 7 13 15 7 70 75 erase a cut completely 7 18 7 75 make a cut longer 7 18 7 75 modify cuts using ready trim 7 73 set up cuts for automation locally 7 71 set up cuts for automation using central master keys 7 71 D Dat
97. g 07 Apr 1999 Time 16 14 User ADMIN SAMPLE RATE 48000 SWITCH RAMP TIME 0 ms TIMECODE FORMAT PAL SYSTEM SHUTDOWN MACHINE LOCKING NORMAL SELECT CURSOR REVERSE ARROW Q p 9 J 9 5 D 5 D 3 5 TIME DISPLAY TYPE BARS AND BEATS doeet SYSTEM screen General Selecting BARS amp BEATS Bars and Beats can be displayed in all places where The bar on the System page marked TIME DISPLAY timecode is normally displayed except the start and TYPE allows alternate selection of either end times of titles in the Artists Projects amp Titles page TIMECODE or BARS amp BEATS by clicking to the right of the bar The system allows up to 9 999 bars to be displayed down to a resolution of 16 beats per bar with 99 ticks When displaying BARS amp BEATS the large time per beat display in the MIXES amp CUES GUI has an animated graphic display of the beats whilst the tape is rolling Bars and Beats tempo maps can be programmed via depending on the current time signature the ARTISTS PROJECTS amp TITLES GUI or imported from Standard MIDI Files MID via 3 5 inch floppy Cue points may be specified in Bars and Beats and the automation will also locate to points typed in as such Chapter 7 Session Management 7 93 1 uoisses 7 9 MIDI START OF TIME BAR BARS SIG ARTISTS PROJECTS amp TITLES
98. icon to right of the FM label The ramp time can be adjusted by clicking the label below the ramp icon for a pop up 3 An end time must be specified in the SOURCE TO section using a similar method to that used to set the start time specified in step 2 In this example it is CHORUS 1 which is effectively the end of Verse 1 4 A destination within the Working Mix must be specified in the NEW LAYER FM section The procedure is a repeat of step 2 but without needing to specify a butt or ramp In the example it is VERSE 2 in order to copy the data from Verse 1 to Verse 2 Once a from FM time is specified TO time is entered automatically The TO entry itself can be edited if required 5 Further options include selecting the components in the merge the default being ALL which includes all channels CHS and the centre section CEN The example shows that CHS has been selected in the SOURCE block upper left 6 Specific channels have been selected by clicking on the numbered buttons The example shows that channels 1 12 23 24 33 and 34 have been chosen The source data will be applied to the same numbered channels but can be applied to different channels by clicking on DESTINATION 7 A further option the field at left lower middle allows individual channel and centre section components to be specified Clicking on ALL will highlight every component whilst clicking on NONE will de sel
99. 0001 01 00 START TIMECODE 00 00 00 00 00 00 36 03 00 01 45 22 00 02 58 07 00 04 13 13 00 05 57 13 00 07 46 06 END TIMECODE 00 00 36 02 00 01 45 21 00 02 58 06 00 04 13 12 00 05 57 12 00 07 46 05 00 09 44 05 00 42 36 10 00 12 33 20 00 52 35 01 00 10 00 07 01 00 23 10 21 23 58 00 00 13 01 00 00 05 30 00 ARTISTS PROJECTS amp TITLES screen displaying EDIT TEMPO MAP pop up Default TEMPO MAP A default Tempo Map is created automatically when a NEW TITLE is entered The Tempo Map assumes a single line of default settings as a starting point The Start and End Times of the Title are used to calculate the number of bars with a default tempo of 120 BPM Beats Per Minute Editing a TEMPO MAP To edit a Tempo Map click on or highlight and press for an entry to display its pop up Make changes and then press or click on OK and the other entries will be re calculated accordingly Click on NEW ENTRY to add a new line which may also be edited 7 94 Chapter 7 Session Management The START TIMECODE and END TIMECODE entries can be specified using the number keys or adjusted using the Jog wheel To link a time point to a Cue click on USE CUE which lists the Cues for the current Title and then click on the one required If the tape or storage device overruns the boundaries of a Tempo Map the tempo at the boundaries will continue outside the current map Importing a TEMPO MAP Insert the 3
100. 07 00 25 33 14 00 31 19 01 00 38 03 11 00 43 16 06 Artists Projects amp Titles screen To name ARTISTS PROJECTS and TITLES 1 7 10 On the Control Keyboard press for a large pop up to type in a name Use the QWERTY keyboard to type in a suitable name then either click on OK on the screen or press on the keyboard Selecting OK or without a name will automatically enter a default name Project 1 or the next available After a Project is named a Title pop up will appear automatically To name subsequent Titles press on the Control Keyboard A large pop up will appear prompting the user to type in a name Use the QWERTY keyboard to type in a suitable name then select OK on the screen or ENTER Chapter 7 Session Management 3 Selecting OK or ENTER without a name enters the next available default dynamic data such as fader moves and cuts have to be time related so it is necessary to set start and end times for each Title Move the orange cursor to the START column alongside the new TITLE just named Click on the START column or press on the Control Keyboard to display a pop up to type in the start time Alternatively enter time on the fly by pressing on the Control Keyboard at the appropriate instant whilst the tape is rolling Roll back and repeat if incorrect Repeat steps 3 and 4 in the END column for the end time 7 5 3 To Set Cue Points Select the MIXES amp CUES screen
101. 11 1 13 14 5 16 XXXXXXXXXXXX sEND seND SEND sENo SEND sENo sEND 17 18 19 21 22 23 24 SUB SUPER SHOW Ea Esel VALUE SEL 10 10110 10 INPUT GROUP MIT SENDs 5 5 5 5 GAIN TRIM MON 1 8 0 olo 0 MIT SENDs SEND CHANS 9 16 5 515 5 SENDs 7 CHs CHs CHs 17 24 1 24 25 48 49 72 20 20220 20 SUPER CHs CHs SSGs 1 8 73 96 97 120 ES 30 30 30 30 SUPER 5965 9 16 40 40140 40 60 60 60 60 GROUPs lo coco co 1 8 2 ABS amp SELECTL GROUPs TO CUTs MASTERS 9 16 1 ABS amp SELECT R GROUPs AIA AA AAA TO FADs MASTERS 17 24 pee cis Setting automation of Cuts locally Chapter 7 Session Management 7 1 3 juewebeueyy uoisses 9 uoIssas Ja dey9 7 5 Mixing Overview To set up Cuts for automation locally See the diagram Setting automation of Cuts locally 1 The ABS TRM buttons above the faders assigned to the faders by default ABS FADs will be lit to indicate this 2 Press ABS TRM TO CUTs to assign the and buttons to the cuts 3 Press for the cuts to be automated where new data is to be written This will overwrite previous data 4 Their red LEDs flash to indicate their ready status 5 Press for cuts to be automated where cut data is to be modifi
102. 13 Multi Stem Set up 4 13 4 Stem Monitor Switching Once stems have been set up the tape sends and returns for each stem can be switched in tandem The switching is operable in several ways using the SENDS and RETS buttons by the machine remotes or using external switches linked to GPI General Purpose Interface connections Switches may be operated locally Remotes Rows 1 2 3 XXXXXXXX 4 XXXXXXXX STEM monitor switch mapping The fire up default sets switch rows on the Control Keyboard to control stems as Remotes Row 1 Stem A Remotes Row 2 Stem B Remotes Row 3 Stem C Remotes Row 4 Stem D Mapping is fully flexible via GUI and can include Stems E H The GUI set up operation is described in the following section 4 48 Chapte
103. 3 LOAD 1 8 Mix This command will load mix data for Channels 1 8 1 3 5 7 9 11 This command will load mix data for Channels 1 3 5 7 9 and 11 01 08 This command will load mix data for Control Group Faders 1 8 LOAD 019 MIX ENTER This command will load mix data for a single Control Group Fader 19 LOAD 00 MIX ENTER This command will load mix data for the central Main Fader MIX AUTO SAVE The OXF R3 system saves backup mixes automatically The default settings are for 3 mixes to be saved in rotation one every 2 minutes The time can be varied from 1 to 60 minutes between saves with between 1 and 10 mixes The settings can be adjusted in the config file To load the most recent Auto Save mix LOAD MIX 0 ENTER Substitute 1 for the 0 to load the second most recent and 2 for the third most recent 7 37 Chapter 7 Session Management juewebeueyy uoisses 9 juawebeuey 55 5 7 6 The Session Management Screen Pages MIXES amp CUES MIXES 1 RHYTHM INTRO Y PRE ROLL 0 sec Eng TE a ee 14 59 03 Jun 1998 CUES TIME 1 START OF TITLE 00 00 54 21 3 GUITAR INTRO 00 01 03 13 4 KIT INTRO 00 01 13 02 5 ve 00 01 23 02 8 VERSE 1 00 01 31 08 i 8 VERSE 2 00 02 26 22 3 CHORUS 2 00 02 58 03 00 03 46 23 00 03 51 24 00 04 23 01 11 SOLO BREAK 1
104. 3 9 BEEBE E s ES 5 Sj oJ 0 5 gt gt m E EE 27 8 2 5505 1 8 amp SSGs 9 1 6 eee These buttons allow post channel fader and pan feeds to Super Send Groups 1 16 They are paged and Eg legends lit depending on whether Or al SUPERSGs9 16 is selected in the centre section 5 5 2 STEM Selectors A These buttons are operational in Multi Format Mode to assign channel outputs to stems set up on the multitrack busses Push Button Redirects the output of a channel from the Main Output Bus to the multitrack routing buttons in the MULTITRACK section for bounce down purposes One of the stems A H must be selected to bounce down a SOURCE surround source or a signal with surround panning X XXX XXX X MER MULTITRACK This panel contains controls related to the multitrack except individual track remotes and monitor switching These are above the pan controls in line with their equivalent number channel faders level controls can be assigned to faders Surround panning is available at this panel in parallel with the joysticks and individual pans above the faders These pan controls are operational on what is selected to the faders at the SELECT TO FADERS panel ULTITRACK The OXF R3 all
105. 4 Chapter 5 Control Screens Control Screens structure 2 5 2 Channel Screens The Channel Screens in general Six LCD Channel Screens are provided on the OXF R3 control surface three either side of the centre section Each Channel Screen can display any of the functions described The softkeys below the channel screens give access to other functions To select these functions either click on the softkey or press button below the screen Rous vo _ MASTER OXF R3 Logo Screen The OXF R3 logo screen has softkeys to the other Channel Screens as follows ROUTE Multitrack and Channel Output Routing GUI 0 Channel Input amp Output Assignments GUI EQ FILT Equaliser and Filters GUI e DYN Dynamics GUI PREF Preferences GUI e M STEM Multi StemGUI MASTER Master Output Assignments GUIs inc SSGs amp Sends Toreturn to this screen at any time select TOP from any other screen Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 5 saldeyo 9 HAI 5 2 Channel Screens SCREEN SOFTKEYS AND DESTINATIONS D LOGO TOP ROUTE EQ FILT PREF M STEM MASTER b 6 6 ot
106. 4 13 broadcast mode channel output source 4 13 broadcast mode monitoring the multitrack 4 14 broadcast mode setting up 4 12 channel metering 4 15 17 default signal path 4 2 dynamics side chain linking 4 18 21 global select source for all channels 4 10 in line channel for recording to a multitrack 4 8 in line channel multitrack recording configuration 4 7 in line channel with post fader insert in the monitor path 4 9 mix down example configuration 4 4 mix down with post channel fader insert 4 6 mix down with processing in the channel path 4 5 mixing to the main output bus 4 22 28 recording to a multitrack 4 7 send 1 post fader headphones feed 4 11 send 1 pre fader headphones feed 4 10 Index 3 III Index Signal processing SP rack 1 3 6 96 Snapshots copy amp link screen 7 49 adjusting offsets with faders and knobs 7 57 copy 7 54 57 link 7 58 59 quick copy 7 54 7 57 quick copy and link 7 55 quick link 7 55 7 58 selector definitions 7 50 snapshot 7 50 53 Software installation A 2 Specifications audio specifications A 7 13 dimensions amp weight A 15 general A 6 7 T O rack system A 14 15 product identities A 16 supplied accessories A 16 system signal to noise performance 11 Start up logo screen 7 27 Start up procedure 2 2 3 Stem selectors 3 12 Super send group buttons 3 12 Super send groups sends output and multi format panel multi format and monitor 6 83 85 panel illustration 6 76 send outputs 6 7
107. 4 Curve Characteristic Variations GML 8200 EQ Plugin Option 5 Band Parametric 4 Curve Characteristic Variations High amp Low Pass Filters 6 Slopes 6 36dB Octave 2 Slopes 6 amp 12dB Octave Dynamics DMSK R3001 GML Option Gate Expander Compressor Limiter 3 Compressor Characteristic Types GML 8900 Dynamics Plugin Opt 2 Band Parametric Side Chain EQ Can be used in Channel Path Side Chain Link To amp From Right 4 Side Chain Busses Gate Compressor Limiter 3 Compressor Characteristic Types Side Chain Link To amp From Right Post M T Fader Direct Outputs 96 Insertion Points 1 Insert 1 Insert Delay Control e 0 1 2 Seconds 48 kHz 0 0 6 Seconds 48 kHz Panning Mono Return Channels Stereo 7 1 Surround 24 Channels Stereo 7 1 Surround Inputs Mic Multitrack amp Line Channel Path Set up 8 Pick n Mix Processing Elements 2 Band Parametric Continued A 7 Appendixes sexipueddy Specifications ___ _____________ __________ _ Featues DMSK R3096 96Ch DMSK R3072 96Ch Mono Return Channels cont 24 Channels Je 2020202020200 O O e Dynamics Insertion Points 1 Insert Delay 0 1 5 Seconds Busses amp Outputs
108. 5 2 Chapter 5 Control Screens This suite of screen pages is available on the central LCD in the master section It allows System related set up and Session Management functions which cover Artists Projects Titles Mixes Snapshots Cues and Tracklists More complex data and mix functions are provided as menu options Functions involving sub menus are arranged in a priority system such that the most used functions are the most readily accessible where possible In general all of the main function screens are accessible from the softkeys located below the screen Further sub menus for more specific operations are available at subsequent levels below the main menus At these lower levels softkey functions allow the return to other main functions without the need to backtrack through multiple levels of the menu hierarchy The following diagrams show the inter relationship of the Session Management screen pages and menus available to the operator The numbers below the softkeys show the screen number see left side of diagrams which is accessed by touching the relevant softkey Screen pages available on the centrally located Session Management Screen are shown in Chapters 6 and 7 This chapter illustrates and describes the Channel Screens available on the six LCD Screens located three on either side of the OXF R3 centre section 1 The SHUTDOWN softkey on the System screen page may be used to commence shutdown of the OXF R3 syst
109. 7 42 Chapter 7 Session Management Click on RANGE to highlight it in order to select contiguous blocks of channels Then click on the first and last of each block De select RANGE when finished Click on CLEAR to de select any highlighted channels DESTINATION Click on DESTINATION if the automation data 15 to be applied to different numbered destination channels Make sure that the number of destination channels selected matches the number of source channels including multiple blocks HIDE SHOW and DELETE LAYER Click on HIDE LAYER or DELETE LAYER as appropriate The data for a hidden layer will not have any effect on what is heard Click on SHOW LAYER to bring it back MERGE ASSEMBLE tm mixes sereno OFFLINE Backups Screen Multiple layers of different types on the MERGE ASSEMBLE screen Layer types There are four categories of layers colour coded as WORKING MIX Blue This is the current underlying base mix accessed by clicking on ADD LAYER New layers taken from the Working Mix are specified using the ADD LAYER GUI Click on to edit DYNAMIC LAYER Cyan This type of layer is created by automating controls on the control surface such as faders and cuts in the normal way and cannot be edited MIX LAYER Green This type of layer consists of dynamic data from other mixes from anywhere except the Working Mix In other words mix data fr
110. 7 62 Chapter 7 Session Management OFFSET column Click on the Timecode Display for a pop up to allow OFFSET adjustment Using the Numeric Key pad to Enter Timecode The entry format is exactly the same as that used for PCM 3324 48 series remote control units 1 00 00 01 12 00 00 12 1234 00 12 34 12345 01 23 45 123456 12 34 56 12345621 12 34 56 21 12 34 56 21 12 34 56 21 12 34 56 12 34 56 Timecode shortforms x Separates hours minutes Separates minutes seconds Separates seconds frame 12 12 00 00 00 Specifies hours 34 00 34 00 00 Specifies minutes 56 00 00 56 00 Specifies seconds 21 00 00 00 21 Specifies frames The Motion Status Flag situated below the timecode offset readouts displays the motion status PARKED PLAYING WINDING REWINDING etc SUBFRAME column Click on for a pop up to type in a Subframe offset between 0 and 99 which can be negative or positive Prefix with for a negative number Command Dialogue At the base of the screen the User Command Dialogue Line bar displays commands from the dedicated Control Keyboard and QWERTY Keyboard for confirmation before ENTER Menu options Menu options available using the softkey functions displayed at the foot of the Machine Remotes screen page are as follows A Selects the previous screen page SYSTEM Selects the SYSTEM screen page directly PROJECTS Selects the ARTISTS PROJECTS amp TI
111. 77 e EL 24 SENDs o lt n 5 SENDs 9 16 e gt a o ABS amp TRM TO CUTs SELECT L MASTERS ABS amp TRM TO FADs SELECT R MASTERS OOOOE 8000 0 SEND Push Button Sets the faders in the channels sections to control the level of the Multitrack Sends which feed the M T Busses set up as Stems Make sure this button is selected before proceeding Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 41 d D A eo 5 D U m gt o 5 Je deyo 4 13 Multi Stem Set up MULTITRACK GROUP n n TRIM Ae IAFL LE SOURCE E INSERT IN DIV SUR UR
112. A H which are assigned to the monitor switches in the Remotes Rows will appear in red Click on them to select or de select accordingly The fire up default sets switch rows on the Control Keyboard to control stems as 1 Stem A 2 Stem B e REMOTE 3 Stem 4 Stem D 4 50 Chapter 4 Signal Paths HOLD button s Clicking on and highlighting in red any of the HOLD buttons in the GUI will cause the current monitor selection to be frozen in that flipping between SENDS and RETS will only affect those not held CUT button s Cuts its stem signal SOLO button s Solos its stem signal MASTER Row SEND button Selects the monitor source as the signal being sent to tape for all stems The button then alternates to RETURN in readiness for selecting the signal returning from tape for all stems CUT button Cuts all stem monitor signals HOLD CANCEL button Cancels any HOLD buttons set on in the GUI The Softkeys for this GUI Selects the top level LOGO screen FOLD 1 Selects FOLD DOWN MATRIX 7 1 5 1 LCRS FOLD2 Selects FOLD DOWN MATRIX 5 1 STEREO MONO Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 51 sued Jeydeyo 4 13 Multi Stem Set up 4 13 6 Fold Down Matrix GUIs FOLD DOWN MATRIX 7 1 gt 5 1 gt LCRS 0 008 3 598 3 598 5 3 598 0 008 HF FILT IDEA 1 12
113. Centre Section CEN must be selected in the Snapshots GUI in order for these settings to be recalled The Softkeys for these GUls Selects the top level LOGO screen Alternates between FOLD 1 and FOLD 2 M STEM Selects the MULTI STEM SET UP GUI Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 53 Chapter 5 Control Screens In this chapter the user will find a summary of the screens menus available when operating the OXF R3 system They divide into 3 categories System and general set up Session Management and those which relate to OXF R3 mixer functions such as input and output routing equaliser and dynamics curve displays Diagrams are included which show the inter relationships between the screens available on the central LCD Master Control Screen referred to as the Session Management Screen Chapter 5 Contents 5 1 The Master Control Screens cssccsscscscssscssscsssssecsscesseccssscoess 5 2 5 2 Channel Screelis heuentesedessesecate 5 5 5 221 Routing ree Rn 5 8 A 9 2 2 EAEE EE EE 5 11 8 5 2 3 Equaliser amp Filters GUI eee 5 28 5 Seo GU omit mt eut d a 5 29 3 5 2 5 Preferences aes c PNE 5 30 2 5 2 6 Master GUI includes Main Bus Outputs 5 39 Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 1 SueeJog G 19 5 1 The Master Control Screens
114. Control Keyboard The timecode pop up will be displayed Type in the timecode and click on OK or press ENTER Alternatively move the orange highlight into the TIME column and press on the Control Keyboard at the appropriate timecode point either with the tape rolling or stopped To set Cue Points On the Fly To set a cue point on the fly roll the tape and press on the Control Keyboard in readiness for setting a cue point At the appropriate time press and a cue point will be added at the time is pressed A pop up will then appear to prompt for a name entry Either press for the next default Cue Number or type in an appropriate name and press ENTER Repeat as necessary for any subsequent cues The cues scroll automatically with reference to timecode The current cue is displayed in the central white bar surrounded by black lines Any commands which specify Start and End times such as CYCLE will cause green highlights to be displayed on those cues Cues List Scrolling The CUES list scrolls through automatically as the tape is rolling The current Cue is placed in the middle of the list by default but the SCROLL BAR to the left of the CUES list can be used to place the current CUE at the most convenient position It may be preferable to see more of the approaching CUES than those already passed for example If there is a long list of CUES some of which are above or below the section being displayed t
115. Copy and Link functions to Dynamics section settings inter cancels with or or DYNAMICS But EQ A EQ B and DYNAMICS can be used in any combination If EQ A and are on simultaneously the Filters are also included in Copy and Link operations Adjusting offsets with Faders and Knobs The offsets between linked control functions can be adjusted in a number of ways Faders To adjust offsets between faders touch and hold one and adjust any others in the Link Group Definable Knobs such as Pans To adjust offsets between definable knobs press and hold one knob and adjust any others in the Link Group Other Knobs e g EQ or Dynamics sections To adjust knobs in the assignable channels section areas de select the channel from the Link Group make the adjustments and then re link that channel into the Link Group It is possible with EQ panels for example to press and hold a knob on one side of the control surface and adjust the same knob on a linked channel the other side COPY using the GUI The COPY and CP DYN buttons in the GUI allow the copying of channel functions using two GUI pop ups The definitions for COPY and CP DYN are COPY Copies the static settings of controls CPDYN Copies the Dynamic Automation data for automated controls and static settings for others Copy functions will affect channel controls according to the Copy DEFAULTS fields Click on COPY for pop ups in the fol
116. DELAY Push Button The processing delay in the SP system has no compensation In other words the delay through any channel is at its minimum totally dependent upon the amount of processing inserted in that channel AUTO DELAY Push Button Delay compensation is inserted in the SP system for all channels according to the processing of the channel with most processing and hence the longest delay in order that the outputs of all channels are time aligned FREEZE DELAY Push Button The delay compensation factor in the SP system is fixed for all channels according to the delays in operation at the time FREEZE DELAY is latched SLAVE FADs MOVE Push Button Faders slaved to Control Group faders will move according to the Control Group fader displaying their exact contribution to the mix Q FADs0dB Push Button To set faders at unity gain latch FADs OdB and press ACCESS for the appropriate faders and they will light Then de select FADs OdB if the faders are to retain their OdB setting in other words they will rubber band back or de select ACCESS buttons before FADs OdB is released CEN ACCS L Push Button Selects the left hand Channels Section to be assigned to the Main L R Fader when its ACCESS or any other centre section ACCESS is latched CEN ACCS Push Button Selects the right hand Channels Section to be assigned to the Main L R Fader when its ACCESS or any other centre section ACCESS is latched CEN ACCS L
117. Fly To set the START time on the fly roll the tape and press on the Control Keyboard at the appropriate moment Roll back and repeat if incorrect The time pop up is not required for this method To set the End Time for a Title To set the END time highlight the END column at the appropriate line then follow the same procedure as described above for setting the Start time Typing in the timecode or setting the time on the fly works in the same way Entering Notes for a Title Click on the column to the right of the Title or highlight and press on the Control Keyboard for the NOTES pop up related to the Title on the same line Use the QWERTY Keyboard to enter notes and press or click on OK The icon appears only if there is a Notes entry Start and End times will be automatically propagated to the Cues list as the first and last cue points for the Title 7 33 Chapter 7 Session Management juewebeueyy uoisses 9 5595 1 1 7 6 The Session Management Screen Pages 1 Highlight and click on or press for edit pop ups for the following banners Client Enter the Client s name here for reference purposes if required This relates to the current Title only Producer Enter the name of the Producer for the current Title Engineer Enter the name of the Engineer for the current Title Assistant Enter the name of the Assistant Engineer for the
118. Gl m ss E J XXXXXXXX seror MONITOR LS dol B n TALKBACK amp LISTEN 5 75 10 10 XXXXXXXX is gt 0 SELECT B 15 15 KXXXXXXX us XXXXXXxxx 8 58 COCOA 20 20 B ai d SELECT CHANs FADER ER FOLDBACK GROUPS 1 4 aay ale ds N ORDER THAT THE gt pe a 5 1 SURROUND ROUTING BUTTONS KXXXXXXX e Na ARE ASSIGNED TO THE HEARSE ME LEVEL Ir LEVEL LEVEL E 9 ist fiss os CHANNEL OUTPUT AS THE n MONITOR MATRIX f ACCESS 5 4 22 PEPE Block Schematic of Stereo and Surround Mix Down illustrating interconnections of all components including monitoring Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 23 y IM 4 12 Mixing to the Main Output Bus n H 4 12 1 Main Output Bus Set up MULTI FORMAT amp STEREO SUB GROUPS 1 16
119. Inputs 1 6 Select using the EXT SOURCE buttons in the Monitor Panel to listen to them The Softkeys for this GUI TOP Selects the top level LOGO screen SEXTSRC Selects STEREO EXTERNAL SOURCES MASTER Selects the top level MASTER screen Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 47 Jeydeuo 5 2 Channel Screens CRM SLS F BACK T BACK AND OSC CR MONITOR 2 Lt OFF _oFF BNALOG 508 R S BNALOG OFF L OFF oFF TALK BACK MIC 005850 orr orr J orr j orr L_ANALOG __ orr __ STUDIO LS 1 STUDIOLS2 HE amp D PHONE LISTEN m orr FOLD BACK 1 FOLD BACK 2 FOLD BACK 3 FOLD BACK 4 j orc Wi orr j orr orr j ___ ____ Imao __ OSCILLATOR OSCILLATOR B orr J orr __ __j L_oFF LL Teems ___ ____ ___ MASTER GUI Monitors and misc assignments page layout This GUI allows assignment of CONTROL ROOM MONITOR LS Outputs 1 2 amp 3 TALKBACK MIC METERS Output for Signals Feeding Central Meters STUDIO LS Outputs 1 amp 2 HEADPHONE Output 1 LISTEN Mic FOLDBACK Outputs 1 4 OSCILLATOR A and B Outputs The Softkeys for
120. MAIN BUS of Busses According to Central Setup 7 1 5 1 LCRS or STEREO EXT SOURCE cr XXXXXXXX MAIN OUTPUT 25 st ices 8 MON MON MON MON MON JAAA 3 R C R u Ls SUB RS MAIN OUTPUT amp MONITOR Simplified signal path illustrating the components for mixing to the Multi Channel Main Output 4 22 Chapter 4 Signal Paths
121. Management juewebeueyy uoisses 9 uoisseg 7 5 Mixing Overview 7 5 12 To Assemble a Mix The MERGE ASSEMBLE GUI allows Mixes and Snapshots from any source to be merged with the current Working Mix Each bar in the GUI represents a Mix Layer and these may include additional Dynamic Layers MERGE ASSEMBLE DYNAMIC LAYER 2 M KEYS UP TO KEY CHANGE 4 00 01 23 02 to 00 04 27 EA EDU 00303300300 gt SAVE MIX AS_NEW system mixes ofr une f eacus screen MERGE ASSEMBLE screen 1 00304300300 00305300300 1 Select the ASSEMBLE softkey at the bottom of 3 Select the source data using the upper section of the central LCD and a time line GUI will display the current Working Mix as a bar along the bottom of the screen Individual bars for each unsaved Dynamic Layer will also be displayed Any New Dynamic Layers will appear after creation once the tape is put into rewind 2 To add a new layer from a previous Mix or Snapshot click on ADD LAYER to view the pop up on the next page Extensive options are available but a simple case will be described in this overview which involves copying mix data within a Title from Verse 1 to Verse 2 7 24 Chapter 7 Session Management the GUI The default source is the current Artist Project Title and its Working Mix The mix data for Verse 1 is a
122. O Port from 1 16 There is one port per Card with a maximum of 16 per system CHANNEL Second field Click on for a pop up to select the MIDI Channel from 1 16 COMMAND Third field Click on for a pop up to select the MIDI Command type 7 90 Chapter 7 Session Management 16 PusButtons Allow selection of MIDI Control Page banks PusButtons Allow selection of individual MIDI Control Pages according to the banks selected Pages should be displayed on channel LCD screens above the Free Assign Area panels by selecting the appropriate MIDI softkey PARAMETER Fourth field Displays a first Parameter depending on which COMMAND type has been selected Click on to select the Parameter to the knob for adjustment indicated by an orange highlight PARAMETER Fifth field Displays a second Parameter depending on which COMMAND type has been selected Click on to select the Parameter to the knob for adjustment indicated by an orange highlight ENABLED DISABLED Sixth field Click on to Enable or Disable MIDI control from the associated knob The Parameter values can be adjusted whilst disabled The value settings will be transmitted at the point Enable is clicked on SCRIBBLE Lower field Click on for a pop up to enter an appropriate electronic scribble name which will appear on the display above the associated knob Either click on a name in the list or click on NEW ENTRY and then use the QWERTY
123. ON Push Buttons Each knob controls the level to its bus with a range from infinity completely off to 10dB of gain Its associated push button allows preset Send levels to be switched on and off The 6 character display above each Level knob and switch pair indicates the bus number or name accordingly Each odd even pair of Sends can be linked to form a Stereo Send bus This is achieved at the Send Outputs panel in the centre section by selecting the STER eo button between the odd even pair of Sends to be linked In this case on the panels in the channel areas the odd numbered knob is retained as a level control whilst the even numbered knob becomes a left right pan Send settings are displayed simultaneously for a single channel at this panel The balance for any single Send bus can be achieved by assigning that Send bus to the Faders or Definable Knobs Pans by default See the Select to Faders panel description section 6 2 2 or the Select to Pans panel description section 6 2 4 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 33 suonduoseg 9 saideyo suonduoseg 09 9 6 2 Channels Section Panels CH INPUT INPUT CHANNEL INPUT CHANNEL amp INSERTS J C Nig Nig CH OUTPUT
124. Second field Indicator This indicator turns red and reads SRC ON when a digital source is selected which has its SRC turned on SRCs are controlled via the PREFERENCES GUI described later in this chapter NAME Third field The lower field is used to enter an electronic scribble name for the LINE INPUT Click on this to display a pop up as shown in Figure B Either click onaname already displayed or click NEW ENTRY anduse the QWERTY keyboard to type in anew name of upto 6 characters Press ENTER when finished Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 19 sueeJog 9 19 dey9 5 2 Channel Screens TOP J store 5 20 Chapter 5 Control Screens CHANNEL FAST INSERTS pop up Assigning CHANNEL INSERTS The 8 blocks towards the bottom of the GUI entitled INSERTS each with 5 fields the title is useable field too are used to set up channel inserts Inserts can be set up in two ways using the pre assigned FAST INSERTS via upper field or by setting each item individually using the other fields FAST INSERT Upper field Clicking on the upper INSERTS field gives access to the FAST INSERTS pop up Each selection can have a pre assigned input output and appropriate name These are set up via the PREF Preferences GUI described later in this chapter Click on the desired device
125. TO MAIN Push Button Replaces the Main Output Bus signal with the oscillator signal The Oscillator ON button must be selected The CR Monitor LS dim automatically TO GROUPS Push Button Sends the Oscillator output to all multitrack Group outputs replacing bus signals The Oscillator ON must be selected Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 61 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 suonduoseg jeoluyoe 9 6 3 Central Section Panels M i 6 3 3 Control Keyboard Panel CANCEL CANCEL REPEAT 6 62 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions CONTROL KEYBOARD This panel contains the Control Keyboard dedicated to the Session Management and system automation along w
126. To set up Cuts for automation using the central master keys Q READY ABSOLUTE Push Button Latch READY ABSOLUTE and press any cuts to be This latching button allows the user to set cuts into an automated and they will flash to show that they are automation ready state where new cuts can be written enabled When READY ABSOLUTE is pressed again which will overwrite previous data If any cuts were de selecting it the enabled cuts return to their previous already lit their lights will go out for the set up during states Rolling the tape causes READY ABSOLUTE to the period that READY ABSOLUTE is latched be de selected automatically Chapter 7 Session Management 7 71 juewebeueyy uoisses Jejdeuo 5 9 Ja dey9 7 7 Dynamic Automation Moves READY TRIM Push Button works in the same way as READY ABSOLUTE It allows cuts to be set up such that existing cuts can be modified or additional cuts created without overwriting previous cut data READY CANCEL Push Button READY CANCEL takes all controls out of the ready state and returns them to a safe mode GLOBAL DROP IN Key GLOBAL DROP IN puts the cuts which are set up ready into write and can be actioned either before the tape is rolling or while it is rolling Once GLOBAL DROP IN is selected the cuts can be actioned whilst the tape is rolling To revise any cuts roll the tape back and play
127. UNDO ALL key DELETE Command Lines When using DELETE commands a dialogue box requires confirmation or cancellation DELETE PROJECT ENTER Deletes the currently highlighted PROJECT including its TITLES MIXES SNAPSHOTS and CUES DELETE PROJECT ENTER Deletes the specified numbered PROJECT DELETE PROJECT 1 3 5 Deletes PROJECTS 1 3 and 5 DELETE PROJECT 1 5 Deletes PROJECTS 1 5 inclusive The Command Lines above may be applied in a similar way for deleting Titles Mixes Snapshots and Cues substituting the appropriate word for PROJECT in each instance DELETE TITLE ENTER Deletes the currently highlighted TITLE including its MIXES SNAPSHOTS amp CUES DELETE or other F Key ENTER Deletes the F1 or other F Key macro sequence COPY Command Line COPY ENTER Cause the SNAPSHOTS COPY amp LINK GUI to appear along with the pop up allowing Snapshots to be copied Make appropriate selections according to the pop up and click on OK or press ENTER LOAD Command Lines LOAD SNAPSHOT ENTER or LOAD SNAPSHOT ENTER Loads the currently highlighted SNAPSHOT or one specified by number according to SNAPSHOT Defaults settings in the Snapshots GUI Ranges and Lists can be specified when loading Snapshots 1 5 SNAPSHOT ENTER 1 5 SNAPSHOT ENTER Loads the currently highlighted SNAPSHOT or one specified by number according to SNAPSHOT Defaul
128. above for recording absolute moves Use local Write buttons in fader knobs or GLOBAL DROP IN and GLOBAL DROP OUT on the Control Keyboard to action the recording of moves in just the same way as for absolute moves Fader TOUCH modes TOUCH WRITE Push Button This button latches allowing any faders set in ready 7 68 Chapter 7 Session Management ABS or ready TRM to have their moves recorded whilst their fader knobs are being touched Q TOUCH HOLD Push Button Latch to set any number of faders to have their touch function set on permanently which is indicated by the yellow touch LEDs Once a number of faders have been set in Touch Hold this button can be de selected Their touch status will be retained indicated by yellow LEDs This function allows a new balance to be set irrespective of underlying automation data Latch the button at any time and touch any individual fader knobs to take them out of Touch Hold Q TOUCH CLEAR Push Button This momentary button clears all faders of Touch Hold AUDITION Push Button The audition function works for any automated fader or knob which is in a ready state i e its red or green LED is flashing When this button is latched on touching a fader or moving a knob puts it into audition mode Audition is designed to be used when revising mixes In ready ABS Audition mode the current absolute fader knob position will override any automation playback allowing an abso
129. according to the meter selector described later in this section Surround Main Output Indicate output levels for the Main Output Bus Q MAIN Push Button Depends on whether the Main Output Bus is set for Stereo or Surround Selecting ensures that the Main Output Bus sources are fixed to the meters irrespective of what is selected to the CR Monitor LS Stereo Main Output Indicate the L and R signals from the Main Output Bus or L and R from the Fold Down Matrix This option is set in the PREFERENCES GUI described in section 5 2 5 Right set of 8 Meters indicate output level for SSGs 1 16 and Sends 1 24 according to the meter selector described later in this section Surround Main Output Central Stereo Meter indicates output level for the Stereo Output from the Fold Down Matrix which is derived from the Surround signal Right set of 8 Meters indicate output levels for the Main Output Bus FOLLOW MONITOR Push Button Depends on whether the Main Output Bus is set for Stereo or Surround Selecting FOLLOW MONITOR allows the central meters to follow all monitor source selections including AFL and PFL signals Stereo Main Output Central Stereo Meter indicates output level for Main Stereo and all other sources which are listened to on the CR Monitor LS including AFL and PFL signals Right set of 8 Meters indicate output level for SSGs 1 16 and Sends 1 24 according to the meter selector described later
130. amp Listen T B1 amp T B 2 Push Buttons 178 1 T B 2 are included for connection to GPIO General Purpose Inputs amp Outputs utilising relay closures and opto coupled tally inputs Pressing a T B button sends talkback to the destination displayed within its dot display A short press latches the switch on requiring a further press to release it Holding the switch down enables a momentary action The CR monitors may optionally dim when talkback is in use 8 Character Displays Display T B destination names as designated via the SCRIBBLES GUI accessed via the MASTER GUI T B GRP 1 amp T B 2 Push Buttons Allow combinations of T B outputs to be switched on simultaneously A group is set up by pressing and holding one of the T B GROUP buttons and momentarily pushing other T B buttons required in that group The T B GROUP button is then released Any T B button such as Foldback or SLS may be selected as part of a group Any T B button which belongs to a group retains its individual functionality T B GROUPS have latching and momentary actions and may optionally dim CR monitor LS 8 Character Displays Display T B Group names as designated via the SCRIBBLES GUI accessed via the MASTER GUI LISTEN 1 Push Button Send the listen Mic signal to CR monitors with either a momentary or latching action The Listen signal replaces the normal monitor signal LOCK Push Button Locks out SOLO IN PLACE which is
131. and any offsets between knob settings are retained The retention of offsets applies only to those knobs which can be fully automated The control settings linked in Quick Link are set according to what is highlighted in the Link DEFAULTS field displayed on the LINK page Click on LINK in the banner at the top of the GUI to view the LINK DEFAULTS Note Make sure LINK DEFAULTS is highlighted in red in the LINK page Click on it if not QUICK COPY and LINK This is accomplished using the upper and lower rows of ACCESS buttons as follows Press and hold down the lower button for the source channel Its will light first red and then turn amber after half a second When it has changed to amber select the upper ACCESS buttons for the destination channels one by one The control settings linked in Quick Copy and Link are set according to what is highlighted in the Link DEFAULTS field displayed on the LINK page Click on LINK in the banner at the top of the GUI to view the LINK DEFAULTS De Make sure LINK DEFAULTS is highlighted in red in the LINK page Click on it if not 7 55 Chapter 7 Session Management juewebeueyy uoisses 9 juowebeuey 5 9 Ja dey9 7 6 The Session Management Screen Pages
132. buttons in the ROUTE TO TRACKS section A Post Fader and Front L R Pan signal will be fed to the two tracks The L signal is fed to the lowest number track and the R to the highest Selecting more than two buttons in the ROUTE TO TRACKS section A Post Fader and Front L R Pan signal will be fed to the tracks The L signal is fed to the lowest number track and the R to the rest of the higher number tracks Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 45 Syed 5 19 deyo 4 13 Multi Stem Set up SELECT TO PANS SHOW VALUE 2 NPUT GANN TRIM 9 Automation switches for the Motorised Joysticks ABS Push Button Used to select ready absolute status when automating joystick panning movements The automation functions are exactly the same as those for faders see Chapter 7 TRIM Push Button Used to select ready trim status when automating joystick panning movements The automation functions are exactly the same as those for faders see Chapter 7 AUTO REC Push Button Used to switch the joystick into automation record according to the ABS or TRIM status The automation functions are exactly the same as those for faders see Chapter 7 This button lights to indicate that the joystick is being touched 4 46 Chapter 4 Signal Paths Routing and
133. by switches lighting amber 5 Roll back and repeat GLOBAL DROP IN until the cuts are satisfactory 6 Press READY CANCEL ENTER once cuts have been completed The bi colour LEDs in the cut switches help with the operation of these functions The red light indicates manual actions and amber those being performed by the computer Extra bright red amber indicates simultaneous manual and computer control ON TIME ee PREVIOUS CUT CUT 7 73 Chapter 7 Session Management juewebeueyy uoisses Jejdeuo TA 1 uoisses 7 7 Dynamic Automation Moves Advance the in point Push the CUT switch earlier and hold until the original in point is passed then release ACTION L PREVIOUS TIME CUT CUT ON MODIFIED CUT TIME Advance the out point Push the CUT switch and hold during the original cut then release at the new earlier out point PUSH amp HOLD 121 PREVIOUS TIME CUT ON MODIFIED CUT 7 74 Chapter 7 Session Management To make cut longer Push and hold the CUT switch during the original cut Release at the new later out point ON MODIFIED CUT To PREVIOUS TI
134. current Title Sample Rate Click on for a pop up to set the Sample Rate for the current Title Click on the one which is correct for the incoming word clock IMPORTANT Timecode Type Click on for a pop up to set the Timecode type for the current Title It must match the incoming timecode for the system to function correctly IMPORTANT Tempo Map Click on EDIT for the MIDI Tempo Map pop up Details of how to enter and edit the Tempo Map are described in the section on MIDI Date Displays today s date 7 34 Chapter 7 Session Management Command Dialogue At the base of the screen the User Command Dialogue Line bar displays commands from the dedicated Control Keyboard and QWERTY Keyboard for confirmation before ENTER Menuoptions Menu options available using the softkey functions displayed at the foot of the Artists Projects amp Titles screen page are as follows A Selects the previous screen page SYSTEM Selects the SYSTEM screen page directly MIXES Selects the MIXES amp CUES page for all mixing functions SNAPSHOT Selects the SNAPSHOTS COPY amp LINK page REMOTES Selects the MACHINE REMOTES assignment matrix TRACKS Selects the TRACK LISTS page BACKUPS Selects System BACKUPS functions SCREEN Selects pop up showing all available screen selections Click on any one to select it 7 6 5 Mixes amp Cues Screen This screen page displays all the Mixes amp Cues which r
135. enough detail to allow the experienced operator to start using the OXF R3 Chapter 4 Signal Paths Explains the general principles of building signal paths and gives examples of types of signal paths that may be built from the basic default signal path existing at Chapter 5 Control Screens Lists all the control screens available in the OXF R3 The screens related to the channels and mixer functions are described in detail Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions Provides the descriptions of all the modules of the OXF R3 including the names locations and functions of the controls This chapter also includes descriptions of the associated SP Rack and I O Rack system Chapter 7 Session Management System Describes the sophisticated and flexible Session Management system available to OXF R3 users including automation of functions a key feature of the Session Management system Both static and dynamic automation is possible using the OXF R3 Appendixes Provide the information for the following Software installation upgrades Multi format LS calibration Specifications Diagnostic facilities There are no user operable diagnostic facilities provided in this version of the OXF R3 About This Manual 5 About This Manual aa SSS ess Conventions used in this manual This manual uses the following conventions Chapter 3 Section 10 3 10 Basic Console Operations Subsection 5
136. enter a new Title Click on NEW or PROJECT ENTER on the Control Keyboard for a pop up to name a new TITLE Type in a name using the QWERTY keyboard and press or click on OK or OK without a name will enter the next default number To edit a Title name Highlight and click on the name or press on the Control Keyboard to display a pop up dialogue box Type in a name using the QWERTY keyboard and press or click on OK To re order a Title entry Click on its number in the left hand column for a pop up Overwrite the current number using the numeric pad on the Control Keyboard and press or click on OK The list will re order itself To set the Start Time fora Title To set the Start time highlight the START column at the appropriate line Click on the highlighted time or press on the Control Keyboard and type in the time Then or click on OK Using the Numeric Key pad to Enter Timecode The entry format is exactly the same as that used for PCM 3324 48 series remote control units 1 00 00 01 12 00 00 12 1234 00 12 34 12345 01 23 45 123456 12 34 56 12345621 12 34 56 21 12 34 56 21 12 34 56 21 12 34 56 12 34 56 Timecode shortforms Separates hours minutes Separates minutes seconds Separates seconds frame 12 12 00 00 00 Specifies hours 34 00 34 00 00 Specifies minutes 56 00 00 56 00 Specifies seconds 21 00 00 00 21 Specifies frames To set the Start Time On the
137. facility for all I O Scribble pop ups MONO Set up facility for Fast Insert I O SRC Sample Rate Converter control Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 33 sueeJog 9 19 dey9 SueeJog G 5 2 Channel Screens ALIAS ADC 1 ADC 2 m m m pcm m ADC 3 m ADC 11 pm 51 MAD St ADC 59 ADC 59 ADC 4 ADC 5 MaDe S ADC 61 ADC BT ADC 6 TRIN EU or rm T ADC 7 MCI m m so m ADC 8 seno PREFERENCES GUI I O ALIAS page layout General This GUI allows objects to be given names which can relate to the local environment ADC 1 could be named MIC 1 for example which mightrelate to a particular microphone input socket on a panel in the studio Soinstead of ADC 1 appearing in the I O assignment GUI MIC 1 will be displayed provided Alias is selected in the PREFERENCES GUI NAME Lower field Click on this to display a pop up Enteraname of up to 6 characters using the QWERTY keyboard Press ENTER when finished The Softkeys for this GUI TOP Selects the top level LOGO screen ADC Alias names for ADCs Alias names for DACs SEND AES Alias names fo
138. fed according to the settings of the Multi Format routing buttons BOUNCE Push Button Re directs the channel output from the Main Output Bus to the Multitrack Busses For a bounce down select and then depending on whether the Main Output Bus is set to Stereo or a Surround Mode Stereo In the ROUTE TO TRACKS section select from routing buttons 1 48 accordingly Odd numbered buttons will assign the L output of channels and even will assign the R output Surround In this case the channel outputs can only be bounced to Stems which are already set up Select a Stem button one of A H Then make assignments using the the surround buttons at the top of the Routing panel in the MULTI FORMAT section The level and pan settings are retained making this operation extremely easy and convenient Access Function Q amp Push Buttons Are linked to the channel ACCESS buttons and are used to move the channel Access assignment left or right across the channels A highlighted area within the appropriate LCD channel control screens reflects any change in assignment highlighting relevant information such as routing set up for example 6 2 9 LCD Channel Screen Panel Three LCD Channel Screens are provided in each channels section of the OXF R3 control surface Each panel contains a 10 4 inch colour TFT LCD VGA screen for displaying channel input and output routing EQ and dynamics transfer curve and parameters
139. have been selected click on VIEW again to de select it Any events related to the cuts selected in VIEW mode will be displayed in the Cues list Cut EVENT edit EVENT mode is the default and it will highlight red Cut events for the selection will be displayed in the list along with the cues and the current state of the cuts will be indicated in the numbers field according to the following colour coding BLUE Uncut without any data written WHITE Uncut controlled by the automation AMBER Cut controlled by the automation RED RING Cut event s at the current timecode A red ring around the outside of a number box indicates the first timecode point for the new state cut or uncut Automated cut events will be displayed in the numbers field as the tape is rolling and their entry in the cues list will also be highlighted The GUI display has a lower priority than the cut events and therefore the screen may not react in real time as the tape is rolling New EVENT Cuts Any cuts selected using VIEW which have no automation data blue coding can be automated using this GUI Click on a channel to cycle through RED Cut from the highlighted timecode WHITE Uncut from the highlighted timecode BLUE No automation To Nudge or Change a Cut Event Time Highlight its timecode entry in the cues list then use the and buttons on the control keyboard to change the time Alternatively click on its timecode for a pop up and nudg
140. host computer e Up to 4 x SP Link Module Interfaces between SP and I O racks Up to 16 SP PCBs Quantity according to SP power requirement PSUs For cards as above 6 96 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 6 I O Racks The I O system for the OXF R3 utilises a universal rack design for both analogue and digital I O input and output modules 310 0 Rack 6 6 1 I O Rack Modules Each I O rack contains x Digital Link Card Module Up to 10 x Digital or Analogue I O Modules Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 97 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 I Chapter 7 Session Management Chapter 7 Contents 7 1 The Basic 7 2 7 2 Files Hierarchy and Automatable Controls 7 3 7 2 1 Tues Hierarchy ieu 7 3 7 2 2 Automatable Controls essere 7 6 7 3 File Data Storage ccscsssscosascssesescaseccescocsavscesseossocsseosescsonssoseseosssecessors 7 7 7 4 Programme Material ccscccssccssssscssccssscsscsscescessssssssssssssscessoeee 7 8 7 5 MIXING OVER View PP C 7 9 J 5 2L Getting Started e o ra ses 7 9 7 5 2 Name the Artist Project and Title
141. if one has been set SENDS 1 24 Push Buttons Allow pans to be switched to control the levels sent to the effects and foldback busses Joystick The joystick surround sound panner is in parallel with the M T Send Pan It allows 2D surround panning in multi format mode and left right pan in stereo mode Its knob is touch sensitive indicated by the AUTO REC push button lighting when touched D ABS Push Button Used to select ready absolute status when automating joystick panning movements see Chapter 7 TRIM Push Button Used to select ready trim status when automating joystick panning movements see Chapter 7 AUTO REC Push Button Used to switch the joystick into automation record according to the ABS or TRM status see Chapter 7 6 2 5 Input and Equaliser Panel This panel is divided into two distinct sections the INPUT CHANNEL amp INSERTS section and the EQUALISER amp FILTERS section designated A and B respectively in the illustration EQUALISER amp FIL XXXXXXXX B 0 6 INPUT CHANNEL amp INSERTS
142. in control of the R3 and Motionworker or 9 P control SHOW REMOTES FRAMES Sets the TC display by the transport remotes to display frames TRACK ARMING USES GPIO Sets Record Ready buttons one above each channel fader to control the GPIO record relays and display the state of tally inputs The GPIO card will be installed in one of the I O racks Selecting NO for this option will cause the Record Ready buttons to operate on whichever machine control interface is currently in use TRACK ARMING FORCES INPUT 9 PIN ONLY Switches tracks into input mode automatically when they are record enabled LOCK DISABLES SHUTDOWN Prevents display of the SYSTEM SHUTDOWN pop up and related command LOCK DISABLES NESTED GROUPS This relates to the Control Group Faders 1 32 It prevents the setting up or alteration to nested Control Groups since this could cause jumps in level AUTOMATION Tab PLAYBACK WHEN MASTER LOCKED Allows playback of automation data with just the master machine locked to the system In other words there is no delay waiting for slave machines to become synchronised The following MUTE Preferences relate to elements which may be set to mute during partial loading of Snapshots and Mixes preventing any signals being fed to busses during the load operation This may be desirable when the new data will load a significantly different set up to the current one MUTE CHANNELS ON LOAD Mutes the Chann
143. in parallel with the button on the Monitor panel Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 85 eoiuuoe 9 suonduoseq 9 6 3 Central Section Panels es 6 3 5 Central Section Faders The two banks of 8 Faders in the console centre section are identical to the faders used in the channel sections of the control surface Refer to Section 6 2 1 in this chapter for details of the Fader Modules Assignment of these central Multi purpose Faders is effected from the SEL push buttons at the Select To Faders Select panels Refer to Section 6 2 2 in this chapter for details of the Select To Faders modules 3 e 25 2 29 E 3 9 23 179 38 EJ EJ EJ Be El ooo XXXXX 6 86 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions Central section Multi purpose Faders Control Groups and Slaves Press and hold on a central Control Group Fader until it turns amber Latch on the channel fade
144. in this section e Surround Main Output Central Stereo Meter indicates the L and R signals from the Main Output Bus and any other source listened to on the CR Monitor LS including external sources AFL and PFL signals Right set of 8 Meters indicate output levels for the Main Output Bus and all other sources which are listened to on the CR Monitor LS including external sources AFL and PFL signals Global meter functions This section describes functions which apply to all meters in the meter bridge except for which applies just to the channels sections DISP PEAK Push Button Global function Meters continue to display peaks as single segments for a period of 1 5 seconds after the signal has ceased PEAK HOLD Push Button Global function Meters continue to display highest peak as a single segment until CLEAR PEAK is pressed CLEAR PEAK Push Button Global function Clears the Peak Hold memory MTRs to INPUT Push button Global function Meters the channel signal immediately post input gain control Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 45 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 suonduoseq jeoiuuoe 9 Jaydeyo 6 3 Central Section Panels EEE 7 CHs 90dB Push Button Global function Selects the 90dB scale on the mono channel meters the default is 60dB LOCK 1 48 Push Button Locks the 48 channel meters to channels 1 48 ST METERS an
145. input and output set ups and assignments Many different MIXES may be created for a title and the final MIX may well be created by combining sections from several earlier mixes CUES CUE points are specific listed time points within a title They are numbered for quick reference and may be given names which is normally more appropriate CUE points may be added either explicitly by typing or by actions on the fly TRACK LISTS A TRACK LIST refers to the list of sound sources on a specific piece of storage e g the multitrack tape NOTES The list fields for entities such as Titles Mixes and Cues have NOTES columns indicated by the note icon Clicking on this column adjacent to the appropriate item causes a NOTES pop up to appear NOTES icon SNAPSHOTS A SNAPSHOT is a static set up of all the console control settings and its input output settings which may be stored and recalled at a later date It is not time related and may be recalled at any time as a whole entity or in part as desired Snapshots may be stored under various headings to which they relate Titles Factory Studio and Users Passwords may be used when storing SNAPSHOTS to protect them and to prevent unauthorised use The Snapshot File Structure diagram is shown below REMOVABLE MEDIA INTERNAL DRIVE NETWORK ARTISTS PROJECTS TITLES SNAPSHOTS FACTORY STUDIO USER SNAPSHOTS SNAPSHOTS SNAPSHOTS
146. inputs can be assigned simultaneously To assign a set of consecutive inputs to anumber of consecutive channel inputs ADCs 9 16 tochannel Mic Inputs 1 8 as an example Click on the upper field below the MIC legend of Channel 1 for the assignment pop up shownin Figure A Clickon RANGE andits characters turn white and the background red Click on the lowest number of the ADCs required 9 in this example and ithighlights red e Click on the highest number of the ADCs required 16 in this example and ADCs 9 16 assigned simultaneously to Mic Inputs 1 8 ADCs already in use will be stolen in all cases when the RANGE function is used To set a range of inputs to off Clickon RANGE andits characters turn white and the background red Click on OFF fora pop up displaying the channel numbers e Click on the first and last ofthe range required PHANTOM POWER Second field left The second field left toggles between 48V ON and 48V OFF for phantom powering microphones INPUT IMPEDANCE right The second field right allows the user to toggle between a HIGH Z and LOW Z high or low impedance for the microphone input NAME Third field The third lowest field is used to enter an electronic scribble name for the MIC INPUT Click on this to display a pop up as shown in Figure Either click on a name in the list or click NEW ENTRY and use the QWERTY keyboard to type in anew n
147. is turned it drops back to ready just when it matches the original position indicating by the appropriate changing state from being lit solidly to flashing Knobs other than PAN do not currently display which direction a knob should be rotated in order to match previous data s Where the knob position at the drop out point is recorded to the end of the Title When the moves are complete press the PAN button to drop out of write and the red LED flashes Then press READY CANCEL on the panel below the central control screen to make the pan completely safe To Top is a related function allowing knob position to be recorded from any point within the Title to the beginning for both absolute and trim modes If a knob is in automation record then it is the point at which is pressed which determines the absolute level or trim offset If is already on then it is the point at which the knob is dropped into record 7 7 7 To Trim Pan Moves or any other knob 1 Latch the master button on the panel below the central LCD then press the PAN knob and its green LED flashes indicating ready trim De select or allow it to de select automatically when the tape is played 2 Press the PAN knob either before or after rolling the tape and its green LED lights solidly indicating that any trimming moves will be recorded Whilst the knob is in the ready trim state the LEDs will indicate previous moves The position of the knob at
148. it 7 1 1 0 Chapter 7 Session Management Appendixes Software Multi Format LS Calibration scccsssssssscsscssscscssceseeesseeees Sp cifications eoi tour nie oen Cena ve DEP inae eie rE EVE SERERE OXF R3 Diagnostics Appendixes A 1 sexipueddy Software Installation Upgrades pam A M I General A 2 Appendixes Software Installation Please refer to the Software Installation Procedure supplied with the release package Since Sony is constantly simplifying and improving the ease of installation of software publication of a single and fixed procedure in the Operation Manual is inappropriate Release Notes Please refer to the Release Notes supplied with software releases particularly those relating to interim upgrades for details of new features and functional enhancements Multi Format LS Calibration The following procedure assumes that the necessary equipment such as a test set with a precision pink noise generator and reference calibration microphone is available and connected to the system Further that all monitor amplifier input levels are set to known and fixed settings General The calibration function for multi channel LS allows trimming LS outputs as follows Overall tandem trim of
149. material will be repeated over and over again between the Start and End times allowing a fader balance to be created Alternatively press CYCLE CUE CUE ENTER to use cue numbers for the selection 2 Stop the tape when required using the Machine Remote transport stop key or press on the Control Keyboard 3 To repeat the operation press REPEAT ENTER on the Control Keyboard 7 5 4 Automate Cuts Cuts may be set up for automation in two ways using the local absolute and trim buttons above the faders or using the master keys READY ABSOLUTE and READY TRIM buttons beneath the central LCD screen The method for local buttons will be described first 3 46 5 q SELECT TO FADERS sEND seND seNo seNo seNo SEND sEND i 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SEND sEND SEND SEND SENO SEND SEND 9 10
150. monitoring a signal Once the set up operations described earlier in this section have been completed 1 Select on the SELECT TO FADERS panel and adjust faders on source channels to suitable level settings 2 Select suitable destinations for the source channels using the MULTI FORMAT routing buttons 3 Monitor the levels visually on the meters related to the channels set up as Multi Format Masters 4 Listen to the mix via the Multi Format Monitor described previously in 4 13 2 Sub Level The level control for signals sent to the Sub channel works in two modes depending on the routing selection Routed to SUB only When the routing button alone is selected for a channel the level is controlled using the M T Send Fader Select on the SELECT TO FADERS panel Routed to SUB and other destinations When the routing button is selected along with at least one other routing button for a channel the level is controlled using the M T Send Fader and can be trimmed using the Sub Level Fader Select or accordingly on the SELECT TO FADERS panel Note The setting of the Sub Level Fader will depend upon the sequence of button presses If is selected first followed by one or more other routing buttons the Sub Level Fader will be set at unity gain or OdB If SUB is selected after one or more routing buttons then the Sub Fader will be set at infinity or fully closed Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 47 Syed 246 5 HAI 4
151. moved and the moves are also reflected in the balance As the fader is moved it drops back to ready when it matches the original level In Touch Write just releasing the finger for an instant indicates to the system that the user wants to drop out of recording moves Then the scribble display indicates direction and level difference as described above TO END Where the fader position at the drop out point is recorded to the end of the Title One drop out mode is allowed at a time so these four buttons inter cancel Different modes can be used on different faders by working in one mode first and then rolling back to use another mode on different faders Different modes can also be used on the same fader at different times When finished writing moves de select ready absolute press or again to make the fader completely safe TO TOP Push Button To Top is a related function allowing fader position to be recorded from any point within the Title to the beginning for both absolute and trim modes If a fader is in record then it is the point at which is pressed which determines the absolute level or trim offset If is already on then it is the point at which the fader is dropped into record Note A Preferences set up option allows the level point to be determined at the automation drop out point must be latched to work in this mode See section 7 11 later in this chapter Global Touch and Audition function
152. name not its number in the left hand column and click on it or press on the QWERTY keyboard A large dialogue box appears in which to type the name Type in a name and use the 4 and amp keys to move to the next entry Click on OK or by the numeric keys on the QWERTY keyboard when finished SCRIBBLE SCRIBBLES LOAD ARTIST PROJECT JOHN s TITLE BLAH BLAH OK YAH TRACK LIST TRACK LIST 1 IMPORT TRACK LIST 1 TRACK LIST 2 PRINT TRACK LIST 2 20 TRUMPETS 21 L 22 SAXES 23 SAX SOLO 1 e4 SAX END CHORUS SAXEND 45 HIGH HAT 2 46 SNARE UNDER 47 CHIMES Y 48 BLOCKS ese removes TRACK LISTS screen displaying the IMPORT TRACK LIST 1 pop up To name Scribbles To name or edit a Scribble entry highlight it and use the same procedure as is used for naming Tracks A maximum of 6 characters may be typed in Load Scribbles The Scribble entries can be propagated from Track List 1 and 2 to the Scribble entries in the I O GUI pages according to the routing of and MT2 Click on LOAD to propagate the Scribble names to the appropriate channel I O M T Scribble entries Click on AUTO to highlight so that channel I O scribbles are on line In other words any edits to track lists are propagated immediately Importing Track Lists At the IMPORT block click on TRACK LIST 1 or 2 for a
153. new cut in between previous cuts with no overlap is straightforward Implement as previously described Gc CA i CUT CUT 4 ON PREVIOUS TIME CUT CUT oe 7 1 6 Chapter 7 Session Management Advance thein point Push the CUT switch earlier and hold until the original in point is passed then release 4 PUSH cm 1 PREVIOUS TIME CUT CUT ON MODIFIED CUT TIME CUT Advance the out point Push the CUT switch and hold during the original cut then release at the new earlier out point PUSH HOLD 121 L PREVIOUS TIME CUT ON MODIFIED CUT Chapter 7 Session Management 7 1 7 juewebeueyy uoisses 9 uoIssas Ja dey9 7 5 Mixing Overview To make a cut longer Push and hold the CUT switch during the original cut Release at the new later out point PusH amp HOLD CI ON PREVIOUS TIME CUT OUT MODIFIED CUT TIME OUT eee Push and hold before the original in point and release after the original out point C PUSH a
154. not spring back to the unity gain setting automatically 8 Press the to resume normal operations but note that the faders will not spring back if moved Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 37 y IM 4 13 Multi Stem Set up re MULTI FORMAT amp STEREO SUH GROUP 1 16 EJXXXXXXXxx XX XX XX XX XX ET ET L LC C R C R XX XX XX B TRACK 5 SUB R S EXT SOURCES XXXXXXXX lt XXXXXXXX MONITOR LS MIX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX oe XXXXXXXX um 1 151 152 153 74 51 MON MON LCRS MON ST MON CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT L R C R DIM CUT 4 38 Chapter 4 Signal Paths Once the Stem Masters have been set up on channels make sure the
155. outputs have been selected When digital outputs are set the Word Length is displayed here Clicking on it cycles through 16 20 and 24 bit settings MAIN OUTPUT 1 lower middle right Click on this to display a pop up as shown in Figure B Either click on a name already displayed orclick on NEW ENTRY andusethe QWERTY keyboard to type in of up to 8 characters Press ENTER when finished SAMPLE RATE CONVERTER MAIN OUTPUT 1 lower right This indicator turns red and reads SRC ON whena digital source is selected which has its SRC turned SRCs are controlled via the PREFERENCES GUI described earlier in this chapter MAIN OUTPUTS 2 3 amp 4 The assignment operations for MAIN OUTPUT 1 apply to 2 3 and4 LP FILTER Lower middle block Low Pass Filter for the SUB output Click on the lower left button to switch the filter section in and out of the signal path Set the frequency with the button to the lower right 70 or 100Hz The slope is 24dB Octave To assign insert on the MAIN OUTPUT BUS The Insert selectors laid out in the form of a set of Surround LS in the section headed MAIN INSERT Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 41 saldeyo SueeJog G 5 2 Channel Screens DAC 100 DAC 101 IAC 102 DAC 104 DAC 105 06 107 DAC 108 DAC 109 DAC 110 DAC 111 DAC 112 omo
156. panel 6 25 27 Multitrack routing for multitrack SSGs amp multi format 3 12 N Networking R3 system 7 106 107 Notes icon 7 4 Numeric key pad to enter timecode 6 73 Offline automation 7 84 85 offline cuts edit procedure 7 87 88 offline cuts GUI 7 86 87 offline faders edit procedure 7 85 86 OXF R3 logo screen 7 9 7 27 Pans panel 6 13 14 Pans select to 3 17 6 15 16 Preferences GUI central screen 7 101 automation tab 7 103 104 diags tab 7 105 jog tab 7 104 105 pointer tab 7 105 RSL tab 7 108 109 session tab 7 102 103 setting up a network drive 7 106 107 Preferences GUI channel screens 5 30 38 fast insert I O 5 36 37 alias 5 34 M T scribbles 5 35 sample rate converter 5 38 Programme material 7 8 Q Quick copy EQ 7 60 Quick rollback 6 73 QWERTY keyboard 6 88 R Related manuals 7 Release notes A 2 Routing buttons 3 12 Routing for multitrack 3 12 Routing panel 6 28 30 5 Select to faders 3 14 16 6 9 12 Select to pans 3 17 6 15 16 definable knobs 3 17 Selective automation isolate 7 79 Sends 1 24 panel 3 13 6 32 37 post fader headphone feed 6 36 post M T send fader headphones feed 6 37 pre fader headphones feed 6 35 source points for the sends 6 34 Session Management System automatable controls 7 6 basics 7 2 files structure 7 3 4 snapshots 7 5 snapshots file structure 7 5 Shutdown procedure 2 4 5 Signal flow 1 6 7 Signal paths broadcast mode channel input source
157. point to be added to the list displayed on the right half of the screen Chapter 7 Session Management 7 1 1 juewebeueyy uoisses 9 uoissas Ja dey9 7 5 Mixing Overview To seta cue point offline 1 Move the orange highlight to the desired line in the TIME column on the screen 2 Click or press on the Control Keyboard Type in the timecode and click OK or press on the Control Keyboard To adjust the time of a cue point offline 1 Move the orange highlight to the TIME column on the screen and nudge the time with the and keys 2 Click on the time entry or press on the Control Keyboard to display the timecode dialogue box Type in the timecode and click OK or press on the Control Keyboard Using the Numeric Key pad to Enter Timecode The entry format is exactly the same as that used for PCM 3324 48 series remote control units 1 00 00 01 12 00 00 12 1234 00 12 34 12345 01 23 45 123456 12 34 56 12345621 12 34 56 21 12 34 56 21 12 34 56 21 12 34 56 12 34 56 Timecode shortforms 3 Separates hours minutes Separates minutes seconds Separates seconds frame 12 12 00 00 00 Specifies hours 34 00 34 00 00 Specifies minutes 56 00 00 56 00 Specifies seconds 21 00 00 00 21 Specifies frames 7 12 Chapter 7 Session Management To obtain a rough balance 1 On the Control Keyboard press CYCLE TITLE ENTER The source
158. pop up Click on the appropriate Wicons for pop ups or just click and click on the name banners to cycle through what is available It is possible to view the full TITLES pop up whilst clicking on the ARTIST PROJECT BANNER Having located the desired source Track List to be imported click on OK or on the Control Keyboard Printing Track Lists At the PRINT block click on TRACK LIST 1 or 2 respectively for the print pop up Make sure the correct printer destination is displayed and click on OK or on the Control Keyboard Command Dialogue At the base of the screen the User Command Dialogue Line bar displays commands from the dedicated Control Keyboard and QWERTY Keyboard for confirmation before ENTER Chapter 7 Session Management 7 47 juewebeueyy uoisses 9 uoisses 7 6 The Session Management Screen Pages nn Ee Menu options Menu options available using the softkey functions displayed at the foot of the Track Lists screen page are as follows A Selects the previous screen page SYSTEM Selects the SYSTEM screen page directly PROJECTS Selects the ARTISTS PROJECTS amp TITLES page MIXES Selects the MIXES amp CUES page SNAPSHOT Selects the SNAPSHOTS COPY amp LINK page MACHINES Selects the MACHINES set up parameters page REMOTES Selects the MACHINE REMOTES assignment matrix SCREEN Selects pop up showing all availa
159. previously Alternatively Press SET F KEY Perform the sequence of key strokes Then press To execute a stored Command Line which includes ENTER Press To execute a stored Command Line which does not include ENTER Press ENTER In this case just pressing F1 displays the command line in the User Command Dialogue Line bar To delete a stored Command Line Press PRINT Command Lines PRINT Displays the command strings stored in F PRINT ENTER Prints the GUI currently displayed on the central LCD PRINT PROJECT ENTER Prints details of the current Project PRINT TITLE ENTER Prints details of the current Title Print output commands require the system to be configured with a Postscript compatible printer Command Key Functions GLOBAL DROP IN Key Causes all controls in automation ready status to drop in to automation write GLOBAL DROP OUT Key Causes all controls to drop out of automation record returning to automation ready status Film Mode allows the system to be set up so that GLOBAL DROP IN and GLOBAL DROP OUT are operational on all controls except Faders Cuts and Pans see section 7 7 9 UNDO amp REDO for Automation Data Key Causes the system to go back one mix pass at a time for each UNDO through the currently unsaved mixes in memory until the point of the last SAVE MIX command point is reached REDO Key Re
160. procedure to copy to A 7 60 Chapter 7 Session Management knob and switch settings get copied along with the Equaliser Type Default settings copy automation data too This may be set in the config set up to copy static settings only 7 6 12 Machine Remotes Screen MACHINE REMOTES MACHINES REMOTE ABSOLUTE TIMECODE svNc OFFSET _1_pcm saes 2 00 00 00 00 mane 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 SAFE T 08 a mmm An Anl 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 f 0 HERR ae 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 22 O 100 00 00 O dC 4 00 00 00 00 2222 ose gt I MACHINE REMOTES screen General REMOTE column This GUI allows machines available in the system to Click on the square button below the REMOTE be assigned to any one of the Machine Remote sets on heading for a pop up to select one of the Machine the panel beneath the Control Keyboard It allows Remote sets 1 4 depending on where the machine is selection of machines as Timecode Master Slaves or required to be controlled from Independent and displays the status of machines in general Click the SAFE REC flag to toggle between Machine Da Record Status Safe and Armed As soon as any selections are made in this screen the COMMIT softkey will change colour to orang
161. rack may for example allow cue outputs for headphones to be local to appropriate microphone sources The digital and analogue I O are housed in a single rack type Digital I O has the same capability as the analogue of up to 56 inputs and 56 outputs per rack via AES EBU and SDIF 2 24 modules The digital I O system also includes modules for Timecode 9 Pin GPI and MIDI MADI connections may be made directly to the SP rack Machine Control Machine control for the OXF R3 is accomplished via Sony 9 Pin control and third party devices such as the motionworker supplied by Motionworks Ltd Refer to the Appendixes in this manual for further details of OXF R3 capabilities Chapter 1 Overview 1 3 iio SED MM HA 1 2 Data Flow ene 1 TBA te gea RC 1 Li 1 iR eer SUB 5 1 1 1 1 1 DE nn PRU 1 1 i CONTROL FOR SP AUDIO PROCESSING amp MACHINES fi i SYSTEM STATUS amp D CR ii ids 2 RX 1 i ISPLAY DATA 1 1 MADI lt gt a CR MONITORS 3 SURROUND L SURROUNDR s FX RACK 0000 0000100 60060 en fhao Sample installation illustrating Audio amp Control Data flow 1 4 Chapter 1 Control Room Rack Room Over
162. same time one of them will have an asterisk either side of the function name to inform the user that the process has already been selected in another window Each function block can be used once per channel only The following diagram shows an example of a signal flow through a channel configured for mix down Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 3 y 4 2 Mix down Signal Path With Processing Inserted channel select MIC M T or LINE asthemix down source depending on the situation All input types may be cross patched as desired via the LCD screens above the Channels areas Refer to Chapter 5 Control Screens for details As described previously the Input Channel amp Inserts section allows the setting up of processing functions in any order The example configuration shown is a good starting point in a mix down situation MULIT should not be selected in any window for multitrack mix down MULTI is used in the channel path to create an in line channel described later in this chapter INPUT CHANNEL amp INSERTS FILTER INSERT Mix down channel path example configuration The fire up default sets all channel outputs routed to the Main Output Bus via the button on the Rout
163. setae tastes sone ca 3 17 3 10 Basic Console Operations e eese esee eerte eene tette ttn sna 3 18 3 10 1 To Route a Mic or Line Input to the Main Output Bus 3 19 3 10 2 Set Up a Super Send Group from Channel Inputs 3 20 3 10 3 To Send Signals to Tracks on Tape 3 21 3 10 4 To Monitor Signals to and from 3 22 3 10 5 To Set Up a Stereo Headphone Mix for Foldback 1 O P 3 23 3 10 6 To Equalise Signal Feeding the Multitrack 3 24 3 10 7 To Equalise Monitor Signal Post Multitrack 3 25 3 10 8 To Insert Dynamics Pre Multitrack Send 3 26 3 10 9 To Insert Dynamics Post Multitrack Return 3 27 3 10 10 To Bounce Tracks 3 28 3 10 11 Set Up Super Send Groups from Multitrack 3 29 3 10 12 To Set Up a De Esser Using Dynamics Side Chain EQ 3 30 3 10 13 To Link Compressor Side Chains in a Group 3 31 3 10 14 To Link Compressor Side Chains so that One Channel Controls a Second Channel sess 3 32 Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 1 3 1 The Control Surface The OXF R3 comes in two configurations known as the 24 C 24 and the 24 C 0 The basic elements are illustrated below HIT HH HI 9558
164. source as 8 for Send 1 The block schematic illustrates how this set up is equivalent to a pre fader send on a conventional in line console useful for headphone feeds to Foldback outputs CH INPUT SENDS 1 24 EL 8 1 SOURCE SELECT SOURCE FOR INPUT CHANNEL amp INSE FILTER p SEND RETURN Upper section of SENDS 1 24 panel in channels sections J INSERT J PAN RETURN oo M T ROUTING SEND CH OUTPUT CHANNEL FADER Send 1 Pre Fader headphones feed for Foldback Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 35 suonduoseg 1 9 1 suonduosag eoiuuoa 9 6 2 Channels Section Panels ee Post Fader headphones feed To change the previous set up to post fader simply toggle the SOURCE window to OUTPUT The will light indicating that a new selection is available Press it to invoke the new source point This action rearranges the schematic as in the illustration below
165. status of the SLS1 and SLS2 push buttons T B SLS1 and T B SLS2 Push Buttons Allows talkback to be fed to SLS1 and SLS2 individually Talkback Microphone ACCESS Push Button Not operational in this version Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 49 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 suonduoseq jeoiuuoe 9 Jadeyo 6 3 Central Section Panels ae eS EE ee st FOLDBACK GROUPS 1 4 GROUPS 1 4 FOLD 5 ST MON ST MON ST MO ST MON to F Back to F Back to F Back to F Back 3 F Back 1 F Back 2 F Back 3 F Back 4 Foldback Groups 1 4 The 4 Stereo Foldback Groups have fixed source assignments as follows F BIL Send Bus 17 F BIR Send Bus 18 F B2L Send Bus 19 e 2 Send Bus 20 F B3L Send Bus 21 Send Bus 22 F B4L Send Bus 23 F BAR Send Bus 24 6 50 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions LEVEL Knobs Set output levels for each individual Foldback Group
166. stay wherever they are set This function is useful to find a new static starting point where a dynamic mix is not felt to be going in the right direction A further use for Automation Off is to enable the balance to be changed for a short while in an over dub situation for example Any automation data is still resident and can be re invoked at any time by de selecting Selective Automation Isolate This function allows individual channels with automated controls to be isolated from the control of the automation system during playback When channels are taken out of isolate their objects such as faders switch back to the state playback ready abs ready trim etc that they were in before being isolated The exceptions to this are controls in the active state of recording automation data when isolate is selected in which case they default to play AUTO ISOL Push Button Latch to set up the channels to be isolated Select the lower buttons for the channels to be isolated They stay lit De select when the channels have been selected Select again to add or subtract channels Chapter 7 Session Management 7 79 juewebeueyy uoisses 9 5595 7 7 Dynamic Automation Moves ISOL ON Push Button Select to actually isolate the channels selected from their automation data De select to re invoke automation data to the isolated channels AUTO ISOL CA
167. tape machine into ready record for that track The signal from the Mic input is sent to the routing via the send level on the Multitrack panel This level can also be controlled by the fader by selecting M T SEND See SELECT TO FADERS functionality in Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions Any function in the eight windows positioned before the word MULTI affects the signal recorded on tape This is equivalent to the channel path of an in line analogue console The functions positioned after MULTI affect the monitor signal For example the diagram shows the word MULTI in window position 5 The effects of FILTER EQ and INSERT are all being recorded The DYNAMICS affect just the monitor signal MIC INPUT CHANNEL amp INSERTS CH INPUT M E SEND RETURN E M FILTER sR IH MIT SEND oo ROUTING ZEN ae p cem 3 DYN pou Leeks i CHANNEL FADER 4 8 Chapter 4 Signal Paths In line channel for recording to a multitrack 4 6 In Line Channel with Insert Post Channel Fader Monitor Function As with the Mix down examples shown previously post fade functions can be configured in the same way during recording
168. the stems with a coloured border around the outside of each button The fire up default for SSGs is 8 stereos but they can also be set up as mono or surround groups However note that grouping cannot cross the boundary between the two pages 1 8 and 9 16 Super Sends can be set up as Mono Stereo LCR LCRS 5 0 5 1 7 0 7 1 The setting up of SSGs is achieved in the centre section Press and hold the button foran SSG and waituntilitturns amber Any other SSGs in the same group will light yellow simutaneously Press buttons depending on whether more or fewer SSGs are required for that group De selecting SSG buttons must be done from the outer tothe inner buttons The signal feed to any SSGs has the same pan and level settings as that of the channel output feeding the Main Output Bus An SSG can be set up to be wider than the Main Output Bus e g Main could be set for Stereo whilst an SSG could be 5 1 In this case the surround panning would be fully operational for the SSG whereas the Main Output Bus would receive L R information only L R information includes in place surround signals 5 2 2 GUI SRC OFF M T GRP OFF OFF 24 OFF 24 OFF 24 OFF AES 37 AES 38 AES 39 orF WI orF oF o 228 Lay IONS GMLEGL MT INS MT INS MT INS MT INS MT INS MT INS MT INS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Mone store i ELA sateen todo
169. this example and ithighlights red Click on the highest number of the DACs required 8 in this example and DACs 5 8 are assigned simultaneously to M T Group Sends 1 4 GROUP O P WORD LENGTH Third field left The third field allows the M T Group output word length to be set if the send is digital Click on it to cycle through the word lengths 16 bit 20 bit and 24 bits The word length for the MADI output is set at the central Monitor Panel Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 25 sueeJog 9 19 dey9 Jeydeuo 5 2 Channel Screens DAC 101 DAC 105 106 DAC 111 TOP f J store Figure INSERT SEND 5 26 M T GROUP pop up GROUP O P SAMPLE RATE CONVERTER Third field right This indicator turns red and reads ON when a digital I O that has an SRC turned onis selected SRCs are controlled via the PREFERENCES GUI described later in this chapter INSERT SEND Fourth field The fourth fieldis used to select the M T Group insert send destination or adjust an assignment set using the Fast Insert function Click on this to display a pop up as shown in Figure C Click on the desired analogue send destination orclick on AES for the digital send destination Further pages of related pop ups can be accessed by clickingon Click on OFF to disable an insert send Click on R
170. touch sensitive linear motorised faders with associated electronic dot display scribbles and local dynamic automation controls This universal Fader Panel is used for channels as well as master section functions The faders are very important devices in that all channel level control functions may be accomplished using them as selected on the SELECT TO FADERS panel described in the next section Channel faders may be switched to control INPUT GAIN Mic M T and Line M T SEND Level sent to M T Bus GROUP TRIM Gain of M T Bus Output to M T Channel e M T MONITOR Level Sent to Independent Monitor Bus CHANNEL Level Sent to Main L R Output Busses SENDS Levels Sent to Effects amp Foldback Outputs SUB LEVEL Levels Sent to the Sub Bus in Multi Format Mode Control Group function Any fader can be linked or slaved to be controlled by any one of the centrally placed Control Group Faders This works exactly like VCA grouping in an analogue console Slaves can be set to move according to Control Groups by latching SLAVE FADs MOVE on the Monitor panel See 6 3 2 for SLAVE FADs MOVE function S SE E SES ES EE EE TELEL TELLE EEE ZELLE ZELLE
171. up it can be copied to other channels across the console as required described in Chapter 7 Session Management INPUT CHANNEL amp INSERTS r FILTER EQ INSERT o OJo fo LJ a MULTI 2 In line channel multitrack recording configuration All console inputs are available on the Channel Input Screens for cross patching They are split into three different screen pages MIC LINE and inputs Refer to Chapter 5 Control Screens for further details Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 7 y IM 4 5 In Line ChannelMultitrack Recording Set up If FADER is not placed in any of the eight windows it is automatically positioned after window number 8 equivalent to the monitor fader in an in line console By selecting MULTI to one of the eight windows the multitrack machine is inserted into the path and creates an In Line channel This then assigns the SEND and RET urn buttons situated above the pans to control whether the user is listening to the signal being sent to the tape or the return signal from the tape The signal from tape is now sent to the monitor path via the channel fader The button arms the
172. verbunden werden Wenn w hrend des Betriebs eine Funktionsst rung auftritt ist der Unterbrecher zu bet tigen bzw das Netzkabel abzuziehen damit die Stromversorgung zum Ger t unterbrochen wird WARNING THIS WARNING IS APPLICABLE FOR USA ONLY If used in USA use the UL LISTED power cord specified below DO NOT USE ANY OTHER POWER CORD Plug Cap Parallel blade with ground pin NEMA 5 15P Configuration Cord Type SJT three 16 or 18 AWG wires Length Less than 2 5 m 8 ft 3 in Rating Minimum 10 A 125 V Using this unit at a voltage other than 120V may require the use of a different line cord or attachment plug or both To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock refer servicing to qualified service personnel About This 5 1 1 Overview 1 2 on 1 2 Data 0 1 4 1 3 Signal HlOW m 1 6 Chapter 2 2 1 OXF R3 Start U Prvecsscsececcscssecssosssoessosssesseossvocssosssosesessesssosds soasooss 2 2 Powering The OXF R3 2 1 Start Up Procedure sse 2 2 2 2 OXF R3 Shutdown eee ee eere eese enses tna 2 4 2 2 1 Shutdown Procedure esee 2 4 Chapter 3 3 1 The Control ITA E E T 3 2 Getting Started 3 2 Fader Paging sssenennnnannnnnnncn
173. will affect the channel controls depending on what is highlighted in the SNAPSHOT DEFAULTS field Snapshot COPY via the GUI For a copy operation the source Snapshot will be the one highlighted in the SNAPSHOTS GUI Click on in the GUI for fully comprehensive pop ups to select the destination for the Snapshot The name of the Snapshot placed in the destination can be changed during the the COPY process Snapshot DELETE via the GUI Click on in the GUI for a pop up which allows the currently highlighted Snapshot in the SNAPSHOTS page to be deleted Click ENTER on the Control Keyboard or to abort the operation Chapter 7 Session Management 7 51 juewebeueyy uoisses Jejdeuo uoisseg 1e deuo 7 6 The Session Management Screen Pages DEFAULTS 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ______ se 1715 25 ae 0953 RHYTHM REHEARSAL INST VOCALS amp RHYTHM INST NEW KIT FX SENDS FINAL FINAL FINAL SINGLE MIX DANCE MIX Lame 5 enosecrs mixes SCREEN CONTROLS CHs CEN J INST CEN INST INST INST INST INST SNAPSHOTS COPY amp LINK GUI displaying the Snapshot DEFAULTS Main SNAPSHOTS listfield The majority of the screen area is taken up by the list of Snapshots The functions are as follows ARTIST PROJECT Click on ARTIST PROJECT for a pop up of options
174. within more compact dimensions by using an assignable control surface Modular Control Surface The control surface of the OXF R3 makes extensive use of assignable panels to provide a console of manageable size for either one or two operators whilst giving greatly increased functionality The current system is capable of controlling up to 96 full channels and 12 stereo return channels The modular system divides functionally into the master section located in the centre and the channel sections located either side of the master section Signal Processing SP Rack The SP rack is designed to use the minimum number of signal processing cards depending on the system size A high level Software Design Tools System is used to generate automatically the low level software microcode which runs the SP system Data links to and from the control console are via Ethernet connections whilst a MADI interface is used between the SP rack and the I O racks Additional bandwidth available within the MADI signal is used to pass data for purposes such as remote control of analogue amplifier gain Digital and Analogue I O Racks The I O racks are designed to be located close to the equipment with which they interface Each I O rack can contain a mix of up to 56 high quality analogue inputs and or outputs on 10 analogue I O cards Each analogue card handles 4 or 8 inputs and 4 or 8 outputs according to its type A mix of input and output cards in the same I O
175. 000 O Olo oe ooo l im olfa aE Blld2s O olo O Bese e000 sos e So olololololololo J08 o Lc 6 B oo o000 5 206 2 5 5 B 556565 05550 o o OVD oj lo 5989 Bass LOY Sy pugil Ol oojo 0 0 5 oo 00 5 o A OOOO E 3 OVO 225550658 S eee poaogoaaa 95599 opopopg 955999569 59999959 54999999 ojo OOO 2289 32006 22 2 ag 986 Dopo 05555000 ooo olo 0200 550506 Q 5 sa 6599595955555 599 99555 25999929 29595069 29596959 29992999 999992994 ooo 25 55155155 999 599559529 9298559 55555959 59552959 255955295 295955555 255555955 H 295559559 55555559 o ofo ofo ofa of fo ofa ofofo o o ofo ofe ofo o ooo fe ole ofo ofa 0 fe do olo ofa 2 B88988581 fo ofo oo ofa of Jo ofo olaola 69595091 fa ofa ofa ofa o 20000000 ood 200 d o oo o 20 20 o o oo o oO 176 OO L zt ojo o 1 758 34 26 1 Press for the desired Chan
176. 1 14 6 2 Channels Section Panels a Ty 6 8 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions Upper Electronic Scribble 6 Character dot display per Fader Displays the audio source name This may be selected from a table of source names via colour LCD screens when selecting signal sources The name may also be typed in via the central QWERTY keyboard It also displays gain level in dBs if the SHOW VALUE function is selected Lower Electronic Scribble 6 Character dot display per Fader Displays the channel number and any grouping assignment Displays the channel source name if SHOW VALUE is selected ABS and TRM Push Buttons Described under Session Management Chapter 7 Touch Sensitive Fader Knob and Tactile Write Button Functions described under Session Management Chapter 7 There are 48 channel faders on the control surface of the OXF R3 which can control a much greater number of channels using Fader Paging The SELECT TO FADERS panels described in the following section allow any bank of 24 channels to be selected on either side of the centre section at any time Control Grouping Press and hold on a central Control Group Fader until it turns amber Latch on the channel faders to be slaved A maximum gain of 10dB can be added to a channel using a Control Group Use the same procedure to release slaves except that once the Control Group ACCESS has turned amber and its slave ACCESS buttons ar
177. 100 100 m Press for the desired Channel At the Input Channel amp Inserts panel select MULT in window number 4 using the and buttons either side Select its large button to insert the multitrack into the signal path At the same panel select EQ in a window before window 4 window 1 for example and select the large button to insert the equaliser into the signal path before the multitrack 3 24 Chapter 3 Getting Started 4 On the upper section of the same panel select the individual buttons for the bands required and adjust as necessary Select the EQ softkey for the screen above the equaliser panel to view the parameters and response curve graph 3 10 7 To Equalise Monitor Signal Post Multitrack H 009500 tH e a nang O 0015105 1005 fo 0 0 0
178. 10A 240V 2 Mesur conform ment la norme europ enne EN55103 1 40A 230V OXF SP3000 1 Mise sous tension ON m thode de sondage du courant 40A 100V 80A 240V 2 Mesur conform ment la norme europ enne EN55103 1 80A 230V 103000 1 Mise sous tension ON m thode de sondage du courant 20A 100 70 240V 2 Mesur conform ment la norme europ enne EN55103 1 230V Spitzenstrom OXF CP3048PS 1 Einschaltstrom Stromsonde 50 100V 110A 240V 2 Gemessen in EN55103 1 40A 230V OXF SP3000 1 Einschaltstrom Stromsonde 40A 100V 80A 240V 2 Gemessen in EN55103 1 80A 230V 103000 1 Einschaltstrom Stromsonde 20A 100V 70 240V 2 Gemessen in EN55103 1 30A 230V OXF CP3048PS only WARNING This unit has no power switch When installing the unit incorporate a readily accessible disconnect device in the fixed wiring or connect the power cord to a socket outlet which must be provided near the unit and easily accessible If a fault should occur during operation of the unit operate the disconnect device to switch the power supply off or disconnect the power cord WARNUNG Dieses Ger t hat keinen Netzschalter Beim Einbau des Ger ts ist daher im Festkabel ein leicht zug nglicher Unterbrecher einzuf gen oder das Netzkabel mu mit einer in der N he des Ger ts befindlichen leicht zug nglichen Wandsteckdose
179. 2 SAX SOLO VERSE 13 KEY CHANGE a 5 5 5 Tracks OFFLINE SCREEN MIXES amp CUES screen CUES field Cue points are specific listed time points within a Title They are automatically numbered in sequence for quick reference and may be given appropriate names Cue points may be added by explicitly typing them in or on the fly as the tape is rolling Start of Title and End of Title cues are propagated automatically from the Artists Projects amp Titles screen entry If these times are adjusted on the Mixes amp Cues screen page the changes will automatically be propagated back to the Artists Projects amp Titles page The Start of Title and End of Title cues cannot be deleted Toset CUE Points To set a cue point offline press on the Control Keyboard or click on NEW in the Cues list title bar for a pop up to name anew cue Type ina 7 38 Chapter 7 Session Management page illustrating the CUES list name using the QWERTY keyboard and press or click on OK or OK without a name will enter the next default The TIME column will take on the timecode position of the master machine indicated by the large central timecode display at the time is pressed or NEW is clicked on To edit the time for a cue offline move the highlight to the desired line in the TIME column at the right side of the screen page and click on it or press on the
180. 4 5 5 5 B B S 32 5 B 32 5 S 32 5 S 32 5 EE eee B 0 0 B B B 2 5 28 5 28 5 28 8 LJO L L R oooo unn ganan ganan oooo BBBB 2500 5000 gBug 0000 oooo 2000 2200 2200 aaam anan anan 8888 8888 8888 8888 uw V SSG SSG SSG SSG SEND SEND SEND SEND OVER OVER OVER OVER EB EB EB EB B B B B B B B B EB EB EB 2 B E B E B E BH B BH B S 5 E S S E B B B B B S s E B S E S 5 B B 5 0 5 S0 5 52 5 B B B B B BE 2 B B S 24 5 B B B B B B S 32 5 S 32 5 S 22 5 S 32 5 Eea Bog 5 8 B B B B B s E E B 0 B B B B 28 6 B S 60 B Boo 5 L nang ooog ooog 5000 5500 0000 ooog 5905 5500 0000 0000 0000 2000 2000 allan aaan alaala aaam 8888 8888 8888 8888
181. 5 inch floppy in the host computer drive and click on IMPORT Once the list of MID files is displayed highlight the desired file and click on IMPORT or press on the Control Keyboard The new imported Tempo Map will appear replacing any current entries 7 10 Backups ses erfreuen PROJECT 1 IN MY LIFE PROJECT 2 FOLLOW MY DREAMS SLO TOO SOON KNOW GONNA BE ALL RIGHT AT LAST FIRST TIME LOVE 2 Project 12 restored Pau 2 Project 13 restored Earr Project 14 restored syst Project 15 restored rodr Project 16 restored WE Project 17 restored 5551 BACKUPS screen General The BACKUPS GUI is designed to allow the user to store work on M O disks for archiving and transferring to other systems Networking facility is also provided for use where there is more than one OXF R3 in the same installation Work should be backed up at least once per day It is recommended that backups be taken more often when a number of projects are being worked on in the same day for example This system allows data to be backed up from the internal hard drive to a removable M O disk or vice versa as well as making copies AII OXF R3 systems are compatible allowing projects to be moved freely between installations Chapter 7 Session Management 7 95 juewebeueyy uoisses 9 5 9 7 10 Backups TT 7 96 Chapter 7 Session Management
182. 6 12 Machine Remotes 7 61 7 7 Dynamic Automation Moves scsscssscsssscssscssscsssccssssssssesees 7 64 7 7 1 Motorised Fader Controls sese 7 64 7 7 2 Automating Faders sese 7 65 727 3 Lo Automate CUts 5 or tet ien 7 10 7 7 4 To Automate Other Switches esses 7 76 7 7 5 Automate a Pan Move or any other knob 7 77 7 7 6 Dropping Out of Write on Subsequent Mix Passes ees Ret wale dedi 7 78 7 7 7 To Trim Moves or any other knob 7 78 7 7 8 Automation Off and Selective Automation Isolate 7 79 42759 HEREDES RSEN 7 80 7 7 10 Global Ready Enable eee 7 81 7 8 Offline Automation eeeeee ssoi sesoses 7 84 7 9 7 89 7 9 1 MIDI Control Pages aioe enisinia 7 89 7 9 2 Setting MIDI parameters esee 7 90 7 9 3 MIDI Bars amp Beats 7 93 7 10 Backups 7 95 7 11 Preferences q 7 101 Software Installation Upgrades csccsssscsssscssssccsssssssssessescesscsseees A 2 Appendixes Multi Format LS Calibration sesecsesescesosoesesossescssosocossossesesosseeoee A 3 SpecifiCatlons reete ss ertt ett eto eoo take ve A 6 OXF R3 Diagnostics 1
183. 7 1 5 y IM 4 11 Dynamics Side Chain Linking 4 11 1 Dynamics Side Chain Link Right CHANNEL 1 GAIN CONTROL CHANNEL 1 Fi 2 CHANNEL 1 INPUT T c CHANNEL 1 MIN SIDE CHAIN mE MIN SC TO RT LINK CHANNELS 1 amp 2 CHANNEL 2 GAIN CONTROL CHANNEL 2 2 CHANNEL 2 INPUT OUTPUT CHANNEL 2 UN SIDE CHAIN E MIN cu 2 SC FMRT SC TO RT LINK CHANNELS 2 amp 3 CHANNEL 3 GAIN CONTROL 2 CHANNEL 3 H CHANNEL 3 INPUT 5 c CHANNEL 3 TM MIN SIDE CHAIN MIN 3 SC FM RT o SC TORT LINK CHANNELS 3 amp 4 CHANNEL 4 CONTROL s CHANNEL 4 S CHANNEL 4 INPUT O OUTPUT MIN CHANNEL 4 ET MIN APPLIES TO GATE amp EXPANDER CH 4 SCFMRT o o MAX M LEAST GAIN REDUCTION TAKES PRIORITY MAX APPLIES TO COMPRESSOR amp LIMITER MOST GAIN REDUCTION TAKES PRIORITY TO FROM NEXT CHANNEL Block schematic to illustrate Dynamics Side Chain Linking to the next channel to the right Dynamics Side Chain Link Right in general This function allows the Dynamics section in the next channel to the right to be controlled by the Side Chain of the currently accessed channel and vice versa The linking can be cascaded over any number of channels to form a group and may be linked through channels where the Dynamics sections are not active No matter how many channels are cascaded the on
184. 7 78 super send groups 1 16 panel section 6 81 82 System concept diagram 1 2 6 2 System overview 1 2 3 System screen page 7 28 9 T Trackerballs 6 89 Track lists screen 7 46 48 import track list pop up 7 47 4 Index RAOR FEHU FRI BESSER A HR 7 E o C HAD GRE FS RESBWCKVIATIERATSCESRIELET The material contained in this manual consists of information that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equipment described in this manual Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described in this manual without the express written permission of Sony Corporation Le mat riel contenu dans ce manuel consiste en informations qui sont la propri t de Sony Corporation et sont destin es exclusivement a des acqu reurs de l quipement d crit dans ce manuel Sony Corporation interdit formellement la copie de quelque partie que ce soit de ce manuel ou son emploi pour tout autre but que des op rations ou entretiens de l quipement moins d une permission crite de Sony Corporation Das in dieser Anleitung enthaltene Material besteht aus Informationen die Eigentum der Sony Corporation sind und ausschlieBlich zum Gebrauch durch den Kaufer der in dieser
185. 88 INPUT CHANNEL OVERLOAD Channel metering Send Monitor 4 10 4 Return Monitor Selecting the button at the record remotes selects the tape return as the source indicated by the green R legend at the top of the Channel Meters In Record the meter is automatically switched to monitor SEND CH INPUT SEND RETURN pz en J INSERT ES output T eo Oe 1 I 2 CHANNEL m 4 FADER SEND ROUTING INPUT CHANNEL OVERLOAD Channel metering Return Monitor If both and are selected the SEND monitor signal takes priority 4 1 6 Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 10 5 MULTI in Channel Path If MULTI is selected in one of the 8 windows but neither nor push button is selected the Meter is fed pre fader The input signal source is overridden by the multitrack return signal CHINEUT SEND RETURN T LFILTER 7727 7 INSERT GROUP TRIM AIT SOx Sees Resa ce gee su 2eane SEND ROUTING INPUT CHANNEL OVERLOAD CHANNEL FADER Channel metering MULTI in channel path but Send or Return push buttons are not selected Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 1
186. 9 linis cR I 1 4 Table of Contents About This Manual Purpose and intended readers This is the operation manual for the OXF R3 digital audio mixing console It explains how to use the OXF R3 to record mix and output digital audio signals This manual is aimed at professionals such as operators and engineers working in high end recording studios production companies and broadcasting stations Itis assumed that the reader has prior experience of using professional audio equipment Use this manual as a reference by referring to the chapters as summarised below If however you have limited experience of using this kind of equipment we recommend that you read through the entire manual The block diagrams contained in this manual are intended to help you understand the signal flow and operation of the OXF R3 Model numbers covered by this manual This manual refers in general terms to the OXF R3 The illustrations show the 24 C 24 version which is the current model Organisation This manual is divided into the following seven chapters and four appendixes Chapter 1 Overview Introduces the features of the OXF R3 and how it may be used to configure a complete system Chapter 2 Powering the OXF R3 Includes the system power up procedure and the boot up sequence for the host computer Chapter 3 Getting Started Gives an overview of the OXF R3 control surface describing the principles of operation The panels are described in
187. 9095505 ooo oo ea 200000590 a BED y is H g 8 8 MULTITRACK ooo a H _ Jone a nooo ooon ooon a oa ACCESS 1 Assignable panels Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 9 peuels e paners Gumep 3 4 Input Channel Equaliser and Filters The Input Channel section is much more flexible than a conventional in line analogue channel strip in that it allows processing elements to be configured in almost any order The eight boxes towards the bottom of the panel enable up to eight functions to be placed in each channel path with individual IN switches The order of the processes can be totally different on every channel as desired The 5 Band Equaliser and High amp Low Filters sections are independent and can be assigned separately within the channel signal path To view parameters and curves whenever EQ and Filters are in use access the EQ page available on the channel screens Various EQ options are available which are selected using the IN and C buttons situated in the upper middle section of the panel EQUALISER amp FILTERS XXXXXXXX
188. 99 lolol ooo raa 50006 5 ooo OEE ooo 558 250 rapan Baan oppo oneee 299509559 299909529 29992999 2959592994 292993545 55 29292555 550 ojojoj 999 ob boo 595589529 59599929 655955959 65595954 59595585 25295555 25855459 595589559 4 25555958 95555595 2 ofo ofa ofo o fo ofe ole ojoo fe ofe ofe ole o fo ofo ofo ofe 0 aldo ole 22 555559 Jo ola ofo glo o fo ole ofoofo oola olo oloo o ofa oja oloo 00990909 ooo m oo oo oo 20 o oo o Oo r3 E3 C3 L3 C3 00 010 E c 1 592 643 7 8 A Press for the first Channel to be routed to a Super Send Group SSG Select and set suitable gain Make sure is selected on the Select To Faders panel fire up default Make sure SUPER 565 1 8 is selectedin the SSG masters section At the Routing panel de select 8 At the same panel select the SSGs required and 2 10 in this case 7 At the Select Faders panel SEL section select SUPER SGs 1 8 then adjust the Fader to OdB in the Central Faders panel 8 Above the SSG 1 level knob select and its ACCESS atthe top of the Routing panel select 3 10 Repeat steps 7 and 8 for SSG 2 but select R at the Routing panel 1 1 Repea
189. ANGE to set a contiguous set of M T Group Insert Sends as described for the second field in this section INSERT RETURN Fifth field The fifth field is used to select the M T Group insert returns Click on this todisplay a pop up Click on the desired analogue return source or range WORD LENGTH Sixth field left The sixth field left allows the M T Group insert send and return word length to be set if the insert device is digital Click on it to cycle through the word lengths 16 bit 20 bit and 24 bits It will be set for both send and return simultaneously Chapter 5 Control Screens INSERT SAMPLE RATE CONVERTER Sixth field right This indicator turns red and reads ON when a digital I O that has an SRC turned on is selected SRCs are controlled via the PREFERENCES GUI described later in this chapter NAME Seventh field The seventh lowest fieldis used to enter an electronic scribble name for the insert Click on this to display a pop up Either click on a name already inthe listor select NEW ENTRY andusethe QWERTY keyboard to type in anew name ofupto8 characters Press ENTER when finished Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 27 sueeJog 9 Jeydeuo SueeJoS 9 HAI 5 2 Channel Screens See SSS 5 2 3 Equaliser amp Filters GUI LFLT IN LMF OUT HMF OUT HFLT OUT _ fonz 055 anoo
190. Anleitung beschriebenen Ausr stung bestimmt sind Die Sony Corporation untersagt ausdr cklich die Vervielf ltigung jeglicher Teile dieser Anleitung oder den Gebrauch derselben f r irgendeinen anderen Zweck als die Bedienung oder Wartung der in dieser Anleitung beschriebenen Ausr stung ohne ausdr ckliche schriftliche Erlaubnis der Sony Corporation OXF R3 UC CE 4 P Company 2001 12 13 3 860 150 05 1 http www sony net O 1997
191. BLE Allows Autosave to be turned on or off AUTOSAVE STATIC CHANGES Allows Autosave to be triggered to Autosave static non automated changes CANCEL KEY CANCELS CYCLES Allows the system to be set so that on the Control Keyboard cancels machine cycle commands The following LOCK Preferences refer to the push button on the Monitor panel in the centre section When is on anumber of functions can be locked out of operation These are useful safety settings in live and broadcast situations where the loading of Automation and or Snapshot data could overwrite a critical console set up LOCK DISABLES FULL LOAD Disables the Loading of Full console wide Snapshots and Mixes LOCK DISABLES PARTIAL LOADS Disables the Loading of Partial Snapshots and Mixes which would affect less than the full console LOCK DISABLES COPIES Disables the Copying of settings from a source channel to one or more other channels LOCK DISABLES NEW LINKS Disables the channel Link set up mechanism but leaves channels already linked intact LOCK DISABLES MAKE STATIC Disables the key on the Control Keyboard which normally removes automation from the working mix LOCK DISABLES OFFLINE OPS Disables all Offline operations whether GUI or keyboard entry VPANEL ENABLE Enables transport control via GPIO from an external panel or virtual panel VPANEL IS MACHINE CONTROLLER Sets the external or virtual panel as the master machine remotes
192. CHANNELS which CONTROL GROUP FADERS which MIX including the current working mix SNAPSHOT source START and END Times from the source mix DESTINATION Times for time shifted merge BUTT or RAMP for the merge mix sections joining of Static Objects to other Static Objects The UNDO and REDO functions will work on any merge operations in the normal way The constituents of a merge command are as follows 1 key on the Control Keyboard 2 Source Nothing specified uses current WORKING MIX Currently highlighted MIX Currently highlighted SNAPSHOT 3 List or Range of Channels or other Faders 1 108 Channels 1 108 01 032 Control Group Faders 1 32 00 Main Fader 4 Start Time for Source Data A B Cue Cue or Timecode number entry 5 End Time for Source Data A B Cue Cue or Timecode number entry 6 Optional Shifted Destination Start Time A B Cue Cue or Timecode number entry 7 Note 1 Channel data will be merged according to the control types highlighted in the SNAPSHOT DEFAULTS 7 44 Chapter 7 Session Management 2 Channels and other fader types can be specified in a single string e g 00 01 03 05 08 1 24 48 56 65 Fader Control Group Faders 1 3 5 8 Channels 1 24 48 56 and 65 3 If Timecode number entry is used key must be used as a separator see example below Example MERGE command lines MERGE 1 48 CUE 3 CUE 6 CUE 9 Adds new a
193. CT TO PANS 7 1 6 2 SELECT PANS panel PAN Push Button Left Right Pan for all occasions where the Fader Output is feeding a Stereo Bus default setting CHANS Push Button Allows pans to be switched to control the level sent to the Main Output Busses Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 1 5 suonduoseg 1 9 saideyo suonduoseg 9 1 14 6 2 Channels Section Panels pem cs unas SS 6 16 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions Q M T SEND Push Button Allows pans to be switched to control the level sent to M T bus during recording INPUT GAIN Push Button Allows pans to be switched to control gain of Mic M T Return and Line Input GRP TRIM Push Button Allows faders to be switched to control the gain of the M T bus output to the M T channel M T MON Push Button Allows pans to be switched to control the level sent to the independent M T Monitor Bus SHOW VALUE Push Button Allows the display of pan positions in degrees or gain loss in dB on the pans panel s 6 character dot displays according to the function selected Press and hold and the current input device e g ADC183 will be displayed for each individual channel It is the raw input device which will be displayed not the alias name
194. CYCLE MIX ENTER or CYCLE MIX ENTER Plays and repeats current or specified MIX continuously CYCLE Plays and repeats from the current timecode minus the quick rollback time see page 6 73 SAVE Command Lines SAVE MIX ENTER or SAVE MIX ENTER Saves the WORKING MIX by overwriting the one currently highlighted in the list of mixes or a MIX specified by number SAVE MIX AS NEW ENTER Saves the WORKING MIX to a new file for which a default name is created or the MIX can be named at the time of saving via a pop up SAVE SNAPSHOT ENTER or SAVE SNAPSHOT ENTER Saves a SNAPSHOT by overwriting the one currently highlighted in the list of Snapshots or a Snapshot specified by number SAVE SNAPSHOT AS NEW ENTER Saves a SNAPSHOT to a new file for which a default name is created or the SNAPSHOT can be named at the time of saving via a pop up Key Deletes the last command or character entry in the Command Dialogue Line at the bottom of the central LCD MAKE STATIC Command Lines MAKE STATIC ENTER Returns the system to a non automated manual state allowing a restart with astatic mix The balance will be set depending on where the tape was stopped in the current mix If there is any unsaved automation data in memory then a pop up appears in order to prompt saving it MAKE STATIC ENTER Removes the moves data from the working mix for channel for controls according to the Snapsho
195. Compressor Side Chain Bus 1 It will also use Bus 1 as its Side Chain Signal source This allows control of itself control of any other channels using Side Chain Bus 1 as their Side Chain source control by any other channels sending their Side Chain Signal to Side Chain Bus 1 1 The middle button sets where the Side Chain Control Signal is sent The default is LOCAL i e to its own channel Step through the options with this button and set it at S C TO G1 This setting sends its Side Chain Control Signal to Side Chain Bus 1 2 The lower button sets where the Side Chain Control Signal is taken from The default is LOCAL i e from its own channel Step through the options with this button and set it at SC FM G1 With this setting the current channel takes its Side Chain Control Signal from Side Chain Bus 1 3 Repeat 1 and 2 above on further channels as desired Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 21 sued euis 19 deyo 4 12 Mixing to the Main Output Bus Multi Channel Main Output Bus in general The Main Output Bus for the OXF R3 which doubles as the M T Monitor Bus can be used for Stereo or Surround mix down according to the set up in the centre section The set up procedure is described later in this section MTSEND FADER Ss UD 2 5 a Gi S T INPUT CHANNEL M RC 2 GAIN PROCESSING PANNER i A o zi E a Ci SY i SOURCE CHANNELS
196. Control Screens for further details To send the signal for each channel to the Multitrack as well as to the Mix bus 1 Press the ACCESS button on the first channel to be routed Route to the track required using the Routing panel 2 On the Multitrack panel toggle the and buttons either side of the window labelled SOURCE below the Group Trim knob until the desired source point is displayed This can be taken from any of the 10 junctions within the signal path displayed on the Input Channel amp Inserts panel The source point for the multitrack feed will be taken from directly after the process displayed in the SOURCE window In the first diagram CH INPUT is shown in the SOURCE window enabling a clean line level signal to be sent from a point immediately following the input stage In the second diagram CH OUTPUT is shown in the SOURCE window enabling a signal to be sent which includes the effects of all selected processing and adjustments made on the channel fader Further Examples With EQ selected in the SOURCE window the feed to the multitrack would be affected by the high and low pass filters FILTER dynamics section DYN and the equaliser section EQ but not by the INSERT processing If FILTER was the source then just filters would affect the signal and so on All processes affect the mix feeding the Main Output bus INPUT CHANNEL amp INSE FILTER DYN INSERT
197. Copy Monitor and M T Send Fader Balance to Cues General This function allows the copying of the Main Output Bus balance serves as monitor bus and the M T Send Fader balance to any of the Send busses This copy can be carried out for one bank of 24 channels at a time or all channels simultaneously Copy Monitor mix from ALL CHANNELS On the Select To Faders panel press and hold CHANS until it turns amber Then press the desired SEND button on the same panel Release CHANS The destination SEND amp remains assigned to the faders after such an operation Copy Monitor mix from ALL M T SENDS On the Select To Faders panel press and hold until it turns amber Then press the desired button on the same panel Release SEND There are 120 CHAN faders and 72 M T SEND faders in the largest configuration Copy mix from a bank of 24 CHANNELS On the Select To Faders panel make sure is selected then press and hold the source bank button for example until it turns amber Then press the desired button on the same panel Release SEND tt Copy mix from a bank of 24 M T SENDS On the Select To Faders panel make sure is selected then press and hold the source bank button for example until it turns amber Then press the desired button on the same panel Release SEND 7 6 11 Quick Copy EQ A to B and B to A On the EQUALISER amp FILTERS panel press and hold until it turns amber then press B Reverse this
198. Cs 5 8 are assigned simultaneously to channel Insert Sends 1 4 DACs already in use will be stolen in all cases when the RANGE function is used To set a range of inputs to off e Clickon RANGE characters turn white and the background red Click on OFF fora pop up displaying the channel numbers Click on the first and last ofthe range required INSERT RETURN Third field The third field is used to select the I O Insert Return source for the channel Click on this to display a pop up similar to that shown in Figure B Click on the desired analogue return source or click on AES for the digital return sources Other functions related to the Return operate in exactly the same way as for the Insert Sends RANGE The Range function works for Insert Returns in the same way as it does for Insert Sends WORD LENGTH Fourth field left The fourth field allows the channel Insert Send word length to be set ifthe send is digital Click on it to cycle through the word lengths 16 bit 20 bit and 24 bits SAMPLE RATE CONVERTER Fourth field right Indicator This indicator turns red and reads ON when adigital I O is selected which has an SRC turned on SRCs are controlled via the PREFERENCES GUI described later in this chapter Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 21 sueeJog 9 19 dey9 JOIJUOD G Jaydey9 5 2 Channel Screens Ton J st
199. D 1 Post Fader Headphones Feed 4 11 4 9 BroadcastMode eres esee eese enano 4 12 4 10 Channel Metering cere eres ee eee eene ee neta ene eo sette ttes tta sena 4 15 4 10 1 Channel Meter Default 4 15 4 10 2 Channel Meters to Input eene 4 15 4 10 3 Send Monitor sse 4 16 4 10 4 Return Monitor essere 4 16 4 10 5 MULTI in Channel Path eene 4 17 4 11 Dynamics Side Chain Linking eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenernn 4 18 4 11 1 Dynamics Side Chain Link Right 4 18 4 11 2 Dynamics Side Chain Busses 1 4 esses 4 20 4 12 Mixing the Main Output 4 22 4 12 1 Main Output Bus Set up sese 4 24 4 12 2 Channel Signal to the Main Output 4 26 4 13 Multi StemSet p ur en eene ou Erase 4 29 4 13 1 Multi Stem Set up Procedure sss 4 32 4 13 2 Multi Stem Monitor Path esse 4 36 4 13 3 Multi Stem Source Channels esses 4 40 4 13 4 Stem Monitor Switching sese 4 48 4 13 5 Stem Monitor Switching GUI Set up 4 50 4 13 6 Fold Down Matrix GUIS eene 4 52 Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 1 y
200. DS 1 16 which allow the faders to be switched to control the levels sent to the SUPER SG busses Not operational in this version SEL Section SENDS 1 8 9 16 17 24 Push Buttons Allow the assignment of Send Bus Master Output Levels to be controlled by central multi purpose master faders D SEL Section SUPER SGs 1 8 9 16 Push Buttons Allow the assignment of SUPER SEND GROUP Output Levels to be controlled by central multi purpose master faders SEL Section GROUPS 1 8 9 16 17 24 25 32 Push Buttons Allow Control Groups equivalent to analogue VCA Groups to be assigned to central multi purpose master faders These Control Groups may be nested D SUB LEVEL Push Button When the MT or Main Output Busses are set up for multi channel surround sound this button allows the levels sent to the SUB bass channel to be trimmed using the faders Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 11 suonduoseg 1 9 saideyo suonduoseg 9 1 14 6 2 Channels Section Panels I m SSS ES 6 12 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions SHOW VALUE Push Button Allows the display of gain loss in dB on the upper scribble for the function the fader is presently performing lt amp gt Push Buttons Step the ACCESS button selections one channel at a time in the direction of the arrow ABS amp TRM TO CUTS Push Button Assigns the and buttons above the faders to the Cuts ABS amp
201. E 1 DOC 5560 6 2 System Concept diagram SP Rack Host Computer Multitrack Tape Recorder s Digital amp Analogue I O Rack s O 8 8 Control Console Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 1 1 Control Surface Configurations E 0 50 00 nuo nmgo nn a OR TO o 00 ra 1 888 00 590 NEMNZM nononana 009009509 09008505 og og 20 680 no 00 no 00 110 D 659999500 IH ink int B 100 jio o
202. EL and GROUP Faders orOFF A Buttons Clicktoselectthe Channel or Group Fader number 5 32 Chapter 5 Control Screens PAN OUT RESET RESET Switching a Pan out will centre it if switched in again RESTORE Switching a Pan out will centre it butit will return to its previous setting if switched in again ST METER This option applies to the central stereo meter when is selected under the METERS heading at the top right of the Monitor panel Central stereo meter displays Land R signals from the Main Output Bus FDOWN Centralstereo meterdisplays the L and R signals derivedinthe Fold Down Matrix LS3 This option applies to the stereo CR Monitor LS3 when isselected under the MONITOR LS heading at the middle right of the Monitor panel The LS3 feed is the L and R signals from the Main Output Bus FDOWN The LS3 feed is the L and R signals derived in the Fold Down Matrix OSC A amp OSC B Oscillators outputs A amp B are controlled by clickingon Aand V tothe rightofthe parameter displays Level dBs 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 OdB in 1dB steps Frequency Hz 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 kHz 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 and 20 The Softkeys for this GUI Selects the top level LOGO screen 10 ALIAS Alias naming facility for all types of I O DIALOG Naming
203. G TONE button will function MULTI FORMAT amp STEREO SUB GROUPS 1 16 EJXXXXxxxXpJ KX KX KX EJ g Gece 9 Bx p TRACK amp STEREO SUH GROUPS 1 16 SELECT TRACK X C gt lt R C R MONO gt KX R S Multi Format and Monitor LOCK Push Button Is set locked lit up as default as a safety measure to prevent inadvertent set up changes Press it to unlock to allow set up It times out after 10 seconds or 10 seconds after the last button press during set up SET MAIN WIDTH Push Button Allows the format of the Main Output Bus to be set STEREO LCRS 5 1 or 7 1 using the and buttons either side of the 8 character dot display which indicates the current format The SET MAIN WIDTH function is locked unless has been pressed to unlock it first It inter cancels with the SET M T STEMS button Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 83 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 suonduoseq jeoiu
204. IST Every cut event is displayed individually even if it occurred at the same timecode as other events This allows adjustment of every individual event OFFLINE CUTS EDIT PROCEDURE To select Fader Cuts For Channel cuts click on CHANS in the selector block It highlights red and the channels are displayed in the numbers field To set the Cuts to be worked on Click VIEW and it highlights Then click on the channels to be worked on and they highlight red Click on them again to de select them individually This procedure also applies to MTSEND GROUPS and SSGs To select Send Cuts For Send Cuts for a particular channel click on CHSEND it highlights red and the channels are displayed in the numbers field Click on the required channel and its Sends 1 24 are displayed in the numbers field Click on the required Sends and they highlight red For a mix of all channels for a particular Send bus click on SNDMIX it highlights red and Sends 1 24 are displayed in the numbers field Click on the required Send and the channels are displayed in the numbers field Click on the required channels and they highlight red Using ALL NONE and RANGE To select all cuts of any type click on ALL and all numbers will be highlighted red ALL will change to NONE To select a number of consecutive cuts click on RANGE then click one at a time on both ends of the range Separate ranges may co exist Once the desired cut type and numbers
205. LED flashes to show that the system is ready to record absolute moves De select READY ABSOLUTE or roll the tape in which case it will be de selected automatically Press the PAN knob again either before or after the tape is rolling and the LED will light solidly indicating that moves will be recorded Roll back for the knobs works in the same way that it does for faders The difference is that instead of the knobs moving the LEDs in the skirts of the knobs reflect any automation moves When the moves are complete press the PAN knob again and the red LED flashes indicating that the mode has reverted to ready absolute Use READY CANCEL to take the PAN knob out of ready absolute status To trim PAN moves first latch below the central LCD then press the PAN knob so that its green LED flashes De select READY TRIM or allow it to be de selected automatically when the tape starts rolling Press the PAN knob either before or after rolling the tape The green LED will light solidly indicating that any trimming moves will be recorded Whilst the knob is in the ready state the LEDs around the skirt of the knob will indicate previous moves The position of the knob at the drop in point i e when the knob is pressed becomes the null point for any trimmed moves When the moves are complete press the PAN knob to drop back to ready status then press READY CANCEL to drop out completely 7 23 Chapter 7 Session
206. Legend Indicates that the dynamics GATE function is selected E Legend Indicates that the dynamics EXPANDER function is selected C Legend Indicates that the dynamics COMPRESSOR function is selected L Legend Indicates that the dynamics LIMITER function is selected 5 Segment Bar Meters Not in this version The 4 mini bar meters rising vertically above G E C and L legends give a lower resolution display of the channel gain reduction meters 4x Seven Segment Characters Indicate the channel number for meter signals being displayed Chapter6 Technical Descriptions 6 91 suonduoseg eoiuuoe 9 1 1 jeoiuuoe 9 4 6 4 Meter Bridge 6 4 2 Stereo Centre Section Meters SSG SSG SSG SSG SEND SEND SEND SEND OVER OVER OVER OVER EB EB EB EB B B E B E B E EH B E Es 5 5 S 5 S 5 B B B 2 E S B B B B B 22 5 52 5 5 2 5 S20 5 B B E B B 2
207. ME CUT Greetz To erase a cut completely Push and hold before the original in point and release after the original out point PUSH amp HOLD CUT Chapter 7 Session Management 7 75 juewebeueyy uoisses 9 5595 Ja dey9 7 7 Dynamic Automation Moves 7 7 4 To Automate Other Switches This works in exactly the same way as for CUTs but note that all switches except CUTs which can be assigned to Faders must be set up using the global READY ABSOLUTE and READY TRIM buttons beneath the central LCD Other switches which can be automated currently include Channel Pan IN OUT switches Multitrack Cuts Multitrack Pan IN OUTS including Surround Multitrack Send Cuts Send Cuts and Pan IN OUTs The 8 IN Buttons Input Channel amp Inserts panel The Equaliser IN OUTs and switches Dynamics switches 2 state MIC M T and LINE Input Selector switches Switches assigned to MIDI Select Master READY ABSOLUTE All automatable switches which are lit will go out Select the switches to be automated by pressing them they will flash indicating that they are in Ready Absolute mode De select READY ABSOLUTE and all switches return to their previous status Select GLOBAL DROP IN Control Keyboard This puts the switches into write and can be done before or after the
208. Main Output Stereo LCRS 5 1 amp 7 1 Bus Stereo LCRS 5 1 amp 7 1 Bus 2 Band Parametric EQ 2 Band Parametric EQ e 3 Compressor Characteristic Types 3 Compressor Characteristic Types Insert Insert Envelope Modulator Envelope Modulator GML 8900 Dynamics Plugin Opt Multitrack Busses 48 48 Multitrack Monitor Bus Stereo Used in Broadcast Mode Send Busses 24 Mono or up to 12 Stereo 12 Mono or up to 6 Stereo Super Send Group Busses 16 Configurable as Mono Stereo 8 Configurable as Mono Stereo LCR LCRS 5 0 5 1 7 0 amp 7 1 LCR LCRS 5 0 5 1 7 0 amp 7 1 Monitor Section e Control Room Monitor Outputs 2 Surround Up to 7 1 2 Surround Up to 7 1 1 Stereo 1 Stereo AES Digital Monitor Outputs Studio LS Outputs 2 Stereo 2 Stereo Foldback Outputs 4 Stereo 4 Stereo External Source Inputs 4 x 7 1 Surround 8 Stereo 4 x 7 1 Surround 8 Stereo External Source Switcher Main Output Bus Main Output Bus External Sources 1 12 External Sources 1 12 Fold Down Matix Output Fold Down Matix Output Multitrack Monitor Bus Oscillators With Level amp Frequency Control 3 1 Machine Control Control of Multiple Machines Motionworker Option Motionworker Option External Control Input Timecode Chase Timecode Chase
209. NCEL Push Button Touch AUTO ISOL CANCEL to delete the current channels set up for the Isolate function in readiness for another selection 7 7 9 Film Mode General In Film Mode Faders Cuts and Pans are isolated from GLOBAL DROP IN GLOBAL DROP OUT and READY CANCEL for Audition functions Film Mode is operational only whilst is selected Faders Cuts and Pans can still be automated at the same time as other controls but on a local basis In other words faders can be left ready enabled or in Touch Write and READY CANCEL will not affect them for example To enable or disable Film Mode Type 1 and ENTER on the QWERTY keyboard for a pop up requesting confirmation Click on OK or press ENTER Use the same command line to disable if already enabled Film Mode for Knobs Turning any knobs will set them into ready absolute mode indicated by their red LEDs flashing The effect they will have on the audio will also be heard or auditioned Once satisfactory press GLOBAL DROP IN to write the auditioned settings indicated by the red LEDs lighting solidly When the new setting is written press GLOBAL DROP OUT to drop back to ready and knobs return to their previous settings Press READY CANCEL to return to a safe mode READY CANCEL will not work for knobs with an audition setting To return a knob to its previous non audition setting de select and re select AUDITION
210. O andthenclickonthe A and buttons to adjust monitor level beyond the default unity gain AFL Allows boost of up to 20dB in 1dB steps PFL Allows boost of up to 20dB in 1dB steps SOLO Allows boost of up to 20dB in 1dB steps REDIRECTION ALIAS The specified alias names such as MIC 1 displayed for I O legends RAW The raw names suchas ADC 1 are displayed for I O legends STEM CLEARING MANUAL Channel stem routing is totally flexible allowing routing to multiple stems Routing selections must be cleared manually e AUTOMATIC Channel to stemrouting selections for aparticular Stem will be cleared automatically if another stem 15 selected In other words channels can route only to a single stem Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 31 sueeJog 9 Jeydeuo SueeJoS 9 5 2 Channel Screens I c mE ey GDC DISPLAY Global Delay Compensation Option to set what is displayed in the 8 character dot display above the Global Display Compensation knob on the Free Assign Area amp Dynamics panel ALWAYS Units of delay are indicated continuously WHEN MOVING GLOB DEL displayed until the knob is moved when the units of delay are indicated and remains for 3 seconds after release of the knob AUTO RAISE LEFT EQ amp Dynamics GUIs are automatically displayed in the left channels section above respective panels whe
211. OPY DYN must be set to off In this case QUICK COPY functions will copy the Audition settings only from those controls set in automation Ready ABS and Ready TRIM The destination controls will be set into Ready ABS and TRIM during the QUICK COPY operation 7 7 10 Global Ready Enable Setting all or a large number of controls into an automation ready enabled is possible using the GLOBAL READY ENABLE GUI and also by keyboard entry ff MISC CHANNELS io ej e hc ll 4 5 6 7 08 10 11 12 3 14 15 16 riers ea p o l afo falsele se s se 5 o feo 54 FE ESE ESESES ES ES ERR 74 75 77 79 EET gu fea foo s 32 33 4 35 se 97 sed 101014102 1034104 aofo 14 READY COMMIT CANCEL GLOBAL READY ENABLE GLOBAL READY ENABLE GUI General This GUI allows the setting up of automation ready enable in Absolute or Trim modes for The Complete Console Ranges of Channels Individual Channels All Controls for Selected Channels Sections of Controls for Selected Channels Key Individual Controls for Selected Channels Using GLOBAL READY ENABLE GUI Select the GUI using the GLOBAL softkey at the bottom of the SNAPSHOTS COPY amp LINK GUI or press the SCREENS softkey at the bottom right o central LCD Then click on GLOBAL ENABLE f the
212. ORD RECORD RECORD RECORD RECORD RECORD RECORD RECORD 5 2 8 s c r s c R s c R s c n s c R s c R s c R OVER OVER OVER OVER OVER OVER OVER OVER E o 0 5 0 E o ERO 5 E 0 Ed 0 4 5 4 4 5 4 4 5 4 4 5 4 4 5 4 4 5 4 4 5 4 4 5 4 8 5 8 8 5 8 8 5 8 8 5 8 8 5 8 8 5 8 8 5 8 8 5 8 12 Be 12 EE 12 EE 12 Be 12 Be 12 Be 12 EE 12 Be 16 5 16 16 8 16 16 8 16 16 5 16 16 5 16 16 5 16 16 8 16 16 5 16 20 2 20 20 2 20 20 B 20 20 B 20 20 5 20 20 5 20 20 S 20 20 B 20 24 24 24 24 2 24 24 24 24 32 Ee 32 5 32 32 8 32 32 5 32 32 32 32 5 32 32 8 32 32 32 40 2 40 40 Z 40 40 B 40 40 2 40 40 2 40 40 2 40 40 B 40 40 40 E E E E E E E 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 60 22 90 60 B 60 E3 90 60 5 00 60 5 90 60 ES 90 60 60 3 90 CH O L CH CH CH CH O L CH O L CH CH ooo Bac 000 GEOL GEOL CHOC GEOL 2 J J 6 90 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions MONO Channel Meters block Channel meters are fitted one per channel fader in blocks of eight Each meter
213. OT A ENTER Adds a new automation layer to the working mix that will switch to the currently highlighted Snapshot settings at point A and back to existing data at point B for channels 1 and 2 01 032 2 00 4 00 2 00 Adds new automation layer to the working mix that will switch to the Control Group Faders move data for Mix between 2 00 and 4 00 minutes PROJECT Command Line PROJECT ENTER Creates a new Project TITLE Command Line TITLE ENTER Creates a new Title CUE Command Line CUE ENTER Creates a new Cue in the CUES list at the current time for the master machine A pop up appears allowing a name to be assigned to the new Cue Click on or click on OK for the next default Cue number or type in a name using the QWERTY Keyboard first MIX Command Lines MIX Command Lines are related to Audition functions within the Mix Automation See section 7 7 for details Other Command Key Functions Key Allows machines other than the Timecode Master to be controlled by the system Transport Control Once the SELECT MACH key has been pressed pressing any Transport Remote button on any machine causes the system to control that machine until another is selected in the same way Key Displays the current Jog function in the Command Dialogue Line and allows its other functions to be set See page 6 63 for details and Keys Are tab and back tab functions to move the orange
214. Or use the and V keys on the Control Keyboard to move the highlight to GLOBAL ENABLE and on the Control Keyboard ABS or TRIM When the GUI appears the ABS absolute button will be lit red as the default mode Click on TRIM for Trim mode which lights green and inter cancels with ABS Chapter 7 Session Management 7 81 juewebeueyy uoisses Jeydeuo 5595 7 7 Dynamic Automation Moves Selecting Channels Channels can be selected individually by clicking on appropriate numbers to highlight them or clicking on ALL and then de selecting individual channels if more convenient To select adjacent channels in a block click on RANGE which highlights orange Then click on the first and last of each block De select RANGE when finished As soon as any channels are selected the COMMIT button lights orange and clicking this will action the ready enable function But first make sure the correct control types are highlighted in the selector block to the left Selecting Controls The control types are selected using the block on the left of the GUI Click on the appropriate buttons to highlight in orange the channel sections required such as EQ and Dynamics Click on ALL to highlight the complete channel then de select the sections not required or if more convenient click on NONE to de select all sections and then click on the ones required CHANNEL Selector Belo
215. Push Button Puts the SOLO and AFL buttons into an inter cancelling mode SOLO MOM Push Button Puts the SOLO and AFL buttons into a momentary mode MIN DELAY AUTO DELAY FREEZE DELAY FADs CEN CEN DB AGCS ACCS M T 16 BIT M T 20 BIT M T 24 BITI Upper Ancillary Push Button Block SET GLOBAL DELAY Push Button This delay function up to 80ms is in addition to the delay function within channels It allows channels to be delayed or advanced relative to other channels on a global basis The delay is inserted at the channel output pre fader The Global Delay function is usable only when is selected at the SELECT TO FADERS panel It is not operable when is selected either Global Delay procedure 1 Press SET GLOBAL DELAY and it flashes The 8 character dot display above the definable knob situated above the Monitor Level indicates the current Global Delay value An arrow to the left of the display alternates to alert that this function is displayed The lower buttons will also go out Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 55 eoiuuoe 9 suonduoseq jeoiuuoe 9 Jadeyo 6 3 Central Section Pan
216. ROUP the Group number The groups are numbered consecutively as they are created If a group is disbanded then the number will be re used later when another group is created Highlights in channel numbers panel Orange the channel accessed Red the other members of the group ENABLED LOCKED button Clicking on this button immediately below the SNAPSHOT legend changes it to LOCKED which inhibits accidental linking changes by locking the existing Link Groups CLEAR button Clicking on this button to the right of the ENABLED button allows all links to be cleared A dialogue pop up requires confirmation Chapter 7 Session Management 7 59 jueureBeue v uoisses uolssas Ja deyo 7 6 The Session Management Screen Pages nF 7 6 9 Copy Channel Fader Balance to Faders and to Channels General This function allows the copying of the Main Output Bus balance serves as monitor bus set by the Channel Faders to the M T Send Faders balance and vice versa This will also include Surround Pan settings Copy Channel Faders to M T Send Faders On the Select To Faders panel press and hold until it turns amber Then press the button M T SEND remains selected Copy Send Faders to Channels On the Select To Faders panel press and hold SEND until it turns amber Then press the CHANS button CHANS remains selected 7 6 10
217. SEND GROUPS Outputs and Inserts page layout This GUI allows assignment of SUPER SEND GROUP Outputs 1 16 SUPER SEND GROUPS 1 16 Inserts The Softkeys for this GUI TOP Selects the top level LOGO screen MASTER Selects the top level MASTER screen Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 43 sueeJog saldeyo Jeydeuo 5 2 Channel Screens SEND 1 SEND 2 210 m SEND SEND 10 AES 18 SEND 18 ANALOG SENDIS SEND 3 211 ENDS 11 AES 18 M SEND 19 m m SEND 4 SEND 12 AES 20 p CSENDIZI SEND 20 OFF m SEND 5 SEND 13 CSENDISI SEND 21 OFF ANALOG SENDAI SEND 6 m 14 EDERE T SEND SEND 22 OFF ANALOG SEND SEND 7 AES m SEND SEND 15 OFF m m SEND 23 Ea 8 __ ___ 5 44 Chapter 5 Control Screens MASTER GUI SEND OUTPUTS page layout This GUI allows assignment of SEND Bus Outputs 1 24 MIDI Control Pages 1 24 The Softkeys for this GUI TOP Selects the top level LOGO screen MIDI Selects the MIDI page with the same number as the currently accessed Send Output MASTER Selects the top level MASTER screen T BACK 1 2
218. SON Y DIGITAL AUDIO MIXING CONSOLE OXF R3 OPERATION MANUAL 1st Edition Revised 4 Software Version 3 0 and Later CAUTION Installation has to be done by a SONY authorized technician WARNING To prevent fire or shock hazard do not expose the unit to rain or moisture To avoid electrical shock do not open the cabinet Refer servicing to qualified personnel only VORSICHT Um Feuergefahr und die Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages zu vermeiden darf das weder Regen noch Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt werden Um einen elektrischen Schlag zu vermeiden darf das Geh use nicht ge ffnet werden Uberlassen Sie Wartungsarbeiten stets nur einem Fachmann For customers in the U S A WARNING This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manu
219. SP3000 Sony SP Rack 103000 Sony I O Rack DMBK R3001 Sony Mic Line A D Converter DMBK R3002 Sony Monitor D A Converter DMBK R3003 Sony Line A D Converter DMBK R3004 Sony Line D A Converter DMBK R3005 Sony SP Board DMBK R3006 Sony SP Link Board DMBK R3007 Sony SDIF 2 I O Board DMBK R3008 Sony AES EBU D I O Board DMBK R3009 Sony Timecode Board DMBK R3010 Sony GPI Control Board DMBK R3011 Sony Producer Desk DMBK R3012 Sony Speaker Stand DMSK R3072 Sony Digital Console Software DMSK R3096 Sony Digital Console Software DMSK R3001 Sony GML EQ Dynamics Emulation Software A 1 8 Appendixes OXF R3 Diagnostics Operator Diagnostics are not available in this version The following screen pages are included in the OXF R3 for the use of Qualified Service Personnel DIAGNOSTICS 16 08 29 Jul 1997 7 SM_NEWENTRY Timecode 0 00000000 String 16 08 29 Jul 1997 TX 8 SM PATH Proj 5 5 Title 1 0 Mix 1 0 Cue 1 0 16 08 28 Jul 1997 Rx 7 SM_NEWENTRY Timecode 0 00000000 String 16 08 28 Jul 1997 TX 8 SM PATH Proj 5 5 Title 1 1 Mix 1 0 Cue 1 2 16 08 28 Jul 1997 TX 8 SM PATH Proj 5 5 Title 1 1 Mix 1 1 Cue 1 2 16 08 29 Jul 1997 7 SM_NEWENTRY Timecode 0 00000000 String 16 08 28 Jul 1997 TX 8 SM PATH Proj 5 5 Title 2 2 Mix 1 0 Cue 1 2 _ system eres screen Diagnostics scr
220. Se TE n MASTER GUI SCRIBBLES CONTROL GROUP amp SCRIBBLES page layout This GUI allows scribble name assignment for CONTROL GROUP FADERS TALKBACK SCRIBBLES The Softkeys for this GUI Selects the top level LOGO screen MASTER Selects the top level MASTER screen Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 45 saldeyD 5 G 5 2 Channel Screens EXTSRC 6 E 15 73 ses 5 46 MASTER GUI STEREO EXTERNAL SOURCES layout Chapter 5 Control Screens This GUI allows assignment of STEREO EXTERNAL SOURCES 1 8 Select using the EXT SOURCE buttons in the Monitor Panel to listen to them The Softkeys for this GUI Selects the top level LOGO screen EXTSRC Selects Surround EXTERNAL SOURCES MASTER Selects the top level MASTER screen EXTSRC 10 _ __ __ _ OFF OFF wri zs Mri 32 MTi 30 Music j j 1 EXTSRC 11 EXTSRC 12 Orr sf Sora Boreal Porras errs ER ora j orr 11 _____ orr j orr j orr 12 7209 ff MASTER GUI Surround EXTERNAL SOURCES page layout This GUI allows assignment of e MULTI FORMAT EXTERNAL SOURCE
221. Super Send Groups from Multitrack 3 29 3 10 12 To Set Up a De Esser Using Dynamics Side Chain EQ 3 30 3 10 13 To Link Compressor Side Chains in a Group 3 31 3 10 14 To Link Compressor Side Chains so that One Channel Controls a Second Channel esse 3 32 Table of Contents 1 Table of Contents Chapter 4 Signal Paths Chapter 5 Control Screens Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 2 Table of Contents 4 1 The Basic Default Signal Path e eeeeeeeeeeeenee 4 2 4 2 Mix Down Signal Path with Processing Inserted 4 4 4 3 Mix Down with Post Channel Fader Insert 4 6 4 4 Recording to Multitrack soescocsoesssessoesscessesssessccesocesocscoeeo 4 7 4 5 In Line Channel Multitrack Recording 4 8 4 6 In Line Channel with Insert Post Channel Fader Monitor Function ccccccccccsssssssssscccssssscsscscccscssccsccccscssscoseces 4 9 4 7 SEND 1 Pre Fader Headphones Feed 4 10 4 8 SEND 1 Post Fader Headphones Feed 4 11 4 9 Broadcast eese essen eene tn stesse netos etse en tnus 4 12 4 10 Channel Metering eerte eee eee eee eee en eee to setae seta aset en sean 4 15 4 10 1 Channel Meter Default sse 4 15 4 10 2 Channel Meters to Inp
222. TLES page MIXES Selects the MIXES amp CUES page SNAPSHOT Selects the SNAPSHOTS COPY amp LINK page COMMIT Lights up orange when changes made on screen Press this softkey to implement changes Reverts to its normal blue colour MACHINES Selects the MACHINES set up parameters page SCREEN Selects pop up showing all available screens selections Click on any one to select it Chapter 7 Session Management 7 63 jueureBeue v uoisses 1 01559 7 7 Dynamic Automation Moves 7 7 1 Motorised Fader Controls Touch sensitive fader knob When dynamically automated moves are replaying touching the fader knob inhibits the electronic servo control Control of the audio level depends on the system mode at the time Automation Write button The small tactile button in the fader knob allows single finger operation when dropping in to write moves in absolute or trim Whilst the fader is moving take control of the fader with one finger and at the appropriate time press the Write button with the same finger The Ready ABS or TRM button must be selected to record moves indicated by their LEDs flashing Yellow Touch LED This LED lights when the system detects that a finger is touching the fader Ready ABS Absolute Write button Pressing the ABS button puts the fader into the ready absolute status If the Automation Writ
223. The diagram shows the channel fader which is controlling the monitor mix with a post fade insert point CH INPUT INPUT CHANNEL amp INSERTS LTER Dio L amp CHANNEL FADER R In line multitrack with post fader insert in the monitor path Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 9 y IM 4 7 SEND 1 Pre Fader Headphones Feed The diagram shows a typical Pre Fader headphone mix set up where a channel is configured in multitrack mode SEND 1 is used to send a signal to headphones from the tape return signal As the signal path indicates in the diagram the headphones are positioned after the dynamics function sourced from the monitor path pre fader To achieve this on the upper section of the SENDS 1 24 panel first make sure that SEND 1 is selected in the SELECT SOURCE FOR display upper right in the SENDS 1 24 panel If not use the large and C buttons to select SEND 1 Then in the left hand display window of the same panel use the small and buttons to display 8 which will cause the button to light Press the button and its light goes out to confirm the new source point The source for SEND 1 bus is now fed from the output side of th
224. Y Keyboard for confirmation before ENTER Menu options Menu options available using the softkey functions displayed at the foot of the Snapshots Copy amp Link screen page are as follows Selects the previous screen page SYSTEM Selects the SYSTEM screen page directly PROJECTS Selects the ARTISTS PROJECTS amp TITLES page MIXES Selects the MIXES amp CUES page ASSEMBLE Selects the mix compilation MERGE ASSEMBLE page BACKUPS Selects system BACKUPS functions REMOTES Selects the MACHINE REMOTES assignment matrix SCREEN Selects pop up showing all available screen selections Click on any one to select it 7 53 Chapter 7 Session Management jueujeBeue v uoisses Jeydeu uoissag 7 6 The Session Management Screen Pages FINAL 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 17 15 25 1999 RHYTHM REHEARSAL ALL INST VOCALS amp RHYTHM ALL INST NEW KIT FX SENDS FINAL FINAL SINGLE MIX DANCE MIX SNAPSHOTS COPY LINK DEFAULTS CONTROLS CHs CEN INST CEN INST INST INST INST INST E E Lm 5 _ assemavel Removes SNAPSHOTS COPY amp LINK GUI displaying the Copy DEFAULTS COPY and LINK in general Copy and Link functions can be performed either locally in the channels sections known as Quick Copy and Q
225. YSTEM column Click on it or press on the Control Keyboard for a pop up Enter the host name and file path which normally ends sm for the remote host computer 7 1 06 Chapter 7 Session Management Type it in using the QWERTY Keyboard and then click on OK or ENTER 3 Click on MAP DRIVE for the local system to make the connection to the remote system Once completed a pop up will appear for confirmation 4 Select the Backups GUI using the appropriate softkey at the foot of the GUI in order to copy files from the remote system SYSTEM Tab DETECT POWER FAILURE Sets the OXF R3 to react to Power Failure messages according to the settings in the Uninterruptable Power Supply UPS management software The R3 can react in one of two ways according to priority levels set within the software Lower priority functions can display a warning message on the central GUI according to a script in the UPS software Higher priority levels when power capacity is very low for example can instigate an immediate Save of Mix Data In this case no warning will be given but a pop up will confirn the save after the event A new entry will appear in the Mixes GUI UPS EMERGENCY SAVE Chapter 7 Session Management 7 1 07 jueujeBeue v uoisses Jeydeu uoisseg RSL Remote Studio Link Tab The RSL facility allows control linking between two OXF R3 systems in order to allow collabo
226. a flow 1 4 5 Diagnostics screen A 17 Dynamic automation moves automation off 7 79 dropping out of write on subsequent mix passes 7 78 film mode 7 80 global ready enable 7 81 motorised fader controls 7 64 selective automation isolate 7 79 to automate a pan move or any other knob 7 77 to automate cuts 7 70 75 to automate other switches 7 76 to trim pan moves or any other knob 7 78 Index 1 III Index Dynamics side chain linking dynamics side chain bus operation 4 21 dynamics side chain bus set up procedure 4 21 dynamics side chain busses 4 20 dynamics side chain link right 4 18 dynamics side chain link right set up procedure 4 19 F Fader paging 3 8 Fader panel 6 6 7 Faders automating dropping out of write on subsequent mix passes 7 78 global touch and audition functions 7 67 motorised fader controls 7 64 to automate moves on one fader 7 65 to record absolute moves for a number of faders 7 67 68 to record auditioned levels 7 69 to trim moves for a number of faders 7 68 to trim moves for one fader 7 65 66 Faders select to 3 14 16 File data storage 7 7 Film mode 7 80 Free assign area amp dynamics panel 3 11 6 20 6 definable knobs amp 6 switches 6 21 12 x selector blocks 6 20 21 dynamics area 6 22 dynamics side chain equaliser 6 24 virtual panels illustration 6 23 G Global ready enable 7 81 Glossary 8 Input channel amp inserts equaliser and filters panel 3 10 6 17 channel path sele
227. abelled MT1 and MT2 in the GUI are designed for primary multitrack machine use and have track lists associated with them The names entered in the track lists can be propagated to the electronic scribbles Command Dialogue At the base of the screen the User Command Dialogue Line bar displays commands from the dedicated Control Keyboard and QWERTY Keyboard for confirmation before ENTER Menu options Menu options available using the softkey functions displayed at the foot of the Machines screen page are as follows A Selects the previous screen page SYSTEM Selects the SYSTEM Screen page directly PROJECTS Selects the ARTISTS PROJECTS amp TITLES page directly MIXES Selects the MIXES amp CUES page for all mixing functions SNAPSHOT Selects the SNAPSHOTS COPY amp LINK page TRACKS Selects the TRACK LISTS page REMOTES Selects the MACHINE REMOTES assignment matrix SCREEN Selects pop up showing all available screen selections Click on any one to select it Chapter 7 Session Management 7 31 juewebeueyy uoisses Jejdeu jueujeBeueyy 5 9 7 6 The Session Management Screen Pages 7 6 4 Artists Projects amp Titles Screen The ARTISTS PROJECTS amp TITLES screen allows access to all entries belonging to the current User Clicking on or highlighting any individual ARTIST PROJECT causes all its TITLES to be displayed ARTISTS PROJECTS am
228. again The cuts will be replayed and none will be overwritten until GLOBAL DROP IN is pressed once more Alternatively an individual switch will drop into automation record at the moment it is pressed changing its state at the same time The state of a switch can be retained when dropping in using READY ABSOLUTE by holding its button whilst pressing the switch OQ GLOBALDROP OUT Key GLOBAL DROP OUT causes all controls to drop out of automation record To automate cuts 1 To start at the beginning of the Title on the Control Keyboard press LOCATE TITLE ENTER Or LOCATE ENTER to locate to the last entered starting time 2 Ready enable the cuts to be automated with READY ABSOLUTE or READY TRIM or Ready enable cuts using the local method described at the beginning of this section 3 Press GLOBAL DROP IN either before or after rolling the tape to drop all ready enabled cuts into automation record or press switches individually 7 72 Chapter 7 Session Management 4 Write cuts as required To audition a channel which is cut assign the Definable Knobs to INPUT GAIN and press AFL on the appropriate channel 5 Press GLOBAL DROP OUT after writing cuts 6 Press PLAY ENTER on the Control Keyboard to hear the result and note that automated cuts are indicated by switches lighting amber 7 Roll back and repeat GLOBAL DROP IN until the cuts are satisfactory
229. al could void your authority to operate this equipment The shielded interface cable recommended in this manual must be used with this equipment in order to comply with the limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC rules AN This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance For customers in Europe This product with CE marking complies with both the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC issued by the Commission of the European Community Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the following European standards EN60950 Product Safety EN55103 1 Electromagnetic Interference Emission EN55103 2 Electromagnetic Susceptibility Imunity This product is intended for use in the following Electromagnetic Environment s E4 controlled EMC environment ex TV studio Pour les clients europ ens Ce produit portant la marque CE est conforme la fois la Directive sur la compatibilit lectromagn tique EMC 89 336 CEE et la Directive sur les basses tensions 73 23 CEE mises par la Commission de la Communaut europ enne La conformit cas directives implique la conformti aux normes erop ennes suivantes e EN60950 S curit des produits EN55103 1 Interf rence lectromagn tiques mission EN55103 2 Sensib
230. ame of up to6 characters Press ENTER when finished Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 15 sueeJog 9 19 dey9 JOIJUOD G Jaydey9 5 2 Channel Screens vice J Figure M T RETURN INPUTS GUI pop ups 5 16 Chapter 5 Control Screens Assigning M T INPUTS The second 8 blocks entitled M T each with 2 clickable fields below are used for setting up the multitrack inputs INPUT Upper field The upper field of each block is used to select the input source Click on this to display a pop up of the available sources as in Figure A Click on the desired source to select it The sources available include multitrack channels 1 48 and MADI signals 49 56 RANGE A contiguous range of inputs can be assigned simultaneously Toassigna set of consecutive inputs to a number of consecutive channel inputs Returns 1 48 to channel M T Inputs 1 48 as an example e Click on the upper field below the legend of Channel 1 for the assignment pop up shown in Figure e Click on RANGEand its characters turn white and the background red Click on the lowest number of Returns required 1 in this example and it highlights red Clickonthehighestnumber ofthe Returns required 48 in this example and M T Returns 1 48 are assigned simultaneously to Channels 1 48 M T Returns already in
231. an edit pop up Clicking on the large A and buttons nudges the timecode The merge transition can be selected as a butt or timed ramp according to the icon to right of the FM label An end time must be specified in the SOURCE TO section using a similar method used to set the start time specified in step 4 In this example it is CHORUS 1 which is effectively the end of Verse 1 A destination within the Working Mix must be specified in the NEW LAYER FM section The procedure is a repeat of step 4 but without needing to specify a butt or ramp In the example it is VERSE 2 Once a from FM time is specified the time is entered automatically The TO entry itself can be edited if required 7 Further options include selecting the components in the merge the default being ALL which includes all channels CHS and the centre section CEN The example shows that CHS has been selected in the SOURCE block upper left The selection process can be taken further to select specific channels by clicking on the numbered buttons The example shows that channels 1 12 23 24 33 and 34 have been selected The source data will be applied to the same numbered channels but can be specified differently by clicking on DESTINATION A further option the field at left lower middle allows individual channel and centre section components to be specified by highlighting them 1 0 or click on OK to comp
232. and CEN ACCS R may be latched simultaneously M T 16 BIT Push Button Sets Word Length for the MADI output feeding the multitrack to 16 bits D M T 20 BIT Push Button Sets Word Length for the MADI output feeding the multitrack to 20 bits QD M T 24 BIT Push Button Sets Word Length for the MADI output feeding the multitrack to 24 bits ALL GUIs Push Button Latching function which sets the I O GUIs on all 6 LCD screens Release to return to previous GUIs ALL ROUTE GUIs Push Button Latching function which sets the ROUTE GUIs on all 6 LCD screens Release ALL ROUTE to return to previous GUIs ALL STATUS GUIs Push Button Not operational in this version Latching function which sets the STATUS GUIS on all 6 LCD screens Release ALL STATUS GUls to return to previous GUIs MIDI EN able Push Button Overall MIDI enable disable for all MIDI outputs Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 57 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 suonduoseq jeoiuuoe 9 Jadeyo 6 3 Central Section Panels aa eee Eee un JOY STICK EN AUTO CUE DYNA MICS SOLO ISOL cea le E LI OO Lower Ancil
233. and stops PLAY MIX ENTER PLAY MIX ENTER lays the currently highlighted MIX or one specified by number PLAY ENTER lays from the timecode locations stored in bookmarks A or B as selected PLAY B ENTER Plays from time location A to location B and stops PLAY ENTER Plays from the current timecode minus the quick rollback time see page 6 73 LOCATE Command Lines LOCATE ENTER Locates the system to the last location timecode point LOCATE Timecode ENTER Locates the system to a specified timecode location entered using the numeric key pad LOCATE TITLE ENTER or LOCATE TITLE ENTER Locates the system to the start of the current TITLE or TITLE LOCATE CUE ENTER or LOCATE CUE ENTER Locates to the currently highlighted CUE or CUE LOCATE MIX ENTER or LOCATE MIX ENTER Locates to the currently highlighted MIX or one that is specified by number LOCATE or B Locates the system to timecode locations in set at A or B as selected LOCATE ENTER Locates to the current timecode minus the quick rollback time see page 6 73 CYCLE Command Lines CYCLE TITLE ENTER or CYCLE TITLE ENTER Plays and repeats the current or specified TITLE continuously CYCLE CUE ENTER Repeatedly plays the passage between CUE and CUE
234. anged The stereo function is propagated through to the channels such that the appropriate Send sections are automatically set up for stereo operation Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 79 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 6 3 Central Section Panels m X SELECT E c9 2 facoess access faccess faccess access N N ec cane eaa d 3 e fc c c por Tr 1 Con Tas eT Trout i i Locus 10 5 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX x n n uen EJ MULTI FORMAT 8 STEREO SUB GROUPS 1 D 3 D e o o 5 n SELECT 56 1 8
235. area on the SELECT TO FADERS panel and may control SENDs Send Master levels SUPER SGs Super Send Group master levels GROUPs style control group masters 3 1 6 Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 9 Select To Pans The Pan Knobs above the faders are assignable in a similar manner to the faders Although their primary job is panning they can also be used to perform all channel level adjustments such as input gain settings and Send Bus levels They are really Definable Knobs rather than just Pans As can be seen in the diagram below the SELECT TO PANS panel performs a function for the Pans similar to that of the SELECT TO FADERS panel for the faders All equivalent level and gain control functions on an in line channel strip may be assigned to the row of Definable Knobs whose default setting is channel Pan A typical set up could have Mic Gain controlled by the knobs whilst the faders control the M T Send With this set up all levels are easily adjusted during tracking Remember that dedicated knobs are always available on the assignable panel areas in parallel for all level controls INPUT GAIN N x A 2 27 77 N NN N N SE SER NN NSS QW e PLL 27 AN EN NON X SSNS NEN SN NN x SN NN N Vinny 7 7 Le RES N SN 1222 e NY A SENDS NY Bag NS LZ
236. asic Console Operations __________ ______ _____________ ___ __________________ 3 10 10 To Bounce Tracks Zn Oooo Deo ey 215515 0599595599 695599689 OOO Oo EXEC STS Se fee ele oOooooooono OOOO 5615 55 a Oooo 51555 nua 000 oja 000 Soleo ims al eoeoo eoo eoo o pagana ojo Pro Oaks baod 85555 1O BS ooo0o0ono0o00 OO oOo ofo Qaam ogo 99009 o fda jo nag OO 00
237. ation data To trim automated switch actions use the procedure as described above except substitute READY TRIM for READY ABSOLUTE 7 7 5 Automate Move or any other knob The principles for automating knobs are the similar to those for faders but note that all knobs except levels which can be assigned to Faders must be set up using the global READY ABSOLUTE and READY TRIM buttons beneath the central LCD rz y XXXXXXKXXXXXXXXXXX Functions for automating knobs illustrated with a Pan knob Other knobs which can be automated currently include Channel Pans Multitrack Pans including Surround Pans Multitrack Send Levels Send Levels Equaliser Knobs Dynamics Knobs Delay Knobs Knobs assigned to MIDI Switch and displays for automating knobs Write Switch Press knob to switch for Automation write O Red Absolute LED Green Trim LED Toautomate a PAN orany other knob 1 Latch the READY ABSOLUTE button on the panel below the central LCD and push the PAN knob Its red LED flashes to show that it is in ready absolute mode De select READY ABSOLUTE or play the tape when it will de select automatically 2 Press the PAN knob again either before or after the tape is rolling and the LED will light full on indicat
238. ation units four side chains operate on a single gain control element The Side Chain EQ is a fully parametric 2 band element which may be inserted in three Ways in the Dynamics Side Chain only in the Signal Path only as a second EQ in the Signal Path and the Side Chain The current Free Assign Area lower right contains DELAY Effect This area includes space for additional effects as and when software upgrades are introduced in the future Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 11 peuels e jeydeuo paners geideuo 3 6 Multitrack Routing for Multitrack Super Send Groups and Multi Format MULTI FORMAT Buttons These routing buttons have a layout matching a set of MULTI FORMAT 7 1 surround LS Their function depends on what is 5 selected to the faders at the SELECT FADERS panel In other words they set the destinations for the signals currently passing through the faders ROUTING ROUTE TO TRACKS ROUTING Buttons 1 48 amp 3 Two sets of buttons on each side of the console allow o channel sources to be assigned to Multitrack Group t Busses 1 48 GRP default or Direct Outputs E DIR The routing for 48 channels can be displayed simultaneously by showing 8 channels on each of the associated six channel screens three per side The screens display further channels automatically consistent with fader paging 4 8 Fa 8 F3 F3 F2 F2 3
239. ault for the 16 SSGs is 8 Stereo but they can be flexibly set up in a great many combinations 1 Press and hold the button and it will turn amber Simultaneously buttons of any other SSGs in the same same group will light amber 2 To add to the group whilst still holding the ACCESS press the next button at the end of the group or the before the first SSG in the group if appropriate 3 To make the group smaller whilst still holding the ACCESS press a lit button which is either the first or last of the group to de select it from the group Adding an SSG to a group will steal it from its current group without warning if it happens to be set up that way Level and Pansettings The signal level sent from a channel to an SSG is exactly the same as feeds the Main Output Bus The Pan settings are the same too except that it is possible to have an SSG which is set up to be wider than the Main Output Bus Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 81 eoiuuoe 9 suonduoseq jeoiuuoe 9 Jadeyo 6 3 Central Section Panels N 6 82 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions In other words the Main Output could be set up for Stereo for example whilst one of the SSGs might be set for 5 1 The panner creates full surround information at all times which would be fed to the 5 1 SSG But the Stereo Main would receive the full signal based on L R Pan settings only Level Knob s Co
240. aying the GUI to be printed and often itis more convenient to use another Click on PRINT in the box lowest right e Move the cursor into the screen to be printed if itis not already there This can done witha Trackerball or by pressing the SELECT button below the LCD just once e Once the cursor is displayed on the screen to be printed press the SELECT button below the LCD to print the image e This is aone shot operation and once the printing has been actioned the PRINT option inthe PREF page reverts to SELECT e Click on PRINT once more to print a second or further GUI image This print output function requires the system to be configured with a Postscript compatible printer Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 13 sueeJog 9 19 dey9 JOIJUOD G Jaydey9 5 2 Channel Screens Figure B MIC INPUT pop ups 5 14 Chapter 5 Control Screens Assigning INPUTS The upper 8 blocks in the GUI entitled MIC each with 3 clickable fields below ar e used for setting up MIC inputs INPUT Upper field The upper field is used to select the ADC Click on this field to display a pop up dialogue box as shown in Figure A The channel number is displayed in the pop up according to the channel selected If OFF is selected there will be no source Click on the required ADC number or name alias to connect that input to the selected channel RANGE A contiguous range of
241. between A and B continuously until stopped by pressing either CANCEL or the transport key The A and B Cue points may be revised at any time Key Cancels the current command It will also delete commands on the Command Line prior to pressing ENTER REPEAT ENTER This key sequence repeats the last entered command access earlier commands press the relevant number of times up to a maximum of 40 The stored command is displayed at each press The command will be executed when is pressed Using Numeric Key pad to Enter Timecode The entry format is exactly the same as that used for PCM 3324 48 series remote control units 1 00 00 01 12 00 00 12 1234 00 12 34 12345 01 23 45 123456 12 34 56 12345621 12 34 56 21 12 34 56 21 12 34 56 21 12 34 56 12 34 56 Timecode shortforms x Separates hours minutes Separates minutes seconds Separates seconds frame 12 12 00 00 00 Specifies hours 34 00 34 00 00 Specifies minutes 56 00 00 56 00 Specifies seconds 21 00 00 00 21 Specifies frames Example 3 4 00 03 04 00 Any combination is allowed To set and use QUICK ROLLBACK Press ENTER where the rollback time in seconds To quick rollback on the machine transport keys press and hold and press for an instant See also PLAY LOCATE and CYCLE Chapter6 Technical Descriptions 6 73 eoiuuoe 9
242. ble screen selections Click on any one to select it 7 48 Chapter 7 Session Management 7 6 8 Snapshots Copy amp Link Screen FINAL 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 17 15 25 May 1999 RHYTHM REHEARSAL ALL INST VOCALS amp RHYTHM ALL INST NEW KIT FX SENDS CONTROLS CHs CEN INST CEN INST INST FINAL FINAL INST SINGLE MIX INST DANCE MIX INST Lame enosecrs oosa Removes SCREEN SNAPSHOTS COPY 8 LINK GUI displaying the Snapshot DEFAULTS General This screen has three pages allowing control of Snapshots Copy and Link functions Click on the heading bar for the page required Snapshots may be saved ranging from the full system down to aminimum of 1 channel However Snapshots may be loaded down to component sections of channels depending on the Snapshots DEFAULTS selector Snapshots for elements such as EQ and Dynamics may be loaded individually to their original channel or any number of other channels For COPY and LINK there are separate sets of defaults related to the copying and linking of settings from one channel to one or more others DEFAULTS block The availability of buttons in the DEFAULTS block layout will change depending on whether the current operation is SNAPSHOTS COPY or LINK Click on the appropriate buttons to highlight in orange the channel sections required such as EQ and Dynamics Click on ALL to highlight the comp
243. block is situated directly above a channel s LCD screen This layout enables channel related information such as routing assignments which are also displayed in blocks of eight to line up with their associated meters eRECORD 5 5 e j I EZ 4 4 o 8 8 m cms 12 28 12 I I af 16 16 ES ES 20 E3 20 amen d ES 24 28 24 32 8 32 EJ 40 40 ES 50 E 70 ES ES CH O L 9 9 SEIL BEBES 6 Mono meter Left Scale 60dB OdB Full Scale Right Scale 90dB OdB Full Scale This is a more specialised scale which allows monitoring of lower level noises such as air conditioning RECORD Legend This follows the channel Record switch function 5 Legend Indicates that the meter is reading the SEND Monitor signal C Legend Indicates it is reading the CHANNEL Pre Fader signal R Legend Indicates it is reading the RETURN Monitor signal These legends are not lit when MTRs to INPUT is selected see section 6 3 2 OVER Legend Indicates a digital signal greater than full scale at the pre fader stage Q CH O L Legend Indicates an overload within the channel signal at the input stage Q G
244. by pressing the MIXES softkey beneath the screen The Start and End times set for the current Title will be displayed either side of the central timecode display MIXES amp CUES sec MIXES 13 54 27 May 1999 CUES TIME RHYTHM INTRO 1 START OF TITLE 00 00 54 21 GUITAR INTRO KIT INTRO 01 09 VOX HARMONY INTRO SETS m LEAD VOX INTRO ren RHYTHM INTRO STRINGS 5 VOX INTRO 00 01 23 02 KEYS UP KEY CHANGE 6 VERSE 1 00 01 31 08 WE 8 VERSE 2 00 02 26 22 3 CHORUS 2 00 02 58 03 10 MIDDLE 8 00 03 21 07 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 LEAD VOX FINE TUNE RHYTHM FINE TUNE 12 SAX SOLO VERSE 00 03 51 24 13 CHANGE 00 04 23 01 t senso OFFLINE screen Mixes amp Cues screen To set cue points on the fly 2 Repeat as necessary for CUE 2 CUE 3 etc To give useful names to these cues later move the 1 Roll the tape and press on the Control highlight to each Cue in turn and click on or press Keyboard in readiness for setting a cue point At on the Control Keyboard for a dialogue box the appropriate time press ENTER A pop up Type in the name s required using the QWERTY will appear prompting the user to type in a suitable keyboard name then either select OK on the screen or press ENTER on the keyboard Alternatively press again for the default name of CUE 1 and a new cue
245. ce name in the pop up and its input and output will be connected simultaneously The I O device names will be displayed inthe fourth and fifth fields and the actual device name will be displayed in the seventh lowest scribble field The name will also be displayed in the Insert section of the MULTITRACK Panel in the dot character display Once actioned as a Fast Insert the assignments to the other fields can be edited or set up on an individual basis as described later The M T GROUP OUTPUTS are always fed to MADI loops I and 2 but further parallel assignments can be made as follows GROUP OUTPUT Second field The second field is used to select the destination for the M T Group outputs Click on this for the pop up displaying possible destinations Figure A shows analogue destinations DACs Click on the desired DAC number to assign a Send Fora digital output click on AES for the list of digital destinations Further pages of related pop ups can be accessed by clicking on gt Click on OFF to disable an output RANGE Acontiguous range of M T Group outputs can be assigned simultaneously To assign a set of consecutive groups to anumber of consecutive outputs channel M T Groups 1 4 feeding DACs 5 8 as anexample Click on the second field of Channel 1 for the assignment pop up shown in Figure B e Click on RANGEand its characters turn white and the background red Click on the lowest number of the DACs required 5 in
246. central Master Fader is set to maximum OdB Then the monitor signal is available via the centre section controls as follows What follows is an overview of the Monitor functions For detailed descriptions of individual functions see Chapter 6 LS1 Push Button Selects the primary set of Monitor LS and is the fire up default Make sure the button is lit or press it if not CR Monitor Level Sets the level to the Control Room LS and operates in tandem with the Surround Level on the upper panel illustrated on the page opposite DIM Push Buttons Dims the CR Monitor LS according to the Dim setting adjusted using the small definable knob situated above CUT Push Buttons Cuts all the CR Monitor LS simultaneously and are situated in both panel sections and work in tandem CUT L CUT R S Push Buttons Individual CR Monitor LS mutes Q Surround Fold Down Matrix The monitor signal fire up default is the Main Output Bus It is possible to listen to a folded down version of the Main Output Bus as follows Select FOLDDOWN as the source in one of the EXT SOURCE windows using the and buttons either side of their 8 character dot display Press to light the button to the right of that Source Selector Select folded down versions of the Main Output Bus as desired and note that only sources of the same width or less than that of the Main Bus format are valid Q CAL Push Button Toggles between a fixed cal
247. chines have been named in the example shown MACHINES SONY 9000 2T 24 BIT MASTER Machine Type Sony PCM 3000 Scribble PCM 3000 c EFEFEEEE FFEFFEEF ia gt sse wes traces screen MACHINES screen To adda Machine tothe list 1 To add a machine to the list and name it highlight including for example the 8 character electronic one of the 16 fields by clicking on it Then either scribble name and number of tracks The scribble click on it again or press for a name pop up name will be displayed adjacent to tape remote Type in a suitable name using the QWERTY assignments for this machine When all entries are Keyboard then click OK or on the complete click OK or on the Control Control Keyboard The name will be displayed in Keyboard the banner at the top of the screen Note 2 Click on the Machine Type field to highlight it Additional machines can be set up by clicking on NEW Then either click on it again or press EDIT for the MACHINE in the Machine Type pop up list and filling in machine selector pop up Click on an appropriate appropriate parameters name and fill in other attributes where necessary 7 30 Chapter 7 Session Management 3 Click on the button to the right of the for pop up allowing assignment of the new machine to one of the Motionworker channels A E Multitrack Machines and Track Lists Machines 1 and 2 l
248. cnccenscenerenennnnnnnnnncenecees 3 8 3 3 Assignable Channel Processing cssscssscsssssessscessscssssesees 3 9 3 4 Input Channel Equaliser and Filters 3 10 3 5 Free Assign Area and Dynamiice cscssscesssccssscssccsssseees 3 11 3 6 Multitrack Routing for Multitrack Super Send Groups and Mul ti FOrmat cscsscsssscccscescessesscsecescensesscsscsscsssessessesscescseees 3 12 3 7 SONS E C 3 13 3 8 Select Faders eere eee eret esses ettet entes eta sta sten enne enano 3 14 3 9 Select To Pans eese eee eese essens 3 17 3 10 Basic Console Operations eere ee esee eerte ette etta etant 3 18 3 10 1 To Route a Mic or Line Input to the Main Output Bus 3 19 3 10 2 To Set Up a Super Send Group from Channel Inputs 3 20 3 10 3 To Send Signals to Tracks on Tape 3 21 3 10 4 To Monitor Signals to and from 3 22 3 10 5 To Set Up a Stereo Headphone Mix for Foldback 1 O P 3 23 3 10 6 To Equalise Signal Feeding the Multitrack 3 24 3 10 7 To Equalise Monitor Signal Post Multitrack 3 25 3 10 8 To Insert Dynamics Pre Multitrack Send 3 26 3 10 9 To Insert Dynamics Post Multitrack Return 3 27 3 10 10 To Bounce Tracks 3 28 3 10 11 Set Up
249. cs Side Chain Select the ACCESS button by the window displaying S C EQ and the knobs and switches will be assigned to the Side Chain EQ Select its IN button The assignable buttons allow two selections SIG EQ and 5 EQ as illustrated in the following diagram They work as follows Select SIG EQ to have the equaliser affect the signal path alone Select S C EQ to insert the equaliser in the Dynamics Side Chain alone Select both SIG EQ and S C EQ to affect the signal path and dynamics side chain SIGNAL EQ DYN SC IN 8 ca SIGNAL gt DYN LE eo 50 EG SIGNAL EQ DYN SC IN 6 24 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions Side chain EQ settings 6 2 7 Multitrack Panel This panel allows control of all Multitrack functions apart from track routing assignments for the channel currently accessed STET MULTITRACK 1 2 3 5 15 14 13 12 9 6 7 8 MULTITRACK panel GROUP TRIM section QGROUP TRIM Knob Controls gain of the M T bus output to M T channel AFL Push Butto
250. ctors 6 18 equaliser amp filters section 6 18 19 five band equaliser 6 19 high amp low pass filters 6 19 input channel amp inserts section 6 17 18 panel illustration 6 17 I O GUI assigning channel inserts 5 20 assigning line inputs 5 19 assigning mic inputs 5 15 assigning M T group inserts and outputs 5 25 assigning M T inputs 5 17 I O pop up colour coding 5 12 MADI links 5 12 printing GUI pages 5 13 I O racks 1 3 analogue I O 1 3 digital I O 1 3 modules 6 97 2 Index K Keyboard entry to record arm channel tracks 6 75 L LCD channel screen panel 6 31 Machine remotes screen 7 61 63 Machines screen page 7 30 31 Main output bus GUI 5 39 Master fader panel 6 38 Merge assemble screen 7 40 45 Merge command lines 7 44 Meter bridge mono channel meters 6 90 91 other meter bridge indicators 6 95 stereo centre section meters 6 92 94 MIDI MIDI bars amp beats 7 93 94 MIDI control pages 7 89 setting MIDI parameters 7 90 92 Mixes amp cues screen 7 35 36 cues 7 38 39 mixes 7 36 37 screen page 7 35 Mixing dropping out of write on subsequent mix passes 7 21 getting started 7 9 OXF R3 logo screen 7 9 to assemble a mix 7 24 26 to automate a pan move or any other knob 7 23 to automate cuts 7 13 15 to automate fader moves 7 20 to name artists projects amp titles 7 10 to record absolute moves for a number of faders 7 22 to save a mix 7 19 to set cue points 7 11 12 to trim fader moves 7 22 to trim moves for a n
251. d with as a separator 1 32 Channels 1 32 e Individual items are separated by 2 4 25 2 4 and 25 Unlimited strings are possible in the same entry e g 1 3 5 08 12 42 Channels 1 3 5 8 and 12 42 Track arming using the keyboard is not additive and must be accomplished using a single entry In other words the latest entry overwrites the previous one Press RECORD 0 ENTER to disarm all the tracks that are armed Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 75 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 suonduoseq 9 6 3 Central Section Panels a a SSS eee 6 3 4 Super Send Groups Send Outputs and Multi Format Panel SEND OUTPUTS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS KX XX XX ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt Xx gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt SELECT
252. ders when faders are assigned to control M T Send level Any Pan can be used as they all track each other If one is put into automation write the others will follow automatically The joystick will move according to automated moves and the push button lights when the joystick is touched The Surround Routing buttons in the MULTI FORMAT section of the Routing panel and panners will always operate on whatever function is assigned to the Faders via the SELECT TO FADERS panel The functions of the individual controls on these panels are described in more detail in Chapter 6 Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 43 jeubis 19 HAI 4 13 Multi Stem Set up __________________________ ____________ Behaviour of Routing in general The routing options and behaviour vary considerably depending on whether the system is operating in STEREO or MULTI FORMAT modes What follows is a summary STEREO Mode ROUTE TO TRACKS section allows panning strictly between Odd and Even tracks only MULTI FORMAT buttons are not operational Selecting either just ODD or EVEN tracks A Post Fader signal will be fed directly to the Odd or Even tracks The M T button is not operational Selecting at least one ODD and one EVEN track A Post Fader signal will be fed directly to the Odd and Even tracks Selecting the M T button will allow panning between the Odd and Even tracks MULTI FORMAT Mode Routing t
253. ders is selected individual channel controls can be adjusted To do this press the ACCESS button below the fader for the channel required Then all the ASSIGNABLE PANELS belong to that channel displaying its settings Adjust as necessary As can be seen from the diagram the functions on an in line vertical channel strip become horizontal on the OXF R3 In other words the whole panel is equivalent to an exceptionally comprehensive channel strip This is assigned to each channel individually simply by pressing the appropriate channel ACCESS button oo LAE eG D LI OQO oO 0 00 ROUTING EQ amp FILTERS 25 VYojaWa INPUT CHANNEL amp INSERTS oO e m m AUX SENDS L1 0 00 CJ D n 1 1 1 29050955 0
254. descriptions relate to Copy functions which are carried out using the Channel buttons decribed in detail in Chapter 7 Here is a brief description of copying and or linking the settings of one channel to others COPY Press and hold upper button of source channel until it turns amber Press and release upper buttons on destination channels LINK Press and hold lower button of source channel until it turns amber Press and release lower buttons on destination channels COPY amp LINK Press and hold lower button of source channel until it turns amber Press and release upper buttons on destination channels Q COPY DYN Push Button This is a latching function and applies to to all COPY and QUICK COPY functions which are performed using button push operations these are described in Chapter 7 If is selected any copy operations will include dynamic automation data inter cancels with it an be turned on and off when it returns to defaults Q COPY STATIC Push Button This is a latching function and applies to to all COPY and QUICK COPY functions which are performed using button push operations these are described in Chapter 7 If is selected any Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 59 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 suonduoseq jeoiuuoe 9 Jadeyo 6 3 Central Section Panels 6 60 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions copy operations will be limited to static se
255. drop all controls completely out of automation record Before pressing WRITE move the fader knob to a suitable part of the fader scale with good resolution This will become the null point around which TRIM fader moves can be trimmed at the moment WRITE is pressed The 0 position is recommended as a good reference point for trimming moves Any trimmed moves will add or subtract from the null point according to the fader scale Dropping out of TRIM functions in the same way as coming out of ABS mode Select at the SELECT TO FADERS panel to display fader gain settings in dBs on the electronic scribbles 7 5 10 To Trim Moves for a Number of Faders Put the desired Faders into ready trim locally by pressing the buttons by the faders and use either local WRITEs or GLOBAL DROP IN and GLOBAL DROP OUT to action the recording of moves 7 22 Chapter 7 Session Management The steps to save a mix are as previously described in Section 7 5 5 7 5 11 Automate a Pan Move or any other Knob XXXXX XK XX XX XK XX XX XK XX XX X our Assignable Pan knobs Pan knob Press for Switch Red Absolute LED Green Trim LED To enable a PAN to have its moves recorded first latch READY ABSOLUTE below the central LCD Then press the PAN knob and its red
256. dwidth of EQ curves Q IN Push Buttons Allow individual EQ sections to be switched in out amp LF amp HF Push Buttons Select shelving curves for high and low sections When LF or HF are in shelf mode their Q knobs control overshoot D A amp B Push Buttons Two complete EQ but not Filter settings may exist simultaneously The A and B buttons allow toggling between them for comparison purposes Push Buttons Select the functions for the EQ definable knob and button 8 Character Display Displays the function type selected using the buttons Definable Knob Used to adjust or further select options set according to the buttons IN Push button Switches in options set according to the buttons and the EQ definable knob Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 1 9 suonduoseg 1 9 suonduoseg 9 1 14 6 2 Channels Section Panels 205 6 2 6 Free Assign Area amp Dynamics Panel This Panel allows control of Dynamics and Delay functions and is designed such that future additional option processing elements may easily be accommodated FREE ASSIGN AREA 4 DYNAMICS THRESHLD FAST THR DYNAMICS HYSTRSTS f TIMING GATE 60 40 35 30 Soft 548 6 LOCAL
257. e 4 Data Entry Mode JOG TRIGGER Sets the sensitivity to movement for Jog mode 1 being the most sensitive and 100 being the least sensitive JOG SPEED Sets the ratio of Jog Wheel rotation against that of the machine for Jog mode The 1 setting gives the finest control and 15 is coarse CRAWL TRIGGER Sets the sensitivity to movement for Crawl mode 1 being the most sensitive and 20 being the least sensitive CRAWL SPEED Sets the ratio of Jog Wheel rotation against that of the machine for Crawl mode The 1 setting gives the finest control and 20 is coarse USE LOCATES FOR JOGGING Sets an alternative method for jogging remote machines In this mode the JOG SPEED preference is ignored and the JOG TRIGGER has an increased effect on the sensitivity of the Jog Wheel POINTER Tab INDEPENDENT TRACKERBALLS Sets the two Trackerballs to operate independently The left Trackerball controls the cursor or pointer in the 3 LCDs on the left of the console whilst the right controls the 3 LCDs on the right plus the central LCD Pressing under the central LCD will put its cursor control under the right Trackerball The left Trackerball cursor can be moved into the central LCD too but by manual control only This allows either or both Trackerballs to control the central LCD cursor If both Trackerballs are controlling the central LCD then the last one moved takes precedence TRACKERBALL SPEED Sets the gearing ratio o
258. e Any changes will not be actioned until the COMMIT softkey is pressed MACHINES column Click on the machine name or for a pop up of the machines available in the system set up Chapter 7 Session Management 7 61 jueujeBeue v uoisses 9 uoissas Ja deyo 7 6 The Session Management Screen Pages _____________________________ ________ ________________ ___________ __ STATUS column This uses a pop up to allow the selection of the status of machines as follows MASTER Selects a machine as the Timecode Master There can be only one Timecode Master so selecting MASTER and the COMMIT will take the Timecode Master status away from any other machine SLAVE Selects a machine as a Slave to the Timecode Master machine The remotes for this machine will follow whatever the Master does but will not be operative themselves INDEP Selects a machine to be Independent and fully operative ABSOLUTE TIMECODE The ABSOLUTE TIMECODE display indicates the timecode for its machine SYNC column If belonging to a Slave the Timecode Display shows 00 00 00 00 when locked or the difference between itself and the Master whilst becoming synchronised If the system is unable to synchronise this machine with the Master the timecode difference will be displayed The Sync Flag situated below the sync timecode readout for each machine displays the SYNC status i e LOCKED UNLOCKED
259. e 1 x Digital Link Card Module sexipueddy Up to 10 Device Card Modules such as ADCs DACs etc I O Module Inputs Outputs Con Type Notes Digital Link 1 MADI 1 MADI 2 BNC 75Q For Connection 1 Optical to SP Rack RS422 General Purpose Port 1 9P Dsub RS232 Diagnostic Port 1 9P Dsub Analogue In 4 MIC 4 Line 8 XLR 3 31 112 dB Mic amp Line inputs cannot be Dynamic Range used simultaneously Analogue In 8 MIC Line 8 XLR 3 31 107 dB Dynamic Range Analogue Out 4 Line 4 XLR 3 32 110 dB Dynamic Range Analogue Out 8 Line 8 XLR 3 32 104 dB Dynamic Range AES EBU In 4 Stereo 4 Stereo 4 XLR 3 31 AES EBU Out 4 Stereo 4 Stereo 4 XLR 3 32 SDIF 2 24 24 Mono 24 Mono 2 50P Dsub TC In Timecode Timecode 1 XLR 3 31 MIDI In Out 3 5P DIN 180 THRU CON Video Ref In 1 BNC 759 Multi Remote Control REC RDY tally READY 1 100P command GPI OPTO In Relay 25P Dsub Relay amp Opto photo coupler Closures 30V Max Relay 30mA Max A 1 6 Appendixes Connections connections may be made directly to the SP Rack without the need for I O Racks Inputs Outputs Con Type Notes MADI 56 56 2 BNC 75Q Connect 1 OPTICAL Directly to SP Rack Maximum I O Configurations Below are the maxima for each type of I O module type per system It should be noted however that the total number of audio connections whether analogue or digital should not exceed The Maximum of 448 In
260. e Channel Output signal post the Channel Pan to the the Main Bus according to the format selected for the Main Bus Stereo LCRS 5 1 or 7 1 Multitrack Send Faders The surround routing buttons are operational for Multitrack Sends if Stems have been set up In this case if is selected on the SELECT TO FADERS panel the surround routing buttons assign the Multitrack Send Fader Output signal post M T Pan to those Multitrack Busses according to the current Stem See elow When a surround routing button is selected the related track button one of 1 48 is selected automatically and also lights See Chapter 4 for details of Stem Set up The above applies only for Multitrack Surround modes and does not apply when the Multitrack Busses are set for stereo use Legend Illuminates if the format selected has mono rear surround ROUTE TO TRACKS Section 48 Push Buttons This matrix is used to select which M T busses are fed from channel M T output Group amp DIR Direct Push Buttons GRP fire up default sends the Group Mix Bus output to the Multitrack 1 MADI Output SP Link 2 Loop 0 for any routing button selected for the currently accessed channel DIR sends the direct M T Fader output signal to Multitrack 1 MADI Output Group Outputs 1 48 will continue to feed Multitrack 2 MADI Output SP Link 2 Loop 1 DIR selected on any channels from 49 96 will cause their direct M T Fader output signals to feed Mult
261. e button in the fader knob is then pressed automation data will be written Red Absolute LED This LED indicates the Absolute write record status of the fader Flashing indicates a record ready status and fully lit means that move data is being recorded Ready TRM Trim button Pressing the TRM button puts the fader into the ready trim status The TRM and ABS buttons inter cancel Green Trim LED This LED indicates the Trim write record status of the fader Flashing indicates a record ready state and fully lit means that any trimming move data will be recorded Bi colour fader CUT switch This switch illuminates red when the cut is implemented manually and amber if the cut is controlled by the automation system It is lit extra bright and amber if manual and automated cuts are performed simultaneously 7 64 Chapter 7 Session Management Motorised Fader controls 7 7 2 Automating Faders To automate moves on one Fader There are two ways to set data to be written for fader moves either by using the tactile button in the middle of the fader knob or in Touch Write mode where just touching the fader puts it into record A write ready state must be selected in both cases The first time that moves are recorded for a fader or any other object the system assumes automation data from the start to the finish of the title for that fader If the moves are over less than the full d
262. e channel path window displaying 8 This procedure may be used for each SEND bus allowing the source point to be from any junction within the channel signal path not just pre and post fader as with the majority of analogue consoles CH INPUT SENDS 1 24 Upper section of SENDS 1 24 panel in channels sections INPUT CHANNEL amp FILTER 2 B afe Ty CH OUTPUT 4 10 Chapter 4 Signal Paths SEND 1 pre fader headphones feed Global select Source for all channels First select the ACCESS button on the Main fader Then select the appropriate source point in the SOURCE display in the upper right section of the SENDS 1 24 panel using the and buttons Then press the button in the same section to set that source for all channels 4 8 SEND 1 Post Fader Headphones Feed To change the Pre Fader configuration to a Post Fader set up in the upper left SOURCE window of the SENDS 1 24 panel simply toggle the SOURCE window to CH OUTPUT which will cause the button to light Press and its light goes out confirming the new source point CH INPUT ROUTING
263. e lit un latch the slaves as required 6 2 2 Select to Faders Panel The following illustration shows the left Select to Faders Panel which is located immediately to the left of the centre section of the control surface The right hand Select to Faders Panel located immediately to the right of the centre section has a panel layout which is a mirror image of the one described here This Panel assigns fader banks to control desired signal paths The various push buttons allow assignment of signal paths to channel faders as per button designation and the previous Fader description Channel faders may be switched to control INPUT GAIN Gain of Mic M T and Line M T SEND Level sent to M T bus GROUP TRIM Gain of M T Bus Output to M T Channel MONITOR Level Sent to Independent Monitor Bus CHANNEL Channel Level Sent to Main Output Busses SUPER SGs Levels Sent to Super Send Group Outputs SENDS Levels Sent to Effects amp Foldback Outputs SUB LEVEL Levels Sent to the Sub Bus in Multi Format Mode Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 9 suonduoseg 1 9 saideyo suonduoseg 9 6 2 Channels Section Panels pam adr eee eee
264. e period that READY ABSOLUTE is latched 7 14 Chapter 7 Session Management Latch READY ABSOLUTE and press any cuts to be automated and they will flash to show that they are enabled When READY ABSOLUTE is pressed again de selecting it the enabled cuts return to their previous states Rolling the tape causes READY ABSOLUTE to be de selected automatically OQ READY TRIM Push Button works in the same way as READY ABSOLUTE It allows cuts to be set up such that existing cuts can be modified or additional cuts created without overwriting previous cuts Q READY CANCEL Push Button READY CANCEL takes all controls out of the ready state and returns them to a safe mode GLOBAL DROP IN Key GLOBAL DROP IN puts the cuts which are set up ready into write and can be actioned either before the tape is rolling or while it is rolling Once GLOBAL DROP IN is selected the cuts can be actioned whilst the tape is rolling To revise any cuts roll the tape back and play again The cuts will be replayed and none will be overwritten until GLOBAL DROP IN is pressed once more Alternatively an individual switch will drop into automation record at the moment it is pressed changing its state at the same time The state of a switch can be retained when dropping in using READY ABSOLUTE by holding its button whilst pressing the switch OQGLOBALDROP OUTKey GLOBAL DROP OUT causes a
265. e to Digital Converter Audio Engineering Society After Fader Listen Audio Tape Recorder Auxiliary Calibrated or Calibration Channel Common Mode Rejection Ratio Control Room Digital to Analogue Converter Digital Audio Tape Divergence Dynamics European Broadcasting Union Edit Decision List Equaliser or Equalisation External Filter Sampling Frequency Global Delay Compensation General Purpose Interface Graphical User Interface High Frequency Higher Mid Frequency Hardware Input Output Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diode Low Frequency Lower Mid Frequency Left Right Loudspeaker Mid Frequency Microphone Magneto Optical disk Monitor Multitrack Meter 8 Glossary of Terms Multi Channel Audio Digital Interface Musical Instrument Digital Interface O B O L PAN PCB PCM PFL PSU RSL S C SDDS SDIF SEL SIG SM SMPTE SMS SP SPL SRC SSG STER SUR S W T B TC TCF TFT T LIST TRM UPS VCA VDU VGA Outside Broadcast Overload Panoramic Printed Circuit Board Pulse Code Modulation Pre Fader Listen Power Supply Unit Return Remote Studio Link Side Chain Sony Dynamic Digital Sound Sony Digital Interface Format Select Signal Session Management Society of Motion Picture amp Television Engineers Session Management System Signal Processing Sound Pressure Level Sample Rate Converter Super Send Group Stereo Surround Software Talkback
266. e to adjust or type in a new timecode 7 87 Chapter 7 Session Management juewebeueyy uoisses 9 uoissas 1 1 7 8 Offline Automation Using DURATION mode for New Cut Data Use the following procedure to enter new cut data against a specified duration Select the Cut type Click on DURATION and then select the cut type in the upper left hand selector block Set the Duration Click DURATION in the upper left selector to set the duration This procedure is described at the beginning of this section since it applies to both faders and cuts Set cuts and uncuts Click on the channels of interest They cycle through 3 states RED Cut for the duration WHITE Uncut for the duration BLUE No change for the duration Any underlying data within the duration will be overwritten When the cuts are displaying the desired cut statuses reflected by the colour coding click on COMMIT to confirm the edit 7 88 Chapter 7 Session Management Command Dialogue At the base of the screen the User Command Dialogue Line bar displays commands from the dedicated Control Keyboard and QWERTY Keyboard for confirmation before Menu options Menu options available using the softkey functions displayed at the foot of the Offline screen page are as follows A Selects the previous screen page SYSTEM Selects the System screen page directly PROJECTS Selects the Artists Pr
267. e with the largest Side Chain Control Signal will accurately control all the rest It is often useful to Copy or Link the front panel controls of the channels using the Dynamics Side Chain Link Right function see 7 6 8 in Chapter 7 4 1 8 Chapter 4 Signal Paths Dynamics Side Chain Link Right set up procedure The buttons for this operation are located in the Free Assign Area amp Dynamics panel They are the assignable buttons just left of centre in the upper section of this panel Their function is indicated by individual 8 character displays one positioned to the left of each button see Chapter 6 section 6 2 6 There are two 8 character displays which relate to this function and the fire up default is LOCAL in both The upper display indicates the destination for the Side Chain Signal generated by the current channel The lower display indicates the source for the Side Chain Signal for the current channel Set up procedure 1 The middle button sets where the Side Chain Control Signal is sent The default is LOCAL i e to its own channel Step through the options with this button and set it at SC TO RT This setting sends its Side Chain Control Signal to the next channel to the right 2 The lower button sets where the Side Chain Control Signal is taken from The default is LOCAL i e from its own channel Step through the options with this button and set it at SC FM RT With this setting the current channel takes its Side Chain Cont
268. ect them all They can also be selected individually from either starting point The example shows that PATH DYNAMICS EQ CHAN Fader and its CUT have been highlighted Chapter 7 Session Management 7 41 juewebeueyy uoisses Jejdeu uoissas Ja deyo 7 6 The Session Management Screen Pages ADD LAYER NEW LAYER 1 0 p eur ean 0 MASSEN INSERT SENDS rese wi NISC wr Pa seus lo merous f meme f CEN MISC SOURCE CHANNELS gd ts 15 1 171181191 20 21 22 25 26 27 o 231 so 51 22 ARTIST PROJECT JOHN s TITLE BLAH BLAH OK YAH MIX SNAP WORKING MIX v1 100 00 01 31 08 100 00 02 03 15 v m ersten fees MERGE ASSEMBLE ADD LAYER pop up CHS must be highlighted in the upper left SOURCE box for a selection of channels and CEN for any centre section components 8 Once the selection process is complete click on OK or press on the Control Keyboard and this new layer will be added to the MERGE ASSEMBLE screen 9 To edit the layer click on it for its ADD LAYER pop up and adjust as necessary SOURCE CHANNELS Selector Channels can be selected individually by clicking on appropriate numbers to highlight them or click on ALL and then de select individual channels if more convenient
269. ection For stereo panning at least one odd and one even track must be selected in the Multitrack routing section L R PAN Knob Allows left right panning QD Definable Knob Works in conjunction with the front back the surround left right and divergence panning if a multi format mode has been selected Back Front Push Button Assigns the definable knob to back front panning D SUR L R Push Button Assigns definable knob to rear surround left right panning DIV Push Button Assigns the definable knob to control of divergence ACCESS Push Button Not operational in this version Allows process elements in the multitrack signal path to be accessed Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 27 suonduoseg jeoiuuoe 9 saideyo suonduoseg 9 9 1 14 5 6 2 Channels Section Panels adum 2 6 2 8 Routing Panel The Routing panels allow signals to be routed to Multitrack busses the Main Output Bus and the Super Send Groups Multi Format routing and its monitor are also set using this panel
270. ed in order to eject an M O disk in a removable drive Backup buttons in the GUI There are three buttons to the left of each row Upper Icon This Icon indicates the direction of the data flow either to the Internal Removable or Network drive depending on which drives have been selected in each row Clicking on the Icon will action the Backup or Copy transaction Middle button Click on this for a pop up allowing the selection of INT ernal REM ovable or NET work drives Click on one and its files are displayed accordingly Lower button The function of this button changes according to the drive selected using the middle button Internal drive ALL Removable FORMAT ALL button Clicking on ALL causes a Backup to be made of the files on the Internal drive FORMAT button Click on FORMAT to Format the M O disk in the Removable drive 1 The ALL operation replaces all data on the Removable drive 2 The FORMAT operation erases all data Any files on the will be lost warning is given which requires confirmation DELETE The Delete function for Projects and Titles is operable for the M O drive only BACKUPS es rac PROJECT 1 IN MY LIFE PROJECT 2 FOLLOW MY DREAMS 5 588 TOO SOON TO KNOW GONNA BE ALL RIGHT AT LAST FIRST TIME LOVE Project 12 restored Pau 2 Project 13 restored Earr Project 14 restored syst Project 15
271. ed or added to 6 Their green LEDs will flash to indicate their ready status 7 To set a bank of 24 cuts into ready status press and hold CHS 1 24 for example until it turns amber and then press any or SELECT gt 4 P TOUCH TOUCH WRITE HOLD g S AUTO TO TAKE END ISOL READY READY READY ABSOLUTE TRIM CANCEL 50 A00 BUTT RAMP ON ROLL AUD BACKI 4 GLOBAL GLOBAL DROP IN ALL 5 QO WO OO CANCEL REPEAT JOGOO MOQO OO Automation master keys To set up Cuts for automation using the central master keys READY ABSOLUTE Push Button This latching button allows the user to set cuts into an automation ready state where new cuts can be written which will overwrite previous data If any cuts were already lit their lights will go out for the set up during th
272. ee ennt tenant 7 13 05929 TO Save 7 19 7 5 6 To Automate Fader MOVES eese 7 20 7 5 7 Dropping Out of Write on Subsequent Mix Passes 7 21 7 5 8 To Record Absolute Moves for a Number of Faders 7 22 7 5 9 To Trim Fader MOVES sss 7 22 7 5 10 To Trim Moves for a Number of Faders 7 22 7 5 11 To Automate a Pan Move or any other Knob 7 23 723312 To Assemble 7 24 Table of Contents 3 Table of Contents SS ee ees Chapter 7 7 6 The Session Management Screen Pages 7 21 Session Management 7 6 1 Start up Logo Screen 7 27 7 6 2 THE System Sereen suri reeeo aiir dont 7 28 7 6 3 The Machines Screen cccccccessssecessseeecesseeeceeseeeeesseeeeees 7 30 7 6 4 Artists Projects amp Titles Screen sss 7 32 7 6 5 Mixes amp Cues Screen 7 35 7 6 6 Merge Assemble Screen sese 7 40 7 6 7 Track Lists 7 46 7 6 8 Snapshots Copy amp Link Screen 7 49 7 6 9 Copy Channel Fader Balance to M T Faders and M T to Channels deb n t oot Hee Fred 7 60 7 6 10 Copy Monitor and M T Send Fader Balance to Cues 7 60 7 6 11 Quick Copy EQ A to B and B 7 60 7
273. eed its Side Chain Control Signal to any one of four Side Chain Busses Any channel can also take its Side Chain Control Signal from any one of the four Side Chain Busses There is no limit to the number of channels accessing the Side Chain Busses For a given set of channels linked to an individual Side Chain Bus the channel generating the largest Control Signal will accurately control the rest of the channels 4 20 Chapter 4 Signal Paths Dynamics Side Chain Bus operation The buttons for this operation are located in the Free Assign Area amp Dynamics panel They are the assignable buttons just left of centre in the upper section of this panel Their function is indicated by individual 8 character displays one positioned to the left of each button see Chapter 6 section 6 2 6 There are two 8 character displays which relate to this function and the fire up default is LOCAL in both The upper display indicates the destination for the Side Chain Signal generated by the current channel The lower display indicates the source for the Side Chain Signal for the current channel For example a display indicating SC TO G1 means that the Side Chain Signal is being fed to Side Chain Bus 1 SC TO G2 means that the Side Chain Signal is being fed to Side Chain Bus 2 SC FM G4 means that the Side Chain Signal is being received from Side Chain Bus 4 Dynamics Side Chain Bus set up procedure The following example will send the Side Chain Signal to
274. een page Appendixes A 19 Ancillary push button block lower 6 58 60 Ancillary push button block upper 6 55 57 Artists projects amp titles screen 7 32 34 Assignable channel processing 3 9 Assignable panels 3 3 3 4 5 Automation off 7 79 Backups screen 7 95 backup restore amp copy operations 7 97 98 backup restore amp copy procedure 7 99 100 layout overview 7 96 Basic console operations to bounce tracks 3 28 to equalise monitor signal post multitrack 3 25 to equalise signal feeding the multitrack 3 24 to insert dynamics post multitrack return 3 27 to insert dynamics pre multitrack send 3 26 to link compressor side chains in a group 3 31 to link compressor side chains so that one channel controls a second channel 3 32 to monitor signals to and from tape 3 22 to route a mic or line input to the main output bus 3 19 to send signals to tracks on tape 3 21 to set up a de esser using dynamics side chain EQ 3 30 to set up a stereo headphone mix 3 23 to set up a super send group from channel inputs 3 20 to set up super send groups from multitrack 3 29 Bounce push button 3 12 C Central section faders 6 86 control groups and slaves 6 86 nested control groups 6 86 Central section panels 6 38 61 Channel metering channel meter default 4 15 channel meters to input 4 15 multi in channel path 4 17 return monitor 4 16 send monitor 4 16 Channel screens 5 5 channel inserts 5 20 dynamics GUI 5 29 equaliser amp
275. el Outputs for the channels affected by the loading of a Snapshot or Mix MUTE CH MTSENDS ON LOAD Mutes the Channel Multitrack Sends for the channels affected by the loading of a Snapshot or Mix MUTE CHAN INPUTS ON LOAD Mutes the Channel Inputs for the channels affected by the loading of a Snapshot or Mix Chapter 7 Session Management 7 1 03 jueujeBeue v uoisses Jeydeu 5 9 7 11 Preferences a Ee 7 104 Chapter 7 Session Management MUTE CHAN SENDS ON LOAD Mutes the Channel Sends for the channels affected by the loading of a Snapshot or Mix MUTE ON FULL LOADS Mutes Channel Outputs Multitrack Sends Inputs and Sends for all channels during the loading of a full Snapshot or Mix according to the individual options selected above TO TOP ON DROP IN With the TO TOP button on any controls dropped in to automation write in Abs or Trim will have their settings propagated to the Start Time or top of the Title from the point of drop in Selecting NO for this option will cause settings to be propagated from the point of dropping out JOG Tab ROTATIONAL SENSE Sets the rotational direction of Jog Wheel 0 suitable for digital machines 1 analogue tape machines where it follows the direction of tape spools DEFAULT MODE Sets the mode for the Jog Wheel when the system is booted 0 Off 1 Jog Mode 2 Crawl Mode 3 Shuttle Mod
276. elate to the current title RHYTHM INTRO GUITAR INTRO KIT INTRO VOX HARMONY INTRO LEAD VOX INTRO RHYTHM INTRO STRINGS KEYS UP TO KEY CHANGE LEAD VOX RHYTHM SAX SOLO BACK VOX LEAD VOX FINE TUNE RHYTHM FINE TUNE 1 2 3 4 5 B 7 8 g 10 MIDDLE 8 12 SAX SOLO VERSE 13 KEY CHANGE tm vote eno senso Racks screen MIXES amp CUES PRE ROLL 2 TITLE BLAH BLAH OK YAH MX PARKED MIXES 13 54 27 May 1999 CUES TIME 1 START OF TITLE 00 00 54 21 3 GUITAR INTRO 00 01 09 13 4 00 01 13 02 5 VOX INTRO 00 01 23 02 6 VERSE 1 00 01 31 08 CHORUS 1 00 02 03 15 8 VERSE 2 3 CHORUS 2 00 02 26 22 00 02 58 03 00 03 21 07 00 03 51 24 00 04 23 01 MIXES amp CUES screen TITLE and MIX bar Displays the name of the current Title and current Mix Machine status bar Situated to the right of the TITLE and MIX bar this field indicates the current operational status of the timecode master machine e g PLAYING FAST WIND FAST REWIND STOPPED PARKED RAMP TIME bar Relates to the RAMP button beneath the central LCD This banner shows the Ramp Time currently set for faders to slew to previous levels when joining editing mixes or dropping out of automation record when current and previous fader levels do not match To set the Ramp Time highlight the field then click on or press on the Control Keyboard It ma
277. els a 2 6 56 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 2 Adjust the definable knob to change the delay factor for all channels The delay is displayed in ms or samples Use and buttons either side of the display to change the parameter type The knob normally operates in a fine tune mode Press and hold the knob whilst turning it for coarse adjustments 3 To isolate individual channels from the Global Delay adjustment select SET GLOBAL DELAY but before making any adjustments press the buttons on the individual channels Those channels will remain at their current Global Delay setting 4 De select ACCESS buttons and select others if necessary or release SET GLOBAL DELAY to return to normal operations To reset Global Delay select SET GLOBAL DELAY and then press and hold the buttons either side of the display above the definable knob for at least 2 seconds Channel Delay Channels have local Delay control allowing offsets from Global Delay To adjust the local Delay 5 Select for the channel to be adjusted Select at the FREE ASSIGN AREA amp DYNAMICS panel 6 Adjust the knob labelled GLOBAL DELAY at the right hand side of the panel The offset value will be displayed whilst the knob is adjusted and for a few seconds after its release For continuous display of the offset value click on ALWAYS on the GDC DISPLAY option in the PREFS GUI see Chapter 5 for details MIN
278. em 2 The BACKUPS softkey is available on the System screen Artists Projects amp Titles screen Assemble screen Offline Automation screen Global screen and Preferences screen Select to implement system backup functions 3 Softkeys shown blank on the Logo screen diagram are not used SCREEN SOFTKEYS AND DESTINATIONS LOGO TOP SYSTEM PROJECTS MACHINES MIXES ASSEMBLE TRACKS SNAPSHOT OFFLINE SYSTEM PROJECTS SCREEN PROJECTS MIXES MACHINES REMOTES BACKUPS SCREEN 5 amp OH SYSTEM MIXES SNAPSHOT REMOTES TRACKS BACKUPS SCREEN 6 3e PREV SCRN SYSTEM PROJECTS MIXES SNAPSHOT TRACKS REMOTES SCREEN 4 PREV SCRN 8 10 gt SYSTEM PROJECTS ASSEMBLE TRACKS OFFLINE SCREEN 4 PREV SCRN 8 SYSTEM PROJECTS MIXES OFFLINE BACKUPS SCREEN 1 PREV SCRN OQS 6 6 Se uf SYSTEM PROJECTS MIXES SNAPSHOT MACHINES REMOTES SCREEN PREV SCRN 8 10
279. en This type of layer consists of dynamic data from other mixes from anywhere except the Working Mix In other words mix data from other mixes in the SAVE current or any other Title It is specified using the ADDL oan GUL Click on NA dit 5 SAVE MIX or SAVE MIX AS NEW on the Control Keyboard will collapse all layers into a single entity 7 26 Chapter 7 Session Management 7 6 The Session Management Screen Pages 7 6 1 The Start up Logo Screen When the system is booted the OXF R3 logo screen is displayed once the start up processes are completed gt Syste leo mes OXF R3 LOGO with SCREEN pop up General At the lower part of the screen note the User Command Dialogue Line bar which displays commands from the dedicated Control Keyboard and QWERTY Keyboard before entry Use the softkey functions at the base of this screen to select one of three menu options SYSTEM softkey Press this softkey to access the SYSTEM screen page on the Session Management Screens giving access to system set up and peripheral function options PROJECTS Softkey Press this softkey to select the ARTISTS PROJECTS amp TITLES page and all other mixing functions SCREEN Softkey Press this softkey to access a pop up as shown displaying all available screen selections Click on any one to select it or alterna
280. end Outputs and Multi Format Panel eese 6 76 6 3 5 Central Section Faders sse 6 86 6 3 6 Control LCD Screen 6 87 6 3 7 QWERTY Keyboard essere 6 88 6 358 Trackerballs E etn e EE eee 6 89 y Faradilidulitu cL 6 90 6 4 1 Mono Channel Meters 0 ccccccccccessesscecececeessneceeeeeeeees 6 90 6 4 2 Stereo Centre Section 6 92 6 4 3 Other Meter Bridge Indicators 6 95 Signal Processing RacK ccssssccsssscsssscsssscssssssssssessescssesessees 6 96 6 5 1 SP 6 96 I O 6 97 ce I R 7 2 Files Hierarchy and Automatable Controls 7 3 4 2 Piles eer tt eee beet e es 7 3 7 2 2 Automatable Controls sse 7 6 File Data Storage sisssccsissssscsccssssscsscessencsssncsesssosdocssssescousesseessescsesesas 7 7 Programme 7 8 Mixing OV erylew nao er kae ee baee ea poo ER Coon o Fea San 7 9 7 9 1 Getting Started soto madent edens 7 9 7 5 2 Name the Artist Project and Title 7 10 725 3 Cue Points oret retreat 7 11 7 5 4 Automate Cuts esee es
281. ent Artist Project either by moving the cursor with a Trackerball and clicking or by nudging the highlight using the cursor keys 7 32 Chapter 7 Session Management To enter anew Artist Project Click on NEW or PROJECT ENTER on the Control Keyboard for a pop up to name a new Artist Project Type in a name using the QWERTY keyboard and press or click on OK or OK without a name will enter the next default number To edit the name of an Artist Project Move the highlight to that entry and click or press on the Control Keyboard to display a pop up dialogue box Type in a name using the QWERTY keyboard and press or click on OK To re order an Artist Project entry Click on its number in the left hand column for a pop up Overwrite the current number using the numeric pad on the Control Keyboard and press or click on OK The list will re order itself Entering Notes for an Artist Project Click on the right hand column or highlight and press on the Control Keyboard for the NOTES pop up related to the Artist Project on the same line Use the QWERTY Keyboard to enter notes and press or click on OK The icon appears only if there is a Notes entry TITLES field This field displays all Titles under the currently selected Artist Project The Start and End times for each Title represent the periods for which automation data will be stored The times can be adjusted to increase or decrease the time periods at any time To
282. eously to clear the bus assignment for the C channel 4 34 Chapter 4 Signal Paths Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 35 4 13 Multi Stem Set up 4 13 2 Multi Stem Monitor Path The channels which relate to the multitrack busses in stems need to be set up as the monitor path for each stem eo uw co z lt gt Chapter 4 Signal Paths Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 36 1 push buttons relating to the Multi Stem multitrack busses will be selected automatically during the master set up In Multi Format Mode the SEND and buttons for channels assigned as Stem masters inter cancel 2 Select ACCESS for each Stem Master channel in turn 3 Step through the options in box 8 for each stem channel on the Input Channel amp Inserts panel until MULTI is shown in the 8 character display Select its IN button This will ensure that any processing inserted
283. er Fader Panel sese 6 38 6 3 2 Monitor 6 39 6 3 3 Control Keyboard Panel sese 6 62 6 3 4 Super Send Groups Send Outputs and Multi Format 6 76 6 3 5 Central Section Faders sse 6 86 6 3 6 Control LCD Screen Panel sse 6 87 6 3 7 QWERTY 6 88 6 3 8 Trackerballs ineeie teier mie ei a ai ae e iias 6 89 6 4 Meter Bridge 6 90 6 4 1 Mono Channel 6 90 6 4 2 Stereo Centre Section 6 92 6 4 3 Other Meter Bridge Indicators 6 95 6 5 Signal Processing Rack sscssccsssscsssccssccssssscscscesseesseesseessseeees 6 96 6 5 1 SP Rack Modules enne 6 96 GO 6 97 6 6 1 Rack Modules 6 97 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 1 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 6 1 OXF R3 System Description The OXF R3 digital audio mixing console comprises four main elements Control Console with Modular Control Surface Host Computer Signal Processing SP Rack Digital and Analogue I O Rack s
284. ers GUI eee 5 28 5 2 4 Dynamics GUI eee A 5 29 59 259 Preferences eti ere Idein 5 30 5 2 6 Master GUI Includes Main Bus Outputs 5 39 6 1 OXF R3 System Description eee eee ee ee eere eerte eene een nue 6 2 6 1 1 Control Surface Configurations sese 6 3 6 2 Channels Section Panels e eeeeee eese e esee ee eren eene enata aseo aes 6 6 6 2 T Fadet Panel s cs tese an eee 6 6 6 2 2 Select to Faders Panel essen 6 9 6 2 3 Pans Panel tenet RR EP 6 13 6 2 4 Select to Pans Panel epis 6 15 6 2 5 Input and Equaliser Panel esses 6 17 6 2 6 Free Assign Area amp Dynamics Panel 6 20 6 2 7 Multitrack Panel teme Pepe ends 6 25 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions Chapter 7 Session Management Continued 6 3 6 4 6 6 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 6 2 8 Routing Panel iue nice upper 6 28 6 2 9 LCD Channel Screen Panel 6 31 6 2 10 Sends 1 24 Panel 6 32 Central Section Pamels cccccesscssssssssscssssccessssssscsssessssscsseces 6 38 6 3 1 Master Fader Panel essere 6 38 6 3 2 Monitor niece ettet gas sate pe Hie Rat 6 39 6 3 3 Control Keyboard Panel sese 6 62 6 3 4 Super Send Groups S
285. estination are the same drive File names New projects and titles may be created by clicking on the relevant NEW button This may be necessary to copy a Mix or Snapshot into a Project but not have placed in a current Titles Whenever a files operation occurs a new item of the correct type is created Individual files can never be deleted or overwritten using the BACKUPS GUI For example a Backup of My Project could be named Project backup of My Project In other words the backup has a new name with the original name in The 18 a unique number which has been assigned automatically The words in the will be set according to the operation involved i e backup of XXXX for a backup operation Chapter 7 Session Management 7 97 juewebeueyy uoisses 9 5 9 7 10 Backups 7 98 Chapter 7 Session Management restored XX XX for a restore operation copy of XX XX for a copy operation If Project 12 backup of My Project is restored it is likely to be restored with another unique number e g Project 17 restored My Project The important point here is that no files can be overwritten and the original name is always there After any Backup file operation a pop up will appear and confirm successful completion DRIVES Click on DRIVES upper left for a pop up displaying the status of the drives within the system This pop up must be select
286. etained when the wheel is released To stop the tape either rotate the wheel in the reverse direction and return to the null point or press the transport key which will redefine the null point to the current position Data Adjustments may be made to numerical values such as timecode according to the placement of the orange highlight in the central LCD screen This function applies to any pop ups where numerical values can be set such as timecode and dBs Off Jog function not operational Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 63 eoiuuoe 9 suonduoseq jeoiuuoe 9 Jadeyo 6 3 Central Section Panels a a 6 64 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions CONTROL KEYBOARD Command Lines Command Lines sequences of commands always require as the last keystroke of the sequence e g PLAY MIX ENTER The boxed upper case words such as PLAY and MIX refer to the legends printed on the dedicated keys There are exceptions which do not require ENTER to action commands or functions the Function Keys when they have macros stored which include ENTER the NOW and JOG keys Function Keys Frequently used Command Lines may be stored on Function Keys for fast access To store a Command Line perform the sequence of keystrokes then Press SET F KEY F1 This action stores the sequence under Function Key F1 overwriting any sequence stored
287. extere Figure MASTER GUI MAIN OUTPUT BUS output pop up Whilst the following describes selecting destinations and inserts for the MAIN BUS the methods of operation apply to all pages related to the MASTER GUI General The clickable fields in the Main Output GUI laid out in the form of a set of Surround LS The upper section contains a single set of Inserts which affect all four outputs OUTPUT FORMAT MAIN OUTPUT 1 upper section The 8 fields labelled etc allow the selection of I O destinations forthe Main Output 1 Eight fields are displayed in the illustration butthe numberdisplayed depends upon thecurrent format for the Main Output Bus Click on any of these fields to display the pop up as shownin Figure A which lists analogue outputs Click on one ofthem to selectitorclick on AES forthe list of digital destinations OUTPUT FORMAT MAIN OUTPUT 1 lower left The 4 buttons labelled 8 6 4 and 2 inter cancel allowing the setting of the format for the output 7 1 5 1 LCRS or Stereo respectively A Fold down Matrix derives signals for formats with fewer outputs than the Main Bus WORD LENGTH MAIN OUTPUT 1 lower middle left This fieldis displaying ANALOGUE in theillustration since analogue 5 40 Chapter 5 Control Screens SS __ Ton f 5525 seos fscmmeresi s extere j monmoash J o Figure MASTER GUI MAIN OUTPUT BUS scribble pop up
288. eyboard Then click on OK or press Every time the switch is pressed the MIDI values displayed will be transmitted provided Enabled is set in the sixth field PARAMETER Fifth field Displays a second Parameter depending on which COMMAND type has been selected Click on for a pop up to select a new Parameter Click on a suitable entry in the pop up or click on NEW ENTRY to type in a value using the QWERTY Keyboard Then click on OK or press Every time the switch is pressed the MIDI values displayed will be transmitted provided Enabled is set in the sixth field ENABLED DISABLED Sixth field left Click on to Enable or Disable MIDI control from the associated switch LATCH MOMENTARY Sixth field right The default operation of the switches is a Momentary action when MIDI data is transmitted as the switch is pressed Selecting Latch will cause NOTE ON to be transmitted on the downward push The button will stay lit when released When pressed again and released NOTE OFF will be transmitted on the upward release action SCRIBBLE Click on for a pop up to enter an appropriate electronic scribble name which will appear on the display to the side of the associated switch Either click on a name in the list or click on NEW ENTRY and then use the QWERTY keyboard to type in a new name of up to 6 characters Then click on OK or press 7 92 Chapter 7 Session Management 7 9 3 MIDI Bars amp Beats SYSTEM
289. f the Trackerball movement to cursor movement 1 being the slowest and 8 the fastest DIAGS Tab PRINT TIMECODE WARNINGS TO GUI Displays Timecode error messages such as drop outs on the centre LCD SHOW TIMECODE GLITCHES Displays non contiguous or jumps in Timecode Chapter 7 Session Management 7 1 05 jueujeBeue v uoisses Jeydeu 5 9 7 11 Preferences NETWORK Tab The NETWORK function allows other R3 systems which are on the same computer network to be assigned as remote drives that can be accessed via the Backups GUI This allows data in the form of Projects and or associated lower level data such as Titles Mixes and Snapshots to be copied from an external system PREFERENCES NETWORK CURRENT NETWORK DRIVE Oxford REMOTE FILE SYSTEM Oxford sm NETWORK DRIVE REMOTE FILE SYSTEM A STUDIO 3 NETWORK DRIVE STUDIO3 sm LIVE STAGE NETWORK DRIVE LIVESTAGE sm MAP DRIVE DELETE ENTRY NEW ENTRY Sa oes Trenes NETWORK ADMINISTRATION screen Setting up a NETWORK DRIVE Each networked drive requires a suitable name along with the name of the host computer relating to the network itself 1 Click on NEW ENTRY for a pop up to enter a suitably familiar name relating to the remote system Type it in using the QWERTY Keyboard and then click on OK or ENTER 2 Move the orange highlight in the same row to the REMOTE FILE S
290. format for the M T Bus is displayed STEREO LCRS 5 1 or 7 1 A stem reference one of A H will also be included if surround is in operation 4 32 Chapter 4 Signal Paths 1 push button is normally lit indicating that the set up is locked Press to unlock indicated by the light going off This button will time out back to lock status 10 seconds after the last button press A Config Set up option enables the LOCK button as a level of security i e it must be unlocked to allow bus assignment set up 2 While the system is unlocked press the SET MAIN WIDTH button to check that the Main Bus width matches requirements if not already displayed 3 If it does not while the system is unlocked use the or button to step through the formats STEREO LCRS 5 1 and 7 1 until the desired format is displayed by the 8 character display above the push button 4 While the system is unlocked press the SET MT STEMS button 5 While the system is unlocked use the or button to step through the formats STEREO LCRS 5 1 and 7 1 until the desired type is displayed by the 8 character display above the push button An A will be displayed initially to the right along with each format type indicating that the settings displayed are for Stem A If the system has already been in use then other letters B H may be displayed depending on how the system was left To select another Stem make sure that LOCK is lit by
291. from M T as monitor source May be controlled from tape remote master RET push button see section 6 3 3 If the associated track is in Record the monitoring system switches over to the Send signal automatically even though RET is selected If both SEND and RET are selected then a mix of both send and return signals becomes the M T monitor source Definable Knob May be defined to have any gain or pan function depending on what is selected on the SELECT TO PANS panel Dot Character Display When SHOW VALUE is selected the Pan angle of displacement is indicated in degrees When the knobs are defined as gain controls the gain value is indicated in dBs ACCESS Push Button Selects the assignable channel area to its associated Channel Using Keyboard Entry to Record Arm Tracks Press at the appropriate machine remotes in the master section Then use the QWERTY Keyboard Specify Channels as Below Channels ranges are specified with as a separator 1 32 Channels 1 32 e Individual items are separated by 2 4 25 Channels 2 4 and 25 Unlimited strings are possible in the same entry e g 1 3 5 08 12 42 Channels 1 3 5 8 and 12 42 Press RECORD 0 ENTER to disarm all the tracks that are armed 6 2 4 Select to Pans Panel This panel allows assignment of functions to the PAN panels adjacent to it The default and primary setting is PAN The options are as follows SELE
292. g appears once more If the SAVE MIX ENTER procedure is followed again the new data will overwrite the previous mix in the same manner as the SAVE function works on a normal word processor Use AS NEW ENTER instead to avoid overwriting the previous mix The name pop up will appear as before When a mix is saved so are the static settings of the complete console If the mix is recalled at a later date everything will be completely reset to previous static positions apart from controls which were automated They will assume their settings according to timecode If an attempt is made to load another mix whilst the DYNAMIC LAYER flag is displayed the user will be prompted to save the current mix data via a pop up This will be indicated in the MIXES list as Working Mix Saved with the next default number Enter a name instead if desired The automation can be turned off during mixing using the command MAKE STATIC ENTER on the Control Keyboard A dialogue box will warn that dynamic moves will be lost In this case STATIC MIX will be saved with the next default number From this point all controls will behave as if no mix has been recorded e g faders will not snap back This function is very useful for making a fresh start on a mix with a new starting balance To go back later to a previous mix move the highlight to it and select LOAD MIX ENTER on the Control Keyboard If unsaved data exists a
293. g are maximums SP LINK 1 General purpose for connections to inputs and outputs Analogue Inputs ADC 1 to ADC 200 Analogue Outputs DAC 1 to DAC 200 Digital Inputs AES 1 to AES 32 amp AES 65 to AES 200 Digital Outputs AES 1 to AES 32 AES 65 TO AES 80 SP LINK 2 T O for connections to multitrack machines MADI Inputs MT1 1 to MT1 48 amp MT2 1 to MT2 48 MD1 49 to MD1 56 amp MD2 49 to MD2 56 MADI Outputs MT1 1 to MT1 48 amp MT2 1 to MT2 48 SP LINK 3 Forconnection specifically to Insert devices Analogue Inputs ADC 1 to ADC 200 Analogue Outputs DAC 1 to DAC 200 Digital Inputs AES 33 to AES 64 amp AES 81 to AES 200 Digital Outputs AES 33 to AES 64 SP LINK 0 General purpose forconnections to inputs and outputs Analogue Inputs ADC 201 to ADC 312 Analogue Outputs DAC 201 to DAC 312 Digital Inputs AES 201 to AES 312 Digital Outputs None 5 12 Chapter 5 Control Screens Indication of inputs and outputs already in use The I O is assigned using the GUIs illustrated on the following pages Various pop ups are used to display sources and destinations Objects already in use will be indicated by xxx For example if ADC10 is in use it will be indicated as ADC10 Printing GUI pages All GUIs displayed on the channel LCDs can be printed one ata time using the following procedure Select the PREF page on one of the LCDs It does not have to be the LCD displ
294. ged in a window is displayed on the monitor of the Host 11 12 13 14 Computer Use the mouse to move the cursor into this window entitled STIF Note that the window surround changes colour from green to red to indicate that this is now the active window Check that the console LCD screens are all displaying X before proceeding then Type run r3 case sensitive then press RETURN Observe that the centre LCD screen in the console displays a summary of the processes being executed by the Host Computer which are displayed in greater detail on the monitor When the loading of the Netlist is complete the centre screen of the console displays the OXF R3 logo Switch on is now complete but wait until all controls on the control panel are initialised indicated by their lighting up before operating the system Chapter 2 Powering the OXF R3 2 3 H JXO eu 19 H JXO 2 19 2 2 OXF R3 Shutdown CAUTION Turn off or mute all monitor amplifiers connected to the OXF R3 Unless the OXF R3 is to remain switched off for a prolonged period it will be more convenient to leave the Clock Synchronisation source running 2 2 1 Shutdown Procedure 2 4 Chapter 2 Powering the OXF R3 1 Atthe centre LCD screen on the OXF R3 control surface use the appropriate softkey to select SYSTEM If necessary retrace a number of steps through the scree
295. gends Indicate an overload pre the fader for the bus feeding the left column of the meter or light simultaneously with the OVER legend at the top of the meter if the source does not relate to a bus O L R Legends Indicate an overload pre the fader for the bus feeding the right column of the meter or light simultaneously with the OVER legend at the top of the meter if the source does not relate to a bus Legends Indicate an overload pre the fader for the busses feeding both the left and right columns of the meter or light simultaneously with the OVER legend at the top of the meter if the sources do not relate to busses G Legend Not operational in this version E Legend Not operational in this version C Legend Main L R only Indicates that the dynamics COMPRESSOR function is selected L Legend Not operational in this version 5 Segment Bar Meters The 4 mini bar meters rising vertically above G E C and L legends give a lower resolution display of gain reduction only C mini bar meter operational for the Main L R in this version 4 x Seven Segment Characters Indicate the 550 or SEND number according to the meter signals being displayed 6 94 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 4 3 Other Meter Bridge Indicators 1
296. gns a send destination a return source and an electronic scribble name simultaneously A Sample Rate Converters SRCs set up GUI allows SRCs be assigned to AES inputs There is an SRC label local to each digital input output to indicate the inclusion of anSRC SCREEN VOALIAS 10 DIALOG Electronic Scribble Names Stereo Ext Sources DIALOG Cont Electronic Scribble Names SOFTKEYS AND DESTINATIONS TOP au ADC DAC SEND AES RETAES MT NEXT FURTHER PAGES TOP MORE MAIN LINE M T INSERT INSTR EXTSRC TOP MIDI MASTER SENDS Inter cancels with MIDI 8 TOP EXTSRC MASTER SURROUND EXT SOURCES Inter cancels with S EXTSRC 8 MORE MIDI T BACK GROUP U Channel Screens hierarchy 2nd and 3rd level Description of the M STEM GUI Multi Stem Set up and the two related Fold Down GUIs are not included in Chapter 5 Please see Chapter 4 for details of these GUIs Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 7 sueeJog 19 dey9 5 2 Channel Screens pem 1 5 2 1 Routing GUI Routing GUI layout
297. he SCROLL BAR can be used to view them whilst the tape is stopped However the current CUE will always be in view when the tape is rolling If it is out of view the tape is stopped and then the tape is rolled the current CUE will immediately jump into view Click on the CUES list header to reset the list so that the current CUE resides in the centre of the list which is the default To edit a Cue name Highlight and click on the name or press on the Control Keyboard to display a pop up dialogue box Type in a name using the QWERTY keyboard and press or click on OK To re order a Cue entry Click on its number in the left hand column for a pop up Overwrite the current number using the numeric pad on the Control Keyboard and press or click on OK The list will re order itself To Delete a Cue To delete a cue highlight that cue in the CUES field then on the Control Keyboard select DELETE CUE ENTER or without highlighting it DELETE CUE ENTER Entering Notes for a Cue Click on the middle column or highlight and press on the Control Keyboard for the NOTES pop up related to the cue on the same line Use the QWERTY Keyboard to enter notes and press or click on OK The icon appears only if there is a Notes entry Command Dialogue At the base of the screen the User Command Dialogue Line bar displays commands from the dedicated Control Keyboard and QWERTY Keyboard for confirmation before ENTER Menu opti
298. he L and R signals from the Main Output Bus or the L amp R signals selected as monitor sources for the CR Monitor LS SSG SEND OVER 1 1 A 1 0 0 0 DOCE 1 Q MAIN Q MON OVE 0 1 A 1 1 1 1 0000000 16 20 24 32 40 1 1 r ooon Q 00 BBBB gt Stereo Meters for SUPER SEND GROUPS and SENDS Scale 60dB OdB Full Scale SSG Legend Indicates a SUPER SEND GROUP meter signal Q SEND Legend Indicates a SEND Output meter signal Central Stereo Meter MAIN Legend Central Meter Indicates that the Central Stereo Meter 15 locked to the L and R signals of the Main Output Bus MON Legend Central Meter Indicates that the Central Stereo Meter will follow all centre section monitor selections Q OVER Legend Indicates a digital signal greater than full scale Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 93 suonduoseg eoiuuoe 9 1 19 I suonduoseq jeoiuuoe 9 6 4 Meter Bridge L Le
299. he Tape Remotes and divided into 2 character blocks indicate timecode positions for their particular machines SOLO Push Buttons Allow grouped Solo function according to the groups set up See and below CUT Push Buttons Allow grouped Cut function according to the groups set up See and below SENDS Push Buttons Select the channel signal being sent to the M T as monitor source May be linked to control SEND buttons on Pans panels as groups see section 6 2 3 hold down this button it will flash then select SEND s on the channels that are required to be grouped Latching SENDS will set all SEND buttons in the group RETS Push Buttons Select the return signal from the M T May be linked to control RET buttons on Pans panels as groups see section 6 2 3 hold down this button it will flash then select RET s on the channels required to be grouped Latching RETS will set all RET buttons in the group l1 Setting up a group with either SENDS or RETS will cause the group to be set for channel SENDs RETs SOLOs and CUTS 2 The grouping function is not operable in Multi Format mode if any of these buttons sets are assigned to control the monitor switching of a Stem or number of Stems see sections 4 13 4 and 4 13 5 Using Keyboard Entry to Record Arm Channel Tracks Press at the appropriate machine remotes in the master section Then use the QWERTY Keyboard Specify Channels as Below Channels ranges are specifie
300. he centre of the LCD screen All other push buttons are related to the Dynamic Automation described elsewhere in this manual Refer to Chapter 7 for details Chapter6 Technical Descriptions 6 87 suonduoseg eoiuuoe 9 1 19 9 6 3 Central Section Panels 6 3 7 QWERTY Keyboard NN 07 6 88 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions QWERTY KEYBOARD The QWERTY Keyboard used to type in specific names for Titles Cues and Tracks etc is conveniently housed at the front of the centre section of the OXF R3 console A protective sliding cover pulled towards the operator when the keyboard is in use doubles as a palm rest when typing 6 3 8 Trackerballs TRACKERBALLS There are two Trackerball pointing devices to allow easy operation for left or right handed personnel They can both control the same cursor pointer which can be moved into any screen on the OXF R3 control surface It is possible to split the control in order that the left Trackerball controls the three LCDs in the left channels section and the right Trackerball controls the three LCDs in the right channels section plus the central LCD See the PREFERENCES GUI on the central LCD and click on the POINTER tab to change the operation Move Cursor Left Push Butto
301. he current Sample Rate Mode Click on to select NOMINAL When filters and oscillators within the system are fixed at their absolute frequencies regardless of the incoming word clock frequency TRACK When filters and oscillators within the system track the incoming word clock frequency CommandbDialogue At the base of the screen the User Command Dialogue Line bar displays commands from the dedicated Control Keyboard and QWERTY Keyboard for confirmation before ENTER Menu options Menu options available using the softkey functions displayed at the base of the System screen page are as follows A PROJECTS MIXES MACHINES REMOTES SNAPSHOT BACKUPS SCREEN Selects the previous screen page Selects the ARTISTS PROJECTS amp TITLES page directly Selects the MIXES amp CUES page for all mixing functions Selects the MACHINES set up parameters page Selects the MACHINE REMOTES assignment matrix Selects the SNAPSHOTS COPY amp LINK page Selects System BACKUPS function Selects pop up showing all available screen selections Click on any one to select it Chapter 7 Session Management 7 29 juewebeueyy uoisses 9 1 uoisses 7 6 The Session Management Screen Pages 7 6 3 The Machines Screen The 16 text fields on this screen provide the facility to name and list the machines associated with the system 5 ma
302. here the tape will roll or has rolled or cycled from If a cue has been specified its name or default number will be displayed instead e g PLAY CUE 2 CUE 11 ENTER If a Pre Roll time is defined the START TIME field will take account of this in the time it displays 7 36 Chapter 7 Session Management END TIME Located to the right of the large timecode display this field indicates which timecode point the tape will roll to or cycle back from if a cycle command has been specified MIXES This field occupying most of the left side of the screen page displays any mixes that have been saved The date and time indicates when the currently highlighted mix was created As soon as any automated functions have been actioned 1 DYNAMIC LAYER appears above the large central timecode display indicating a Working Mix is resident in memory The number will be set according to the number of mix passes and will be affected by UNDO and REDO functions In other words automation data exists which has not yet been saved i e the tape has been rolled with some faders switches or knobs in Write To save a mix press SAVE MIX ENTER on the Control Keyboard and a pop up appears with a text line to type in an appropriate name Press for the default name of MIX 1 for the first mix or type in a name and press ENTER The DYNAMIC LAYER flag will then disappear If a trim or more automated actions are made the DYNAMIC LAYER fla
303. hes requirements if not already displayed 3 To change it while the system is unlocked use the or button to step through the formats STEREO LCRS 5 1 and 7 1 until the desired format is displayed by the 8 character dot display above the push button It will also be displayed above the central Master Fader Main Bus to Multitrack As well as feeding the Main Output to external destinations the system allows the Main Bus signal to be laid back onto the multitrack if required But before this can be done the tracks to be used for this purpose must first be assigned Continue the set up as follows 4 The system must be unlocked to assign the multitrack busses which will be fed from the Main Output Bus To assign the L channel for example press and hold the button and it lights 5 Step through the multitrack busses using the SELECT TRACK and buttons until the desired bus number is displayed in the 2 character display above the button This track has then been assigned for the L channel of the Main Output Bus 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the other destination busses To Clear any Multitrack Bus Destinations As an example to clear the bus set up as the C channel 7 Press and hold the button and it lights 8 Press the SELECT TRACK and buttons simultaneously to clear the bus assignment for the C channel Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 25 4 12 Mixing to the Main Output Bus 4 12 2 Channel Signal to the Main Out
304. highlight around the various fields within GUIs lt gt Keys Allow the orange highlight to be moved around in the current field TO amp AS NEW Keys Are used specifically in conjunction with other command lines described previously within this section Key Allows the current time point to be set on a timecode pop up or list entry which is highlighted orange amp C Keys Allow a timecode entry which is highlighted orange to be nudged up or down in frames This applies to timecode pop ups too except that the category to be nudged hours minutes seconds or frames can be selected using the lt and keys Key To use the EDIT function move the orange highlight to the desired entry then touch the EDIT key to display a pop up Dialogue Box Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 71 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 suonduoseq jeoiuuoe 9 Jadeyo 6 3 Central Section Panels Sse EEE ag 6 72 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions amp Command Lines A ENTER amp B ENTER Create convenient temporary Cue points displayed in the CUES list useful for commands such as LOCATE B Locates the system to timecode points set for Cue A or B PLAY A B The system plays from Cue point A to Cue B and stops CYCLE A B The system plays from Cue point A to Cue B then rewinds and repeats the passage
305. ible In depth information is provided later in this chapter SYSTEM 124 OXF R3 Logo screen The OXF R3 logo screen is displayed after boot up IMPORTANT the softkey functions at the base of the SMS allow Before mixing is started make sure the TIMECODE selection of either SYSTEM selecting pages for FORMAT and the SAMPLE RATE for the current machine set ups etc PROJECTS to go to the Artists programme material are set correctly in the System Projects amp Titles Screen or SCREEN which accesses screen page a pop up menu box showing all available screen selections Note Instructions requiring an object in a screen to be Select PROJECTS by pressing the associated softkey highlighted are referring to the orange highlight block Chapter 7 Session Management 7 9 juewebeueyy uoisses 9 1 uoisses 7 5 Mixing Overview 7 5 2 Name the Artist Project and Title ARTISTS PROJECTS amp TITLES ARTISTS PROJECTS PROJECT 1 PROJECT 2 SLOW DOWN RECORDS FULL MOON HER PROJECT HENLEY JAZZ DAD S FIRST Artist Project NEW SLOW DOWN RECORDS Title BLAH BLAH OK YAH User ADMIN Sample Rate 46000 Timecode Type PAL 25 Tempo Map TITLES IN MY LIFE FOLLOW MY DREAMS TOO SOON TO KNOW BLAH BLAH OK YAH GONNA BE ALL RIGHT AT LAST FIRST TIME LOVE 00 00 54 07 00 06 13 21 00 11 02 23 00 16 24 13 00 00 54
306. ibrated setting and the variable setting of the knob Q Q 8 Character Dot Display Indicates the level in dB SPL provided the system has been calibrated correctly The Calibration Procedure is described in Appendix A 3 Level Knob Adjusts the levels for all LS simultaneously when is not lit To change the CAL setting push hold and adjust accordingly then release Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 39 sued jeubig Jeydeyo IM 4 13 Multi Stem Set up 4 13 3 Multi Stem Source Channels Hc INPUT CHANNEL amp INSERTS 4 40 Chapter 4 Signal Paths Setting up source channels 1 Select MULTI in box 8 for each source channel using the and buttons Select its button This set up ensures that all processes assigned to boxes 1 7 affect the source signal sent to tape The channel paths for channels set up as Multi Channel monitors sections may also be used as source channels A T O 97 am a Oz 97 e 22 m z e m of am am o m az 97 am nom e oz e
307. icating that any trimming moves will be recorded Again the previous moves will be heard along with any new trimming moves 4 Make the desired trim moves which will add or subtract from the previous mix according to the fader scale at the null point The combination of the previous mix and the trimming moves will be heard exactly Dropping out of TRM works in exactly the same way as coming out of ABS ROLL BACK JOIN Push Button Select ROLL BACK JOIN to drop into automation record automatically after rewind and play If whilst any faders are in automation write the tape is rolled back a little and put in play again those faders will drop back into record at the point of rolling back 7 66 Chapter 7 Session Management Dropping out of write on subsequent mix passes There are four ways to drop out of write mode when dropping back to previous moves BUTT Where a jump occurs at the drop out point current default RAMP Where a user defined time is taken to slew to the previous move To adjust click on RAMP TIME in the MIXES amp CUES GUI to display the RAMP TIME pop up AUTO TAKE Where the operator manually fades to the previous move When the Write button is pressed to drop out of write the fader does not drop out immediately Instead arrows in the electronic scribble above the fader indicate which way to move to go back to the underlying mix An indication in dBs shows how far the fader has to be
308. ield The upper field is used to select the I O source Click on this to display a pop up as in Figure A If OFF is selected there will be no input source If TONE is selected the source is the oscillator as set up in the console centre section To select a source click on one in the list These can be ADC analogue sources or AES digital sources as numbered Clicking on AES will swap from the ADC page Figure A to the AES page and vice versa RANGE Acontiguous range of inputs can be assigned simultaneously To assigna set of consecutive inputs to anumber of consecutive channel inputs ADCs 17 24 to channel Line Inputs 1 8 as an example Click on the upper field below the LINE legend of Channel 1 for the assignment pop up shownin Figure A Clickon RANGE andits characters turn white and the background red Click on the lowest number of the ADCs required 17 in this example and ithighlights red e Click on the highest number of the ADCs required 24 in this example and ADCs 17 24 are assigned simultaneously to Line Inputs 1 8 ADCs already in use will be stolen in all cases when the RANGE function is used To set arange of inputs to off or assign the oscillator signal set at the master section Clickon RANGE andits characters turn white and the background red Click on OFF or TONE fora pop up displaying the channel numbers Click on the first and last ofthe range required SAMPLE RATE CONVERTER
309. ilit lectromagn tique immunit Ce produit est pr vu pour tre utilis dans les environments lectromagn tiques suivants E4 environment EMC contr l ex studio de t l vision F r Kunden in Europa Dieses Product besitzt die CE Kennzeichnung und erf llt sowahl die EMV Directive 89 336 EEC als auch die Directive Niederspannung 73 23 CEE der EG Kommission Die Erf llung dieser Directiven bedeutet Konformit t f r die folgenden Europ ischen Normen EN60950 Produktsicherheit e EN55103 1 Electromagnetische Interferenz Emission EN55103 2 Electromagnetische Empfindlichkeit Immunit t Dies Produkt ist f r den Einsatz unter folgenden electromagnetischen Bedingungen ausgelegt E4 kontrollierter EMV Bereich z B Fernsehstudio Peak Inrush Current OXF CP3048PS 1 Power ON current probe method 50A 100V 110A 240V 2 Hot switching inrush current measured in accordance with European standard EN55103 1 40A 230V OXF SP3000 1 Power ON current probe method 40A 100V 80A 240V 2 Hot switching inrush current measured in accordance with European standard EN55103 1 80A 230V 103000 1 Power ON current probe method 20A 100V 70A 240V 2 Hot switching inrush current measured in accordance with European standard EN55103 1 30A 230V Appel de Courant de Cr te OXF CP3048PS 1 Mise sous tension ON m thode de sondage du courant 50A 100V 1
310. in boxes 1 7 will affect what is recorded via Stem Masters Unity Gain Monitor Path using FADS 0dB Push Button The Main Output Bus is used in the monitor path via the Channel Faders which may be freely adjusted In order to lock Channel Faders for Stem Master Channels at unity gain 4 Make sure is selected at the SELECT TO FADERS panel refer to 6 2 2 for details of SELECT TO PANELS operation 5 Press the in the central Monitor panel and it flashes on and off refer to 6 3 2 for details of operation 6 Press at the bottom of the fader for each of the Stem Masters Their faders will move to the OdB point and will spring back to unity if moved and released buttons will light amber 7 Press the FADS 0dBJ to resume normal operations and faders will spring back When used this way the function will not be affected by the loading of Snapshots in that the OdB locked fader settings cannot be overwritten Unity Gain settings and Snapshots To allow the unity gain settings for Stem Master Channel Faders to be overwritten with Snapshots the procedure is modified slightly 5 Press the and it flashes on and off 6 Press at the bottom of the fader for each of the Stem Masters Their faders will move to the OdB point and will spring back to unity if moved and released buttons will light amber 7 Press buttons again to release them from the OdB function They are no longer lit Do not touch faders in order that they remain at OdB they will
311. in general The controls used for routing and panning of signals may be assigned to a number of functions including the Channel Output Multitrack Send and the SSGs Super Send Groups The following describes their use when assigned to the Channel Output by selecting on the SELECT TO FADERS panel MULTI FORMAT Routing Push Buttons The surround routing buttons are laid out in the form of a surround sound LS layout Only those consistent with the format selected in the master section will be operable The fire up default is Stereo indicated by the L and R buttons being lit Definable Knobs Pan is the fire up default for the Definable Knobs indicated by being lit on the SELECT TO PANS panel This allows control on a channel by channel basis for L R pan settings for Stereo and L C R for surround modes Touch Sensitive Motorised Joystick Panner Any signal routed to two or more busses can be panned using one of the joysticks one at each side of the control surface The joysticks are assigned according to channel buttons They work in tandem with the Pan knobs on the MULTITRACK panel and the Pan function for the Definable Knobs All three controls track each other If one is put into automation write the others will follow automatically The joystick will move according to automated moves and the push button lights when the joystick is touched The Surround Routing buttons in the MULTI FORMAT section of the Routing panel and panner
312. indows Do this using 6 At the same panel select COMPRESS IN The the and buttons and then press the large Compressor ACCESS willbe selected IN button automatically allowing the compressor to be set 3 At the Free Assign Area amp Dynamics panel select 7 Select the Dynamics softkey to view compressor SC EQ IN its button will light parameters and transfer curve graph on the LCD automatically screen 4 At the same panel press the button adjacent to the SIG EQ display and adjust the HF controls to boost the frequency band to be attenuated 3 30 Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 10 13 To Link Compressor Side Chains in a Group 5 LT 908500 91081000 9108500 0 0 0 D D 0 a L1 001457 01000 OO O O O O 5c 09 no ao 00 75 g U g U o
313. ing The OXF R3 has 48 or 24 on a 24 0 channel faders on its control surface but Fader Paging enables control of a much greater number of channels Fader Paging allows banks of 24 channels to be selected on either side of the centre section at any time The diagram illustrates how Fader Paging relates to a standard in line console Use the SELECT TO FADERS panel to select the fader bank required Within that panel there are a number of buttons marked CHS 1 24 CHS 25 48 and so on There is a SELECT TO FADERS panel for each set of 24 channel faders left and right of the centre section 96 CHANNEL IN LINE CONSOLE l CENTRAL 125 48 MASTER 49 721 73 96 SECTION I l I 1 1 l 1 1 11 24 l 1 l l N JK N SELECT TO FADERS PANEL CHS CHS CHS 1 24 25 48 49 72 CHS 97 120 SELECT L MASTERS 4 ABS ATAI t iss TO PADS a ABS amp TRI TO CUTS SELECT R MASTERS 5 8 0 Paging of Faders for the left side of the control surface 3 8 Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 3 Assignable Channel Processing Once the appropriate bank of 24 channel fa
314. ing panel To feed the Main bus directly make sure is selected on Alternatively channel outputs can be routed to Super Send Groups SSGs to group a selection of channels together To accomplish this de select and select an SSG at the Routing Panel The output of the SSG can itself be routed directly to the Main Output Bus by selecting its button in the Multi Format amp Super Send Groups section in the centre section Each SSG has its own knob for level control Alternatively on the Select To Faders panel in the SEL section select SSGs 1 8 to set faders in the centre section to control SSG levels The fire up gain setting for SSGs is unity 4 4 Chapter 4 Signal Paths INPUT CHANNEL 8 INSERTS LTER DYN INSERT Joa ofo ald CH INPUT SEND RETURN KMD FILTER Dyn J Ea Xr CIS GAIN CHANNEL FADER Signal flow for mix down with processing in the channel path Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 5 jeubig y WA 4 3 Mix down with Post Channel Fader Insert The ability to swap functions easily enables the user to start with identical signal paths set up across the console using copy or snapshot functions Then channels may be changed on a
315. ing that moves will be recorded Make the desired moves 3 To revise moves roll back and press the knob once more Whilst the tape is rolling back the red LED will flash again Either whilst the tape 15 stopped or when it is playing again press the PAN knob once more and its LED lights solidly indicating the absolute write function overwriting previous moves Roll back for the knobs works in the same manner as for faders except that instead of the knobs moving the LEDs in the skirt of the knob reflect previous move data 7 77 Chapter 7 Session Management juewebeueyy uoisses 9 5595 Ja deyo 7 7 Dynamic Automation Moves 7 7 6 Dropping Out of Write on Subsequent Mix Passes for Knobs As with the faders there are four ways to drop out of automation write for knobs see section 7 7 2 for more details The switches are just to the right of centre beneath the central LCD BUTT Where a jump occurs at the drop out point current default Where a user defined time is taken to slew to the previous move To adjust click on RAMP TIME on the Mixes amp Cues page to display the dialogue box Where the operator manually moves the knob to the previous move When the PAN button is pressed in this mode the knob does not drop out of write immediately Instead the 6 character display above the PAN knob indicates the direction in which to rotate the knob As the knob
316. ired and set the input GAIN knob to a suitable setting 3 Make sure is selected on the Select To Faders panel fire up default At the Routing panel select and 8 fire up default if not already lit Adjust the level to the Main Output Bus with the Channel Fader Open the Main Fader and turn up the CR Monitor level Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 19 e paners 3 10 Basic Console Operations 3 10 2 To Set Up a Super Send Group from Channel Inputs H 500509 190 0 L 000 000000 mo 00 09 co 0 09 ao 8 HO 0591555955 250 H 090
317. is screen page allows automation data for Faders and Cuts to be written and modified offline Click on either FADERS or CUTS as required OFFLINE FADERS curs 00 01 09 13 4 00 00 00 00 c 00 00 00 00 mw usr e eee 1 START OF TITLE 00 00 54 07 2 GUITAR PICS 3 NENNEN 12 13 14 15 16 00 01 04 02 GUITAR INTRO 00 01 0913 4 KIT INTRO 00 01 13 02 5 VOX INTRO 00 01 23 02 5 9 17 19 20 21 22 Les 26 27 ze 29 51 a2 35 2 37 30 39 40 42 43 44 45 46 47 46 43 5o 51 52 53 54 55 56 gt LM rss fees oes verse 00 01 31 08 00 01 31 08 00 01 31 08 00 01 31 08 00 01 31 08 00 01 55 10 00 01 55 24 00 01 56 14 OFFLINE FADERS automation edit GUI General This GUI allows the editing of automation data for selected faders with new or trimmed levels between specified times Similarly new cut events can be written between specified times and cut transitions can be time shifted A number of fields in the GUI apply to both Faders and Cuts These are described first Control type Selector Situated in the upper left this allows selection of fader and cut type e g Channel Faders Control Groups Numbers field Allows selection of channels to work on according to the contro
318. ite button in the fader knob is operable in Touch Write mode 4 To revise any moves roll back using the transport keys and play again As soon as the tape is rewinding the red LED will flash indicating the ready state Put the tape into play and previous moves will be heard and will be displayed by the motorised fader In Touch Write touching the fader will overwrite previous moves and the audio will follow fader moves accordingly Otherwise if Touch Write is not selected even if the fader is touched the previous moves will still be heard up to the moment the Write button is pressed From then absolute fader positions and moves will be recorded as well as heard It is possible to roll back and stop the tape to go into Write mode before playing the tape again if that is more convenient To Trim moves for one Fader 1 Press the ready button on the selected fader The green trim LED flashes 2 Pressing the automation write in the fader knob will set the null about which trimming moves are based This can be done before starting the tape or after it is rolling In Touch Write the point at which the knob is touched sets the null point If Touch Write is not selected before pressing the write button to set the null point move the fader to a suitable part of its scale with good resolution The 0 dB point is often a good setting De 1 Itis useful to have selected on the Select to Faders panel so that fader dB values wil
319. ith 4 sets of Tape Remotes Dedicated Keys The majority of commands are implemented using the dedicated command keys on this keyboard The QWERTY keyboard housed under a sliding cover between the Trackerballs in the centre section is used mainly to type in specific names for Titles Cues and Tracks etc Jog Wheel functions The Jog Wheel can be used for various functions which are set using the key on the Control Keyboard Pressing will cause the current Jog Knob function to be displayed in the Command Line bar at the bottom of the central LCD screen situated above the Control Keyboard Further presses will cycle through the Jog Wheel functions one at a time Display the function required No further action is necessary 1 The Jog Wheel works for the Master Machine only during transport control 2 The transport keys lt 4 and WW light up amber for normal operation but light green during operations involving the Jog Wheel The Jog Wheel functions are as follows Jog Rotating the Jog Wheel will cause the tape to move in the direction of rotation and in relation to the speed of rotation The tape motion will stop once the Jog Wheel is released Crawl Crawl causes the tape to shuttle progressively faster according to the rotation of the Jog Wheel but only during rotation Shuttle Rotating the Jog Wheel will cause the tape to roll progressively faster in the direction of rotation up to Fast Forward and Rewind speeds The motion is r
320. ither as part of an in line channel or in a parallel mode where a multi channel recording is being made during a live mix for example ROUTING The Routing section splits into three areas Multitrack Busses 1 48 Main Output Bus and Super Send Groups 1 16 Multi format Monitor Although just one set of buttons which follow the channel assignments is available at each side of the console 48 channels worth of routing can be displayed simultaneously with 24 channels being displayed on the LCD screens on each side of the control surface SENDS There are 24 mono Sends that can be linked up as odd even pairs to provide up to 12 stereos The levels to the busses can be set using the individual dedicated controls or alternatively they can be assigned one bus at a time to the faders or assignable knobs PANS In the following panel descriptions the location of the panel being described will be indicated by an inset view of the OXF R3 control surface with that panel or panels of that type shown highlighted Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 5 suonduoseg 9 saideyo suonduoseg 9 1 14 6 2 Channels Section Panels 6 2 1 Fader Panel 6 6 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions The following descriptions apply equally to the left and right hand channels sections which are mirror images of each other General Each Fader Panel three left and three right contains 8
321. itrack 2 MADI Output in place of any of the Groups 1 48 For example DIR and button 1 selected on channel 49 will replace the Group 1 signal with the M T Fader signal from channel 49 In other words this allows any combination of Group or Direct signals to Multitrack MADI Outputs 1 and 2 Normal Monitoring is available only for Groups 1 48 M T Fader AFL must be used to listen to Direct Output Sends Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 29 suonduoseg 1 9 saideyo suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 6 2 Channels Section Panels E SS ES 6 30 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions Super Send Group O Ps 61 9 8 16 Push Buttons Allow the channel output signal i e the same signal that routes to the Main Output Bus to be routed to the Super Send Group outputs The width of an SSG can be different to that of the Main Output Bus As an example the Main could be operating with a 5 1 output whereas an SSG could be set up as Stereo LCR e LCRS 5 0 5 1 7 0 7 1 SSGs 1 8 back lit legend indicates that the buttons will operate for SSGs 1 8 This means that the SUPER SGs 1 8 button has been selected in the centre section SSGs 9 16 back lit legend indicates that the buttons will operate for SSGs 9 16 This means that the SUPER SGs 9 16 button has been selected in the centre section A H Push Buttons Stems Inter cancelling buttons that select which stem is
322. k on RANGE then click one at a time on both ends of the range Separate ranges may co exist Level Adjustment Fader levels are set in the upper right hand block To write new absolute data click on ABS which highlights red Then set the level by either clicking on the up down arrows below the dB legend or clicking on the number for a pop up where it can be typed in or nudged with the and keys the Control Keyboard To trim previous data click on TRIM which highlights green Use the same method for setting the level as with ABS The level will apply to the faders selected except that the level adjustment will be referenced to the underlying mix 7 86 Chapter 7 Session Management Once all settings are satisfactory click on COMMIT and play through the section to check the edit Repeat the procedure as necessary for other faders and levels OFFLINE CUTS GUI Upper right hand block The functions of the upper right hand block are specific to Cuts apart from COMMIT EVENT Event mode allows cut events that is cut and uncut transitions to be displayed and edited New cut events can also be inserted DURATION Duration mode allows new cut data to be written for a specified duration Any underlying data within that duration will be overwritten COMMIT Commit is used to confirm actions as necessary MIN LIST The list of cut events can be minimised where events occur at exactly the same timecode FULL L
323. keyboard to type in a new name of up to 6 characters Then click on OK or press SETTINGS for SWITCHES The settings for the 6 switches are displayed on the central panel in the GUI Clicking on each field in turn allows set up and control as follows CARD Upper field Click on for a pop up to select the MIDI I O Port from 1 16 There is one port per Card with a maximum of 16 per system CHAN 2 CHAN 10 CHAN 1 CHAN 1 Cont CNG Cont CNG Prog CNG Pitch bend CHAN VOL BANK SEL VELO Shi 2 A jl I FREE ASSIGN AREA amp DYNAMICS WAVSTN SDX DYNAMICS GATE EXP COMP LIMIT SWITCH 3 SWITCH 4 SWITCH 5 SWITCH 6 MIDI GUI Page and Free Assign Area FAA controls Chapter 7 Session Management 7 91 juewebeueyy uoisses 9 juowebeuey 5595 Ja deyo 7 9 MIDI CHANNEL Second field Click on for a pop up to select the MIDI Channel from 1 16 COMMAND Third field Click on for a pop up to select the MIDI Command type PARAMETER Fourth field Displays a first Parameter depending on which COMMAND type has been selected Click on for a pop up to select a new Parameter Click on a suitable entry in the pop up or click on NEW ENTRY to type in a value using the QWERTY K
324. l indicate the trimmed difference compared to the source mix 2 An AUDITION function described later in this chapter allows dropping in at a preset auditioned level point If the tape is rolled before write is pressed the previous moves will be heard and displayed Even 1f the fader is touched the moves will still be heard 7 65 Chapter 7 Session Management juewebeueyy uoisses 9 5 9 Ja dey9 7 7 Dynamic Automation Moves la suec ITOUCH WRITE da Q TOUCH HOLD AUTO OFF READY CANCEL AUD MON READY READY ABSOLUTE TRIM LD TOUCH CLEAR AUTO BOL ANCE OO REDO ALL C SPACI QO DOW CG OVO OWA CANCEL WY NOW REPEAT ROLL BACK JOIN four mode keys for dropping out of write 3 Move the fader knob to a suitable position The green LED will continue to flash Press the Write button this is the null point and the green LED will light solidly ind
325. l type highlighted in the upper left selector 7 84 Chapter 7 Session Management UpperTimecode bar Indicates the current timecode for the master machine FM TO and DURATION This field upper centre allows the start time end time and duration of an offline operation to be set This field may also be used to specify a butt or ramp in and out faders only C GROUP DATA TO SLAVES This section top right of screen allows control group data to be propagated to slaves NEXT LAYER propagates to the next lowest layer ALL LAYERS propagates to all layers of nested groups such that channel faders alone retain the move and cut data CUES field This field lower right of screen displays the CUES list from the MIXES GUI During OFFLINE CUTS operations this list also displays Cut Events in timecode order SELECTOR block The selector block on the upper left of the screen allows the selection of the control type on which the offline editing will be performed Only one type of control can be worked on at a time CHANS Channel Faders amp Cuts MTSEND Multitrack Send Faders amp Cuts CHSEND 24 Send Levels amp Cuts A Channel must be selected first then the appropriate Sends SNDMIX All Channel Levels amp Cuts for a Single Send Bus The Send must be selected first then the appropriate Channels GROUPS Control Group Faders amp Cuts SSGs Super Send Group Faders amp Cuts SENDS Send Bus Output Fader
326. lary Push Button Block ACCS FOLL SOLO Push Button Any Channel ACCESS function is selected automatically by pressing its Fader push button equivalent to pressing the and simultaneoulsy ACCS BY TOUCH Push Button Any Channel ACCESS function is selected automatically by touching its fader knob JOY STICK EN able Push Button Latching function which enables the motor power in the Motorised Joy Sticks 6 58 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions SOLO CHs UNDER Push Button Sets a Solo mode where channels which are not soloed can be heard at a reduced level The level is set using the Definable knob above the Monitor Level control Use the and buttons either side of the 8 character display above the Definable knob to select DIM LEVEL and adjust to suitable level Q SOLO ISOL Push Button To isolate channels from the solo cut bus latch SOLO ISOL and select their channel SOLO buttons Then de latch SOLO ISOL Reverse the procedure to de isolate channels Latching SOLO ISOL will cause the SOLO buttons on isolated channels to light Q AUTO CUE Push Button Latching function linked to T B GROUP 2 push button When AUTO CUE is selected T B GROUP 2 will be permanently latched on apart from when the tape is rolling This enables talkback at all times except when the tape is playing or recording Talkback buttons e g T B F Back 1 4 must be assigned to T B GROUP 2 for this function Buttons related to Copy The following
327. lements is available that can be inserted in any order This is achieved using the eight small window sections each with and 2 buttons either side and an button All available processing blocks in the Assignable Panel Area can be accessed in any of the windows by toggling the and buttons Functions currently supported are 5 BAND PARAMETRIC EQ with SHELVING amp LF shelving is switchable FILT HIGH amp LOW PASS FILTERS 6dB 36dB octave in 6dB steps DYN GATE EXPANDER COMPRESSOR amp LIMITER e INSERT EXTERNAL DEVICE INSERTION POINT DELAY DIGITAL DELAY up to 1 2s with Regen MULTI INSERTION of MULTITRACK SEND ROUTING amp MONITOR PATHS FADER CHANNEL FADER The small arrow shape in the window outline points in the direction of the signal flow Once the required function has been selected press the IN button which inserts that function into the signal path It also becomes the master in out switch for its function and can be automated The order of this signal path is defined according to the processes selected in each window At any time the order can be changed by de selecting the button and toggling the name in the window to an alternative one To clear a window place the default box number back in the display by pressing the and buttons simultaneously Selection changes can only be made if buttons are not selected If the same function 15 selected in two different windows at the
328. lete channel then de select the sections not required or if more convenient click on NONE to de select all sections and then click on the ones required 7 49 Chapter 7 Session Management jueujeBeue v uoisses Jejdeuo uoissas Ja dey9 7 6 The Session Management Screen Pages 1 DEFAULTS selector definitions As described three separate selectors are available for SNAPSHOTS COPY and LINK The buttons are defined as CHANNEL Selector ALL All Channel Controls and I O CH Channel Input sources and Output destinations with gain settings and electronic scribbles not channel insert INPUT Mic Line and M T input selector and Phase switches PATH 8 section Channel Path selector and IN buttons DYNAMICS All Dynamics section controls F ASSIGN All Free Assign Area controls currently Delay EQ All Equaliser controls not Filters FILTERS All Filter controls INSERT Analogue or digital I O related to the Channel Insert SENDS All Send levels their Pans and Cuts M T ROUTE Multitrack Routing CH ROUTE Channel Routing M T GROUP Multitrack Group Cut and Trim M T MISC Multitrack group monitor levels Pans and Cuts M T SND Multitrack Send Fader CUT Multitrack Send Cut switch PAN Multitrack Send Pan setting CHAN Channel Fader CUT Channel Cut switch PAN Channel Pan setting 7 50 Chapter 7 Ses
329. lete the merge Chapter 7 Session Management 7 25 juewebeueyy uoisses 9 jueujeDeue N 7 7 5 Mixing Overview MERGE ASSEMBLE 4 M VOX HARMONY INTRO 00 00 amp M RHYTHM INTRO 00 01 13 02 to 00 05 22 06 p 7 1 a LU T 1 00302300300 00303300300 00304300300 00305300300 m orrune screen Multiple layers of different types on the MERGE ASSEMBLE screen Layer types SNAPSHOT LAYER Yellow There are four categories of layers colour coded as This type of layer consists of static data from any e WORKING MIX Blue Snapshot but must have FM from and TO times This is the current underlying base mix accessed by Spence ned ne the S DB TA CE S clicking on ADD LAYER New layers taken from the Working Mix are specified using the ADD LAYER GUI Click on to edit UNDO and REDO Use the and keys on the Control DYNAMIC LAYER Cyan Keyboard to undo and redo layers This type of layer is created by automating controls on the control surface such as faders and cuts in the HIDE or DELETE Layers normal way and cannot be edited Click on any layer for a pop up Click on HIDE LAYER or DELETE LAYER as appropriate The data for a hidden layer will not have any effect on what is heard MIX LAYER Gre
330. ll be fed directly to those tracks Selecting the M T button will allow panning between those tracks as follows The Motorised Joystick will be mapped to the exact area between the buttons If the Joystick is moved out of that area it will spring back when released Panning using the knobs in the Multitrack panel works according to which routing buttons are selected The Definable knobs one above each fader are also operational affecting front panning The assignable knob in the Multitrack panel has three functions Front Back Pan Surround Pan and Divergence The L R Pan knob operates across L C R C and R The Surround Pan select SUR L R operates across and R S Select the button to pan the signal front to back Select to set the Divergence clockwise for minimum spread ROUTING SELECTIONS for OTHER STEMs The Active Stem is the one selected and lit in section It is possible to route to other stems by selecting appropriate track numbers directly in the ROUTE TO TRACKS section Selecting one or more buttons in the ROUTE TO TRACKS section Post Surround Pan signals will be fed to tracks according to the pan settings for the Active Stem OTHER ROUTING SELECTIONS Signals may be routed to tracks which are not set up in any of the Stems Selecting a single button in the ROUTE TO TRACKS section A Post Fader signal will be fed directly to the track Selecting two
331. ll be transmitted from for the local system Set the START CHAN and the END CHAN by clicking on the A and arrows 4 A further option in the TRANSMIT CHANNEL MASK field at the left allows individual channel and centre section components to be specified Clicking on ALL will highlight every component whilst clicking on NONE will de select them all They can also be selected individually turning them on or off from either starting point 5 In the RECEIVE CHANNEL MASK section select the range of channels that data will be received from for the remote system Set the START CHAN and the END CHAN by clicking on the A and arrows Command Dialogue At the base of the screen the User Command Dialogue Line bar displays commands from the dedicated Control Keyboard and QWERTY Keyboard for confirmation before ENTER Menu options Menu options available using the softkey functions displayed at the foot of the Network Administration screen page are as follows A Selects the previous screen page PROJECTS Selects the ARTISTS PROJECTS amp TITLES page directly MIXES Selects the MIXES amp CUES page for all mixing functions MACHINES Selects the MACHINES set up parameters page REMOTES Selects the MACHINE REMOTES assignment matrix SNAPSHOT Selects the SNAPSHOTS COPY amp LINK page BACKUPS Selects system BACKUPS functions SCREEN Selects pop up showing all available screen selections Click on any one to select
332. ll controls to drop out of automation record To automate cuts 1 To start at the beginning of the Title on the Control Keyboard press LOCATE TITLE ENTER Or LOCATE ENTER to locate to the last entered starting time 2 Ready enable the cuts to be automated with READY ABSOLUTE or READY TRIM or Ready enable cuts using the local method described at the beginning of this section 3 Press GLOBAL DROP IN either before or after rolling the tape to drop all ready enabled cuts into automation record or press switches individually 4 Write cuts as required To audition a channel which is cut assign the Definable Knobs to INPUT GAIN and press AFL on the appropriate channel 5 Press GLOBAL DROP OUT after writing cuts 6 Press READY CANCEL and then on the Control Keyboard to hear the result and note that automated cuts are indicated by switches lighting amber Note As soon as any automation has been recorded the message New 1 DYNAMIC LAYER is displayed on the MIXES amp CUES GUI at the top right to indicate that un saved automation data is resident in the system UNDO and REDO functions AS passes are made by rolling forwards and back a set of un saved passes is built up which is resident in the system memory Use to step backwards through individual passes to the last SAVE command and to go forwards Press to go all the way back in one step and to go all the way fo
333. lowing order SELECT SOURCE CHANNEL pop up Click on the required source channel to highlight a source As soon as one is highlighted the destinations pop up will appear DESTINATIONS FOR SOURCE CHANNEL Click on DESTINATION CHANNELS to highlight them or click on the screen menu buttons ALL To send copy data to all channels RANGE Highlight the first and last channel of a range It is possible to mix these function i e click on ALL and un highlight a number of channels for example Click OK and the SELECT SOURCE CHANNEL pop up appears ready to select another source channel and more destinations or click OK to finish the operation Chapter 7 Session Management 7 57 uoisses 0 5 9 7 6 The Session Management Screen Pages SNAPSHOTS wr SHOW CHANNEL LINKS LINK DEFAULTS LLLNONE PATH IEEE P SENDS M T GROUP M T MISC MIT SND COPY CHANNEL 75 KE EET EE 15 L16 EEI L74 75 76 EH 28 EEI 80 gt Linking ch77 and ch84 done p Em 8 LINK HEEEEEEE ELEY EV EVES El el El SNAPSHOTS COPY amp LINK GUI displaying SHOW ALL LINKS LINK GUI in general Click on LINK in the banner at the top of the screen to display the Link Groups set up and display fields This page aids the set up of Link Groups each of which can have different contr
334. lready resident in the Working Mix so this is the correct source mix for this example Any other source can be selected by clicking on the appropriate to the right of its name strip for a pop up list Having established the correct source set a start time for the source data in the SOURCE FM section which may be Cue point or timecode entry VERSE 1 is displayed in the example Click on V to the right of the name strip ADD LAYER ARTIST PROJECT JOHN s vi E BLAH BLAH OK YAH MIX SNAP WORKING MIX 100 00 01 31 08 100 00 02 03 15 v NEW LAYER CH I 0 f INPUT f PATH SOURCE CHANNELS DESTINATION fF ASSIGN nue oe Ee 15 14115115 INSERT 170 SENDS ROUTE f CH ROUTE gigi 57 53 40 nd obe 45 45 47 48 57 53 f ex 62 ea _ isc 43 50 51 52 53 54 55 foe 57 58 53 es fee erf eof 7 72 273 174 o e 77 20 81082 82 84 55 86 87 so of sc 52 33 34 35 87 38 58 100f 1029 103 104 105 06 107 108 GROUPS d curs MAIN PROC MISC m fesses MERGE ASSEMBLE ADD LAYER pop up in the FM section for a different from point as a Cue point or click on the timecode entry for
335. lue bar along the bottom of the screen Cue screen displays the current time for the master points are displayed as vertical lines along this bar machine The vertical line indicates the related with labels where possible position along the time line Individual bars for any unsaved additional mix layers Mix Layer Status will also be displayed as they are created or merged The banner at the top right indicates the total number The most recent will be the uppermost Any New of unsaved Mix Layers in the system memory The Dynamic Layers that is those created by automating UNDO REDO UNDO ALL and REDO ALL keys controls on the console surface will appear after on the Control Keyboard can be used to undo and redo creation once the tape is put into rewind layers 7 40 Chapter 7 Session Management Scroll and Zoom The time line can be scrolled or zoomed in or out using the independent horizontal and vertical Scroll and Zoom icons ZOOM FIT Highlight ZOOM FIT by clicking on it to have all Mix Layers totally in view If layers are shortened or extended the display will adjust accordingly as each layer is completed FIND LAST LAYER Click on FIND LAST LAYER in cases where the latest mix occurs in a portion of the time line not in view for the display to shift view accordingly ADD LAYER Clicking on ADD LAYER causes a large pop up to appear which divides into two major areas SOURCE Specify ARTIST PROJECT Current is default
336. lute auditioned setting to be established The tape can then be rolled back and the fader dropped in to record the new absolute setting or moves In ready TRM Audition mode the point at which the fader knob is touched becomes the null point allowing a trimmed audition setting to be established based on the underlying mix The tape can then be rolled back and the fader dropped in to record the new trim setting or moves Faders and knobs ABS or TRM ready will operate in audition mode until is de selected To record auditioned levels from a specified time 1 Set an in point from which the auditioned levels are to be written e g set a Cue point with ENTER Cue points already available in the Cues List may be used or a timecode point can be entered 2 Having made sure that is selected set the fader balance for any faders in ready ABS or mode as desired 3 Enter the following command using the Control Keyboard A is assumed as the time point in the following example but Cue or timecode entries are legal too MIX ENTER The system will then roll back past point A to include the Pre Roll Time and then play forward The previous automation balance will be heard up until point A At point the auditioned faders will drop into automation write and the previous balance will change to the new audition levels To record auditioned levels between specified times 1 Set an in and an out point from which the
337. ly switched from control surface Crosstalk Between Inputs 20Hz 20kHz lt 90dBfs 8 Ch Analogue MIC amp LINE Inputs Gain Control MIC 20dB to 80dB in 1dB steps LINE 30dB to 20dB in 1dB steps Input Impedance e MIC lt 7k5Q Balanced LINE lt 7k5Q Balanced Max Input Level MIC 50V 50Hz for 1 Minute LINE 200V DC 1kHz for 1 Minute Noise Floor MIC lt 124dBfs Equivalent Input Noise Zin 2009 Gain 80dB LINE 105dBfs Gain 0dB CMRR MIC gt 45dB 20Hz 20kHz Gain OdB LINE gt 50dB 20Hz 20kHz Gain 0dB Frequency Response e 20Hz20kHz 0 2dB Distortion 20Hz 20kHz Full Scale Signal 96dBfs 0 00596 THD N e 50dBfs lt 135dBfs Phantom Power 48V for MIC inputs individually switched from control surface Crosstalk Between Inputs 20Hz 20kHz lt 90dBfs A 1 0 Appendixes 4 Ch Analogue LINE Outputs Output Type Electronic Floating type with performance identical balanced and unbalanced Maximum output level 24dBm Equivalent Source Impedance e 20Hz 20kHz lt 109 Output Balance 20Hz 20kHz lt 60dB 0 1 Minimum Destination Load 300Q Frequency Response 48kHz Sample Rate 20Hz 20kHz 0 2dB Output Noise lt 109dBr Distortion 20Hz 20kHz e dBfs lt 96dBfs 0 005 THD N 50dBfs 135dBfs Crosstalk Between Outputs 20Hz 0kHz lt 100dBfs Stability Unconditional Complia
338. n Sends post Group Trim signal to monitor LS Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 25 suonduoseg eoiuuoe 9 1 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 6 2 Channels Section Panels pec a n a adiu Rc REGE es 6 26 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions SOURCE section Character Display Indicates signal source point in channel chain from where the signal to feed the Multitrack is derived Push buttons allow selection of the junction in channel path from where the Multitrack signal is sourced The signal will be taken directly from the ouput of the function displayed Operable only if the IN button for the Multitrack displayed as MULTI is not selected on the Input Channel amp Inserts panel INSERT section Push Buttons Not operational in this version Allow the list of insertable devices to be displayed one at a time on the 8 character display GINSERT IN Push Button Inserts the device selected via the I O GUI see Chapter 5 It is not possible to change insert selection when the INSERT IN is selected Multitrack LEVEL and Pan section QLEVEL Knob Controls the level of signal being sent to the M T routing bus switching QA FL Push Button Sends the signal post the M T Level to monitor LS QCUT Push Button Mutes the signal post M T Level control QPAN IN Push Button Switches in the Pan functionality according to format selected Stereo or Multi Format selected in the centre s
339. n any EQ or Dynamics controls are adjusted RIGHT EQ amp Dynamics GUIs are automatically displayed in therightchannels section above respective panels when any EQ or Dynamics controls are adjusted REPEAT RAISE When assigning I O clicking on the source or destination device normally causes the pop up to close With the use of Repeat Raise the pop up remains open and increments the channel number for the same input or output fora further assignment and so on Click on the red title bar at the top left when completed e LEFT Repeat Raise operates for the left side of the console RIGHT Repeat Raise operates for the right side ofthe console RANGE DISABLE Disables the Range function ENABLE Allows consecutive numbered sections of I O devices of the same type to be assigned to consecutive numbered sets of channels when using the I O GUI CAL MODE Relates to the Surround LS Calibration settings for mixing to picture ON 51 Monitor Outputs use their calibration settings OFF LS1 Monitor Outputs default to uncalibrated settings SADDLE BUTTON Option to allow the buttons in the middle of the Fader Knobs to be used for two different functions PFL Momentary PFL operation AUTOMATION Fader Automation drop intorecord fader moves FADER STARTS 1 amp 2 Two relay closure Fader Starts can be assigned to Channel or Control Group Faders e Upper Button Clickontocyclethrough CHANN
340. n individual basis according to the situation By selecting FADER in one of the eight windows functions can be placed after the channel fader The diagram shown is the same configuration as the previous mix down set up but with the INSERT point placed after the fader thus a post fader insert INPUT CHANNEL amp INSERTS LTER DYN SL el L amp R CH INPUT Ss CIS GAIN MAIN C 1 57 SEND RETURN CHANNEL FADER 4 6 Chapter 4 Signal Paths Mix down with post channel fader insert 4 4 Recording to Multitrack To include the multitrack in the channel path select MULTI in one of the eight windows in the Input Channel amp Inserts section This creates an in line channel configuration separating the channel input and monitor paths HINT As a starting point position the multitrack MULTI in window number 5 This allows windows 1 to 4 to be used for other functions such as EQ and dynamics so that they affect the recorded signal Windows 6 to 8 are still available for inserting functions into the monitor path post multitrack In other words the top row of processing blocks forms the channel path whilst the lower row is the monitor path Once one channel is set
341. n setting Global Ready Enable does not apply to Centre Section items in the lower part of the selector Using Keyboard Entry Keyboard entry allows ready enable in Abs or Trim for the whole console or specific channels entered using the QWERTY Keyboard Controls will be enabled according to the CHANNEL Selector described previously To Ready Enable the Whole Console At the QWERTY Keyboard type READY A confirmation pop up will appear Clicking on OK which is highlighted red or pressing will set the complete console to ready absolute status Clicking on NO gives rise to a further confirmation pop up to set the complete console to ready trim status Click on OK or press ENTER NO will cancel the operation To Ready Enable Channels amp Control Groups Keyboard entry has an additional function allowing Control Group Faders to be specified as well as Channels At the QWERTY Keyboard type READY Specify Channels as Below Channels and Control Group Faders Ranges are specified with as a separator 1 72 Channels 1 72 01 032 Control Group Faders 1 32 e Individual items are separated by 2 4 25 2 4 and 25 Unlimited strings are possible in the same entry e g 01 03 05 08 1 24 48 56 65 Control Group Faders 1 3 and 5 8 Channels 1 24 48 56 and 65 Chapter 7 Session Management 7 83 juewebeueyy uoisses Jejdeu 7 8 Offline Automation Th
342. n the RANGE function is used I O will be assigned whether in use or not without notification 5 30 Chapter 5 Control Screens SELECT Allows a one shot print function of Mixer GUIs such as I O set ups using the SELECT buttons below the LCD screens in the channel sections PRINT Clickon PRINT Then pressing SELECT below any LCD in the channels sections will cause an image of the GUI displayed to be printed provided that the cursor is already in that screen The selector then reverts to the normal SELECT function PRINT must beclicked on again to print a second or further GUI SELECT Default function setting for the SELECT buttons below the LCDscreens in channel sections This print output function requires the system to be configured with a Postscript compatible printer MONO MEANS Sets the destination LS when for a mono signal is selected at the Monitor panel CENTRE Mono signal fed to the Centre LS LEFT amp RIGHT Mono signal fed to both the Left and Right LS MODES for COMMUNICATIONS BUTTONS There are three button modes foreach of CUE SLATE and TBACK as below Click on the buttons to the right of these labels accordingly e Press andhold e Press foron and press again for off AUTO Combination mode Press andhold for a momentary function or short press to latch and another short press to release LEVEL BOOST Click on AFL or SOL
343. name in the pop up and its input and output willbe connected simultaneously The I O device names will be displayed inthe second and third fields and the actual device name will be displayed inthe fifth scribble field Selecting INSERT at the INPUT CHANNEL amp INSERTS panel will display the device name in the dot character display Once actioned as a Fast Insert the assignments to the other fields can be edited or set up on an individual basis as follows INSERT SEND Second field The second field is used to specify an I O destination for the selected channel Insert Send Click on this for the pop up displaying possible destinations Figure A shows analogue destinations DACs Click on the desired DAC number to assign a Send Fora digital output click on AES for the list of digital destinations Further pages of related pop ups can be accessed by clicking on lt or Click on OFF to disable a Send RANGE Acontiguous range of Insert Sends can be assigned simultaneously To assign a set of consecutive Insert Sends to anumber of consecutive outputs channel Insert Sends 1 4 feeding DACs 5 8 as an example e Click on the field below the INSERTS button of Channel 1 for the assignment pop up shown in Figure A e Click on RANGE and its characters turn white Click on the lowest number of the DACs required 5 in this example and ithighlights red Click on the highest number of the DACs required 8 inthis example and DA
344. names SSGs Sends etc pop up LINE Line Inputs names pop up M T Multitrack Return Inputs names pop up INSERT Insert names pop up INSTR Instrument names pop up MIC Inputs EXTSRC External Source names pop up 5 35 Chapter 5 Control Screens sueeJog SueeJog G 5 2 Channel Screens FAST INSERT pee SS en DIT PREFERENCES GUI FAST INSERT I O set up page layout General This allows the setting up of Send I O Return I O and Electronic Scribble names for devices used via Channel Inserts The preset FAST INSERTS are accessed via the channel I O GUI Setting up FAST INSERT I O Each of the 40 blocks in the GUI has 4 clickable fields as follows The following description applies to Mono Inserts Stereo Inserts have an additional field since there are left and right audio paths NAME Upper field Click on the upper field for a pop up to name the insert device to be assigned This name will appear in an 8 character display at the Input Channel amp Inserts panel when the Insert function 15 selected Click ona suitable name already in the list or select NEW ENTRY and use the QWERTY keyboard to type in anew name of up to 8 characters Press ENTER when finished 5 36 Chapter 5 Control Screens INSERT SEND Second field The second field is u
345. namics section for the GATE EXPANDER COMPRESSOR and LIMITER functions Back lit legends above each meter indicate which particular Dynamics sections are switched into the signal path The IN button below the window selected to DYN on the Input Channel amp Inserts section can be used as a master in out switch for the whole dynamics section Stereo Meter Lower centre Not operational in this version The two meters between the two columns of IN buttons indicate audio levels within the process currently accessed A back lit arrow will point to the appropriate IN button The Meter switch functions are as follows INPUT Push Button Switches the meter to read the input of the accessed process OUTPUT Push Button Switches the meter to the process output O METERS HOLD Push Button Fixes the meter to the process accessed at the time Once selected the meters will not follow further access functions until METERS HOLD 15 released Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 21 suonduoseg 9 saideyo suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 6 2 Channels Section Panels pec s a es 6 22 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions The Dynamics Area GATE EXPANDER COMPRESSOR LIMITER SIDE CHAIN EQUALISER The names of these functions appear in small display windows on the panel By pressing the ACCESS button to one side of the window control of that function is assigned t
346. nce 15V Short Circuit Tolerance e Indefinite in all modes Appendixes A 1 1 sexipueddy Specifications I 8 Ch Analogue LINE Outputs Output Type Electronic Servo type Maximum output level into a balanced load 24dBu Maximum output level into an unbalanced load 20dBu Equivalent Source Impedance 1009 Output Balance 20Hz 20kHz lt 46dB 0 5 Minimum Destination Load 300Q Frequency Response e 48kHz Sample Rate 20Hz 20kHz 0 2dB Output Noise lt 104 dBfs Distortion 20Hz 20kHz e dBfs lt 90dBfs 20Hz 20kHz 0 005 THD N e 50dBfs lt 120dBfs Crosstalk Between Outputs 20Hz 0kHz lt 100 dBfs A 1 2 Appendixes System Signal to Noise Performance Since the internal architecture of the OXF R3 is 32 bit with a dynamic range of greater than 190dB in general the system signal to noise ratio is almost entirely dependent upon the noise performance of its sources Currently the conversions from analogue to digital and back are the most critical stages The OXF R3 has two types of converter module 4 and 8 channel units The more comprehensive 4 channel type have slightly better performance than the 8 channel units Although the gain control resolution is 1dB the analogue stages are switched in 6dB steps The 1dB steps are achieved in the digital domain thereby amplifying the noise of the converter stages accordingly This means that the greatest d
347. nd Titles TRACK LIST 1 SCRIBBLES LOAD IMPORT TRACK LIST 1 TRACK LIST 2 PRINT TRACK LIST 2 FLOOR TOM CRASH SYMBOL RIDE SYMBOL KIT O HEAD LEFT KIT O HEAD RIGHT I Co Pro SAX SOLO 1 SAX END CHORUS sse wes resonans peores screen SCRIBBLE TROMBONES L TROMBONES R KX88 L KX88 R PROTEUS L PROTEUS R KURZWEIL KURZWEIL R GIRL INTRO VOX LEAD VOX 1 LEAD VOX 2 B VOX LOW HAR MID HAR B vOX HIGH HAR B VOX FALSETTO END HARMONY GUITAR PICKS PROPHET 5 DAD PERCUSSION L PERCUSSION R HIGH HAT 2 SNARE UNDER CHIMES BLOCKS TRACK LISTS page displaying entries for a 48 track machine Track Lists page in general This page displays two columns with up to 24 entries in each This allows track lists for two machines simultaneously or different tracks on the same machine in each column Tracks 1 24 and 25 48 for the same machine are shown as an example in the illustration The vertical scroll bars are used to scroll the track lists on machines with more than 24 tracks To select a Track List The system holds two independent Track Lists TRACK LIST 1 and 2 Click on the heading banner to alternate between them 7 46 Chapter 7 Session Management To select a Machine The two track lists may be assigned to Machines MT1 and MT2 Click on MT to alternate between them To name Tracks To name or edit a Track designation highlight the actual
348. nel 5 Select for the first of the new tracks 2 Make sure is selected on the Select To 6 On the Input Channel amp Inserts panel select Faders panel fire up default MULTT and its large button in one of the eight windows Repeat for other bounce tracks 3 Atthe Routing panel select The and buttons will be de selected automatically T Select the on the channels to which the so that the channel output is no longer routed to the bounce is routed for a monitor signal for those Main Output Bus tracks 4 At the same panel select the destination tracks 8 Set the monitor level for the new track s required for the bounce in the ROUTE TO TRACKS section Fader and Pan settings will be 9 The original balance will be bounced down to the retained L to odd numbered tracks R to even selected multitrack tracks Repeat steps 1 to 4 for other tracks to be bounced down 3 28 Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 10 11 To Set Up Super Send Groups from Multitrack
349. neously The ability to have 48 channel faders and their related functions on view at all times is an advantage but everything can be operated from just one 24 fader channel bank and the centre section as in the more compact 24 C 0 design Use the following two diagrams for reference to identify each area as it is explained whilst reading through this manual Operation of the control surface can be split into 5 main areas USE OF FADER PAGING USING ASSIGNABLE SIGNAL PROCESSING SELECT TO FADERS FUNCTIONS SELECT TO PANS FUNCTIONS BUILDING SIGNAL PATHS Described in detail in Chapter 4 Sd et adie Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 3 e 3 1 The Control Surface I ARE eee HDE GOKOA opo0000000 n 000 Cue aubBaau OXF R3 Assignable Channel Areas eft hand assignable channel controls Right hand assignable channel controls 3 4 Chapter 3 Getting Started Chapter 3 Getting Started ofo C3 C3 IEJ C3 CH C3
350. ng the LS1 LS2 and LS3 light red in rotation Q 7 1 MON Push Button Selects the 7 1 output from the input to the Fold Down Matrix FOLDDOWN must be selected as a source in the EXT SOURCE section of the Monitor panel Its button must also be selected in order to monitor this signal Q 5 1 MON Push Button Selects the 5 1 output from the input to the Fold Down Matrix FOLDDOWN must be selected as a source in the EXT SOURCE section of the Monitor panel Its button must also be selected in order to monitor this signal LCRS MON Push Button Selects the LCRS output from the input to the Fold Down Matrix FOLDDOWN must be selected as a source in the EXT SOURCE section of the Monitor panel Its button must also be selected in order to monitor this signal ST MON Push Button Selects the STEREO output from the input to the Fold Down Matrix FOLDDOWN must be selected as a source in the EXT SOURCE section of the Monitor panel Its button must also be selected in order to monitor this signal MONO MON Push Button Selects the MONO output from the input to the Fold Down Matrix FOLDDOWN must be selected as a source in the EXT SOURCE section of the Monitor panel Its button must also be selected in order to monitor this signal O Push Button Selecting sets the individual LS Cuts into a phase reverse mode It will flash lighting orange Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 41 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9
351. nical Descriptions 6 77 suonduoseg eoiuuoe 9 Jeideuo I suonduoseg 29 9 6 3 Central Section Panels nnn es 6 78 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 1 8 Push Button Assigns Sends 1 8 to the control panel 9 16 Push Button Assigns Sends 9 16 to the control panel 17 24 Push Button Assigns Sends 17 24 to the control panel 6 Character Display s Indicates Send number or signal name defined in the Send Outputs page of the MASTER GUI see section 5 2 6 in Chapter 5 Q AFL Push Button s Sends the After Fader Listen signal to CR monitor LS Becomes destructive SOLO IN PLACE in Multi Format Calibration mode CUT Push Button s Mutes the signal post Level control IN Push Button Not operational in this version Switches in any processing elements selected using ACCESS ACCESS Push Button Selects MIDI pages one of 1 8 9 16 or 17 24 depending on which Sends page is selected The MIDI GUI is selected from the SENDS GUI which is found in the MASTER GUI TONE Push Button Enables Tone from the oscillator to be injected into a Send output post the level control in place of signals routed to that Send The oscillator must be switched on at the Oscillator section before the Send TONE button will function STEREO Push Button Links its odd even pair of SENDs as a stereo output so that AFL CUT and level functions are g
352. ns Cause the Cursor to jump one screen left for each press Move Cursor Right Push Buttons Cause the Cursor to jump one screen right for each press Action Push Button Press to action the function or button beneath the cursor or cause a pop up be displayed where appropriate Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 89 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 9 6 4 Meter Bridge The standard meters used on the Meter Bridge of the OXF R3 are a bargraph type utilising back lit LCD technology with digital scales 6 4 1 Mono Channel Meters REC
353. ns hierarchy to reach this point Refer to the Screens Structure diagram in Chapter 5 for detailed information on the screen page hierarchy 2 Onthe SYSTEM screen page click on SYSTEM SHUTDOWN on the right side of the screen if it is displayed 3 If SHUTDOWN is not displayed click on the User field for a pop up and click on ADMIN Enter the admin password default is admin in lower case and click on OK The field which includes SYSTEM SHUTDOWN will then appear in the right side of the screen Click on it A dialogue box will appear on the screen to request confirmation of Shutdown and ask if current work should be saved Press on the Control Keyboard or click on OK 4 The console now shuts down and power to the control surface can be turned off but the STIF and UNIX windows on the Host Computer monitor remain 5 On the Host Computer place the mouse cursor in STIF window and Type exit case sensitive then press RETURN It is important to switch off the power to the control surface for a minimum of 10 seconds before attempting a re start 6 Fora re boot turn on the power to the control surface again and follow the Start Up Procedure in the previous section from step 11 Fora complete power down continue with step 7 in this section 7 shut down the Host Computer place the cursor in the UNIX window and Type su case sensitive which stands for superuser then press RETURN 8 At the passw
354. nsfer via network connections This is set up using the PREFERENCES GUI described later in Chapter 7 Compatibility between variants of the same S W release level Automation data is compatible between variants at the same revision level according to the Automation Compatibility Table below Automation Source Data To DMSK R3096 96Ch To DMSK R3072 96Ch DMSK R3096 96Ch Mono Channels 1 72 Compatible Compatible Mono Channels 73 96 Compatible Compatible Mono Returns 97 120 Compatible No Destination Channels DMSK R3072 96Ch Mono Channels 1 72 Compatible Compatible Mono Channels 73 96 Compatible Compatible Mono Returns 96 120 are Reset to Defaults OXF R3 Automation Data Compatibility Table 1 Automation data created using earlier S W versions There are major differences in the V3 0 system structure compared to V2 1 and earlier The OXF R3 now has an 8 wide 7 1 Main Output Bus whereas it was previously stereo There are a great many other changes too However many controls will match exactly and will be compatible Where for example new control objects exist in V3 0 the system will be set to the boot up default Where within automation data from earlier versions a multi channel mix exists using the multitrack stem facility the MAIN WIDTH will be set to match the stem width This is because the Main Output Bus is now the monitor path fo
355. nt to Effects amp Foldback Busses Pans panel Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 1 3 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 suonduoseg 9 6 2 Channels Section Panels pe cs unas ite SS win con 6 14 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions Q AFL Push Button Sends AFL signal to monitor LS for whichever level function is assigned to the knob at the time Q CUT Push Button Mutes the signal assigned to knob When a pan function is assigned CUT becomes the pan in out switch A pan setting is cleared by CUT Q RECORD Push Button Switches its related track on multitrack machine into record Can be armed only if either its SEND or RET monitor switch has been selected SEND Push Button Selects the channel signal being sent to M T as monitor source May be controlled from tape remote master SENDS push button see section 6 3 3 RET Push Button Selects the return signal being received
356. ntrols signal output level for its Super Send Group 6 Character Display Indicates Send Group number or signal name as defined in the MASTER page which is available on any of the Channels LCD screens AFL Push Button s Sends After Fader Listen signal to CR monitor LS CUT Push Button s Mutes the signal post Level control SSG Level controls and buttons are linked as a fire up default These controls can be optionally un linked according to settings in the Config File set up M T Push Button s Routes its SSG output to routing for bounce down The SSG button must be selected to gain access to channel routing buttons for track assignments Then select one or more buttons in the ROUTE TO TRACKS section at the Routing panel MAIN Push Button s Routes its SSG output to feed the MAIN L R output busses The SSG button must be selected to gain access to channel routing buttons Then select one more of the surround routing buttons in the MULTI FORMAT section at the Routing panel IN Push Button s Switches its SSG Insert into the signal path Refer to Chapter 5 for details of SSG Insert I O assignments ACCESS Push Button s Assigns SSGs to the routing panel TONE Push Button s Enables Tone from the Oscillator to be injected into its SSG output post the level control in place of signals routed to that SSG The oscillator must be switched on at the oscillator section before the SS
357. o audition the 4 At the Foldback Groups 1 4 section located in the balance central Monitor panel adjust the LEVEL pot for a suitable level in the headphones Make sure Note isnotlit Use the T B F Back 1 buttonto Send Masters 19 and 20 are assigned to Stereo Foldback talk to the artist s O P 2 21 and 22 to Foldback 3 23 and 24 to Foldback 4 2 The bus level itself which defaults to unity gain At the Select To Faders panel select or can be adjusted using the central faders On the Pressing either will light both Select To Faders panel SEL section select and adjust Fader 17 or 18 Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 23 e paners 3 10 Basic Console Operations 3 10 6 To Equalise Signal Feeding the Multitrack H alm ala du 0 L ac nc mno ino iuo mio E g U g U g U go 1085
358. o busses can be accomplished in several ways Using the MULTI FORMAT section buttons at the top of the panel which are mapped onto the track buttons stem by stem Using the ROUTE TO TRACKS buttons directly A mixture of the two above to multiple stems ROUTING SELECTIONS for the ACTIVE STEM The Active Stem is the one selected and lit in section Selecting a single button in the MULTI FORMAT section The track button one of 1 48 mapped in the stem set up to the one pressed will light and a Post Fader signal will be fed directly to that track The M T button is not operational Selecting two buttons in the MULTI FORMAT section The track buttons two of 1 48 mapped in the stem set up will light and a Post Fader signal will be fed directly to those tracks Selecting the M T button will allow panning between those tracks using the PAN in the Multitrack panel or the Definable knobs one above each fader The full range of the PAN knob is operational between the tracks whilst the Motorised Joystick will be mapped to the shortest path If the Joystick is moved out of that path it will spring back when released The JOYSTICK EN button must be selected in the centre section for the Joysticks to be operational 4 44 Chapter 4 Signal Paths Selecting more than two buttons in the MULTI FORMAT section The track buttons from 1 48 mapped in the stem set up will light and a Post Fader signal wi
359. o the right of the ARTIST PROJECT banner to cycle through Artist Projects one by one SNAPSHOTS list The Snapshot names are listed against the column of numbers to their left The list can be stepped through using the 4 and on the Control Keyboard or scrolled through using the scroll bar to the left of the numbers column NOTES column The column to the right of the names allows individual Notes to be made for each Snapshot Click in this column or highlight and press level with the appropriate name for its notes pop up Type in the notes and click on Or press on the Control Keyboard An icon will then be displayed in the NOTES column against the snapshot CONTROLS Column These columns indicate what any particular Snapshot consists of ALL ALL is displayed if a Snapshot of the complete system has been stored CHs CHs is displayed if all or some channels have been stored as a Snapshot CH0 CHO indicates that a single generic channel has been stored It has no relation to any previous channel snapshots hence CHO This is useful as a setting for a particular instrument type for example CEN is displayed to indicate that a Snapshot includes the Centre Section settings INST Will always be displayed indicating that the installation set up has been stored Command Dialogue At the base of the screen the User Command Dialogue Line bar displays commands from the dedicated Control Keyboard and QWERT
360. o the six knobs at the top of the panel The following diagram shows an example in which the ACCESS button has been pressed for the GATE and its controls are now available on the panel It can be switched in and out of circuit by pressing the IN button The diagram also shows how as each ACCESS button is pressed the Free Assign area of the panel is assigned to the function selected By switching between ACCESS buttons the six knobs are being paged to control the different functions which are being accessed A dynamics page is available on the channel screens displaying the settings for each process and a graphical representation of the processing on that signal The IN button below the window selected to DYN on the Input Channel amp Inserts section can be used as a master in out switch for the whole dynamics section FREE ASSIGN AREA amp DYNAMICS THRESHOLD ATTACK J DYNAMICS GATE EXP COMP LIMIT RELEASE SSAYdNOO CC SS GATE IN gt Ono ACCESS EXPANDE ACCESS COM PRESS IN gt access LIMITER 5 Access S CEQ
361. odule 4 ADCs per module with separate Mic amp Line inputs 8 ADCs per module with single combined Mic Line inputs 4 DACs per module ideal for monitor output 8 DACs per module ideal for line output Digital I O MADI connected directly to the SP Rack AES EBU 4 stereo inputs and outputs per module SDIF 2 24 Timecode 9 Pin and Dash REC Ready General Features amp Functionality There are two versions of the OXF R3 They are both operable from the 24 C 24 or the 24 C 0 control surfaces However their hardware requirements and I O capabilities are different The following comparison table summarises the features functionality and hardware requirements of the two versions A 6 Appendixes Features DMSK R3096 96Ch DMSK R3072 96Ch Signal Processor Rack Signal Processor Cards 16 9 SPLink I O Interface Cards 4 Maximum 3 Maximum DMCC Memory Host Maximum Capacities e 512MB Minimum e 512MB Minimum e Mono Analogue Inputs ADCs e Mono Analogue Outputs DACs e Mono Digital Inputs AES e Mono Digital Outputs AES Mono Channels 96 Channels 96 Channels e Inputs e Mic Multitrack amp Line e Mic Multitrack amp Line e Channel Path Set up 8 Pick n Mix Processing Elements 8 Pick n Mix Processing Elements DMSK R3001 GML Option 5 Band Parametric
362. oi Figure _ store Figure CHANNEL INSERT pop ups 5 22 Chapter 5 Control Screens Figure CHANNEL INSERT pop up NAME Fifth field Click on the fifth lowest field to name the device inserted This name appears in an 8 character display in the Input Channel amp Inserts panel when the Insert function is selected A pop up appears asin Figure C Click on a suitable name already in the list or select NEW ENTRY and use the QWERTY keyboard to type in anew of up to 8 characters Press ENTER when finished Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 23 sueeJog saldeyo 5 2 Channel Screens Figure A M T GROUP FAST INSERT Figure B M T GROUP OUTPUT 5 24 M T GROUP pop ups Chapter 5 Control Screens Assigning M T GROUP INSERTS and OUTPUTS The 8 blocks at the bottom of the GUI entitled GRP each with 7 clickable fields including the title are used to set up the multitrack outputs and inserts FAST INSERT Upper field Clicking onthe upper M T GRP field gives access to the FAST INSERTS pop up Each selectioncan have a pre assigned input output and appropriate name These are setup viathe PREF Preferences GUI described later in this chapter Click on the desired devi
363. ojects amp Titles page MIXES Selects the Mixes amp Cues page SNAPSHOT Selects the Snapshots Copy and Link page ASSEMBLE Selects the mix compilation assembly field and the Mixes amp Cues page BACKUPS Selects system Back up functions SCREEN Selects pop up showing all available screen selections Click on any one to select it 7 9 MIDI Two aspects of MIDI are covered by the OXF R3 control of external MIDI devices on up to 16 MIDI ports via Free Assign Area controls in conjunction with MIDI GUIs and the display of Bars and Beats in place of timecode 7 9 1 MIDI Control Pages SEND OUTPUTS 1 24 STEREO ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS 55 hcoess ACCESS ACCESS ACCESSI 2 IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN XXX XX XIK XXX X XIX XXX X X X XX X XI XXXXXKXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX e 1 e e ex T L J X SELECT e is
364. ol selections All Link Groups can be viewed simultaneously with the aid of colour coding for each group LINKS DEFAULTS Click on the title banner above the channel defaults as shown in the GUI illustration above to view the LINK DEFAULTS Any channel linking operations will link the controls according to what is highlighted in orange in this field Click on the options to adjust what will be linked To link some channels 7 58 Chapter 7 Session Management QUICK LINK This is accomplished using the lower row of ACCESS buttons as follows Press and hold down the lower ACCESS button for the source channel ts ACCESS will light first red and then turn amber after half a second When it has changed to amber select the lower ACCESS buttons for the destination channels one by one In this case controls are linked and any offsets between knob settings are retained SHOW ALL LINKS Click on SHOW ALL LINKS to display all the current Link Groups simultaneously Each group has its own colour code SHOW CHANNEL LINKS When the ACCESS on a channel in a Link Group is pressed and held until it changes colour to amber the GUI switches automatically to indicate the channels in the group and highlight the sections linked The SHOW CHANNEL LINKS banner highlights red to confirm what is being displayed The indications in the channel numbers area are as follows Heading banner CHANNEL the channel number accessed G
365. om other mixes in the current or any other Title It is specified using the ADD LAYER GUI Click on to edit SNAPSHOT LAYER Yellow This type of layer consists of static data from any Snapshot but must have FM from and TO times specified It is specified using the ADD LAYER GUI Click on to edit UNDO and REDO Use the and keys on the Control Keyboard to undo and redo layers HIDE or DELETE Layers Click on any layer for a pop up Click on HIDE LAYER or DELETE LAYER as appropriate The data for a hidden layer will not have any effect on what is heard SAVE SAVE or SAVE MIX AS NEW on the Control Keyboard will collapse all layers into a single entity Chapter 7 Session Management 7 43 juewebeueyy uoisses 9 uolssas Ja dey9 7 6 The Session Management Screen Pages ____________________________ _________ ______________ _____________ Command Dialogue At the base of the screen the User Command Dialogue Line bar displays commands from the dedicated Control Keyboard and QWERTY Keyboard for confirmation before ENTER There are command line merge functions available alongside the GUI based assemble described previously MERGE command lines The merge mix automation data command lines allow specified parts of a saved mix or a snapshot setting to be merged into the current working mix The parameters which can be specified are which
366. ompressor and 2 band EQ to the Main Output Bus The controls for these functions are accessed using CEN ACCS L and CEN ACCS R buttons on the Monitor panel Character Display Displays the Main Output Bus active format Stereo LCRS 5 1 or 7 1 SHOW VALUE Push Button Allows the display of Master Fader gain loss in dBs on the 8 character display It switches on this function for all Centre Section Faders Automation Buttons Described in Chapter 7 6 3 2 This panel contains all the monitoring foldback metering and communications functions for the OXF R3 control surface together with a number of central control functions LLA TOR ETERS TO GROUPS FOLLOW MONITOR STATIC EQ A A B FILT EXT SOU RCES STEN 31 SLS XXXXXXXX SELECT MO
367. ons Menu options available using the softkey functions displayed at the foot of the Mixes amp Cues screen page are as follows A Selects the previous screen page SYSTEM Selects the SYSTEM screen page directly PROJECTS Selects the ARTISTS PROJECTS amp TITLES page SNAPSHOT Selects the SNAPSHOTS COPY amp LINK page ASSEMBLE Selects the mix compilation MERGE ASSEMBLE page TRACKS Selects the TRACK LISTS page OFFLINE Selects OFFLINE faders and cuts automation edit page SCREEN Selects pop up showing all available screen selections Click on any one to select it 7 39 Chapter 7 Session Management juewebeueyy uoisses 9 uoisseg 7 6 The Session Management Screen Pages 7 6 6 Merge Assemble Screen The MERGE ASSEMBLE GUI allows Mixes and Snapshots from any source to be merged with the current Working Mix Each bar in the GUI represents a Mix Layer and these may include additional Dynamic Layers MERGE ASSEMBLE 2 M KEYS UP TO KEY CHANGE 4 00 01 23 02 to 00 04 27 uM i IA EIU 00303300300 gt SAVE MIX AS_NEW oem system mixes ofFune eacus screen 1 00304300300 00305300300 MERGE ASSEMBLE screen General Timecode display This time line GUI displays the current Working Mix The Timecode display placed centrally at the top of the as a b
368. or 10dB gain change since the true figure is 40dB gain change in 20 8us 1 sample Full Channels Dynamics Section Threshold Ratio Range Attack Hold Release Gate 80 OdB 0 80dB 5us 2615 1011 10s 7 8 5 9ms Expander 60 OdB 0 80dB 0 26 104ms 10ms 20s 519us 519ms Compressor 60 OdB 1 1 Limit 519us 52ms 10ms 30s 52ms 3 1s Limiter 60 OdB 100us 500ms 50ms 30s 100ms 10s Gain Make up Soft Curves Compressor 0 24dB 5dB 10dB 15dB 20dB across Threshold A 1 4 Appendixes Full Channels Dynamics Side Chain EQ The 2 band side chain equaliser can be inserted in the Dynamics Side Chain alone the Signal Path alone both the Side Chain and the Signal Path Section Gain Frequency Q Slope Overshoot LF Peak 20dB 20Hz 1kHz 0 5 16 HF Peak 20dB 500Hz 20kHz 0 5 16 Main Outputs Dynamics Section Threshold Ratio Range Attack Hold Release Compressor 60 OdB 1 1 Limit 519us 52ms 10115 30s 52115 3 1s Gain Make up Soft Curves Compressor 0 24dB 5dB 10dB 15dB 20dB across Threshold Appendixes A 1 5 Specifications Rack System The I O system for the OXF R3 utilises a universal rack design to house both analogue and digital I O It may under certain circumstances be possible to mix analogue and digital I O modules in the same rack Each rack requires AC mains power Rack Modules Each I O rack contains
369. ord prompt Type the superuser password oxf r3 case sensitive is the default then press RETURN 9 At the prompt which follows Type shutdown h now case sensitive then press RETURN 10 Wait for the gt gt gt prompt to appear before powering down the Host Computer SP and I O Racks Chapter 2 Powering the OXF R3 2 5 H JXO 2 Chapter 3 Getting Started This chapter gives an overview of the control surface layout and functionality It also provides easy to follow step by step procedures for basic operations of the console These are designed to help the experienced operator become familiar with the OXF R3 within a short period of time Chapter 3 Contents hi 3 1 The Control 3 2 3 2 Fader Paging iti Seo rt 3 8 3 3 Assignable Channel Processing eese eee ee ee eren eren eene tnos tnae 3 9 S 3 4 Input Channel Equaliser and Filters eere 3 10 8 3 5 Free Assign Area and Dynamics 3 11 3 6 Multitrack Routing for Multitrack Super Send Groups and 3 12 RTE a E E E E 3 13 3 8 Select To Fader tentes etn 3 14 3 9 Select To entes eene attain stato
370. other than exactly one item from a list will clear all lists to the right of the list in question Selection System Use a Trackerball to select Projects Titles Mixes and Snapshots Toselect individual items click on them one at a time 2 To select a range of items Click on an item and keep the button pressed then move the cursor across the desired items to highlight them Hold down on the QWERTY keyboard and click on the items required one at a time To select a range click the first item then hold down on the QWERTY keyboard and click on the last To select all items in any column click ALL at the top of the column 4 To de select a multiple or range just click on a single item BACKUPS mes mes eiie xc PROJECT 1 IN MY LIFE PROJECT 2 FOLLOW MY DREAMS S 4 RECORDS TOO SOON TO KNOW FULL MOON GONNA BE ALL RIGHT HER PROJECT AT LAST HENLEY JAZZ FIRST TIME LOVE Y Y mmm e ee Project 12 restored Pau 4 Project 13 restored Ear Project 14 restored syst Project 15 restored rodr Project 16 restored WE Project 17 restored 555 sse eese wes pvarsnor jassewece remores screen BACKUPS screen displaying the Drives pop up Backup Restoreand Copy operations A Backup is when the source is the Internal drive and the destination for data is the Removable drive A Restore constitutes this procedure in reverse A Copy is when the source and d
371. ous mix A pop up will appear for anew name entry or press or click on OK for the next default name When a mix is saved so is the static position of the complete console If the mix is recalled at a later date everything will be completely reset to its previous static position apart from controls which were automated Their settings and movements will be referenced to timecode 7 19 Chapter 7 Session Management juewebeueyy uoisses 9 1 uoisses 7 5 Mixing Overview 7 5 6 To Automate Fader Moves The procedure to automate fader moves is very similar to cuts ABS TRM TO FADs must be selected on the SELECT TO FADERS panel to assign the absolute write and trim buttons to faders Make sure is the only button selected under the central LCD To start at the beginning of a Title move the highlight to the desired Title in the ARTISTS PROJECTS amp TITLES GUI and press LOCATE TITLE on the Control Keyboard To add fader moves to a mix which may already have cuts written highlight the mix and LOCATE ENTER Press the button above the fader and its red LED flashes indicating ready status To record fader moves from the very start press the WRITE button in the fader knob and the LED goes on solid Then roll the tape To record moves some way into the Title roll the tape before pressing WRITE To stop moves being recorded pre
372. ows the multitrack to be used in line for normal record remix work or on the side where a Ba B live mix requires a multitrack backup A separate stereo monitor bus is included specifically for monitoring Routing for Multitrack Super Send Groups amp Multi Format the multitrack when used in parallel with a live mix and Multitrack panels 3 1 2 Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 7 Sends There are currently 24 mono Sends that can be linked as odd even pairs set up at the SEND OUTPUTS 1 24 panel in the centre section to provide up to 12 stereos The levels to the busses can be set via the individual dedicated controls on the channels SENDS 1 24 panels for each channel individually Alternatively Sends can be assigned one bus at a time to the faders or assignable knobs PANs This allows a mix to an effect or foldback to be set up using the faders or a row of knobs on a console wide basis The source points for each Send can be set individually on each channel or on a console wide basis SENDS 1 24 X XXX XXX XIE XXXXXXXX SOURCE SELECT SOURCE FOR X X X X X XIX X X X X XIX X X X X XIX X X X X XI XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX u LE MS PATI WIS IX X X X X XIX X X X X XIX X X X X XI
373. p TITLES 00 00 54 07 Artist Project NEW ARTISTS PROJECTS SLOW DOWN RECORDS PROJECT 1 PROJECT 2 Title SLOW DOWN RECORDS FULL MOON BLAH BLAH OK YAH HER PROJECT HENLEY JAZZ User ADMIN DAD S FIRST NEW TITLES IN MY LIFE 00 06 13 21 00 10 34 07 FOLLOW MY DREAMS 00 11 02 23 00 15 45 09 TOO SOON TO KNOW 00 16 24 13 00 19 35 17 BLAH BLAH OK YAH 00 00 54 07 00 05 54 00 AT LAST 00 31 19 01 00 36 51 09 Sample Rate 48000 FIRST TIME LOVE 00 38 03 11 00 43 16 06 Assistant ___________ GONNA BE ALL RIGHT 00 25 33 14 00 30 32 02 Timecode Type PAL 25 Tempo Date 16 15 25 May 1999 ARTISTS PROJECTS amp TITLES screen page Upper left status block mm Displays the current Artist Project the current Title Up and User This must be done with the orange highlight If for any reason the orange highlight is in the Titles field use one of the Tab amp keys to the left and right of the up arrow ARTISTS PROJECTS field on the Control Keyboard to move it into the ARTISTS The ARTISTS PROJECTS field displays all available PROJECTS field entries according to the permissions of the current User To view Artists Projects entries above or below those currently displayed in the field use the adjacent Scroll The Titles belonging to the highlighted entry will be Bar or the 4 and cursor keys on the Control displayed in the TITLES field The highlight may be Keyboard moved to a differ
374. ple Rate Converters SRCs to be switched in and out on AES Digital I O SRCs are switchable in odd even pairs only for INPUTS INPUTS amp OUTPUTS It is not possible to select an SRC to an Output alone This because a clock signal must be extracted from a source outside the system and this is aquired from AES inputs The Softkeys for this GUI TOP Selects the top level LOGO screen 5 38 Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 2 6 MASTER GUI MAIN OUTPUTS MAIN OUTPUT 1 MAIN OUTPUT 2 5365 senos s exrsnc MASTER GUI layout This GUI allows assignment of MAIN OUTPUT BUS 4 separate outputs MAIN BUS INSERTs General The MAIN OUTPUTS GUlIallows assignments of all master bus outputs theirinserts and external monitor inputs etc A numberofpages can be accessed using softkeys atthe bottom ofthe screen The Softkeys for this GUI TOP Selects the top level LOGO screen SSGS Super Send Group Outputs amp Inserts SENDS Send Outputs SCRIBBLES Control Group amp Talkback Scribbles S EXTSRC Stereo amp Multi Channel External Sources MONITORS Control Room Monitors Studio LS F back T back amp Oscillators Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 39 sueeJog SU99J9S OIJUOD G Jaydey9 5 2 Channel Screens DAC 212 MAIN A 5555 senos s
375. pressing it or allowing it to time out then use the or C buttons either side of the 8 character display to step through stems A H 6 Multitrack busses are used as Multi Stem master busses and must be selected as part of the set up The system must be unlocked to assign the multitrack busses To assign the L channel for example press and hold the button and it lights 7 Step through the multitrack busses using the SELECT TRACK and buttons until the desired bus number is displayed in the 2 character display above the button This track has then been assigned for the L channel for the Stem one of A H indicated in the 8 character display The track button in the ROUTE GUI will display a colour coded outline indicating that it has been assigned to a Stem 8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 for the other busses required in the current Stem To assign busses for another Stem make sure that is lit by pressing it or allowing it to time out Then use the or buttons either side of the 8 character display to step through Stems A H to the one which is required Then repeat steps 6 and 7 for each of the busses required in that Stem Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 33 sued euis Jeydeyo 4 13 Multi Stem Set up p AC E_E E E E E a _ _ To Clear any Busses set up Stems As an example to clear the bus set up as the C channel 9 Press and hold the button and it lights 1 0 Press the SELECT TRACK and buttons simultan
376. pshot SAVE via the GUI Click on in the Snapshots GUI for pop ups with more comprehensive options which include ALL Saves Snapshot of the complete system CHs Saves a Snapshot of all the Channels or specified channels depending on what has been selected using the pop up A GENERIC channel save can be specified which is useful for specific instrument settings It will be labelled CHO in the Snapshots list CEN Saves a Snapshot of the Centre Section INST Saves a Snapshot of the Installation set up the INST set up is always saved A combination of a number of CHs and CEN is possible Click on pop ups in the GUI to select the items to be stored in the Snapshot Further options include where the Snapshot is to be stored The columns under the CONTROLS banner indicate which sections have been saved for any particular Snapshot Snapshot LOAD via the GUI Click on in the GUI for the load sequence pop up The load options are similar to the save options ALL Loads Snapshot of the complete system provided the Snapshot to be loaded is from an ALL save CHs Loads a Snapshot of all the Channels or specified channels depending on what has been selected in the defaults pop up CEN Loads a Snapshot of the Centre Section INST Loads a Snapshot of the Installation set up If CHs is selected in the Snapshot LOAD then a selective load of less than a whole channel is possible The Snapshot
377. put A 22 a a am m zm m gt 2 m zu oz am zx n v D 2 lt o 5 D 0 m 2 m 77 22 a rom m a 77 m o 92 rom BZ norm oz gt mo zc 2 LI Oo um mz SUPER SGs 1 8 GROUPs SGs 9 16 GROUPs ABS amp TRM TO CUTs SELECT L GROUPs MASTERS a GROUPs 17 24 ABS amp FADs SELECT R MASTERS 22008 880 0 GROUPs es c a 0 CHANS Push Button Sets the faders in the channels sections to control the level of the Channel Outputs to the Main Output Bus Make sure this button is selected 4 26 Chapter 4 Signal Paths MULTITRACK GROUP TRIM zl XXXXXXXX SOURCE XXXXXXXX INSERT IN FORMAT E
378. puts and 448 Outputs per System Type Maximum Maximum Number of Modules by Type Analogue In 128 32 4 ADC Units 16 8 ADC Units Analogue Out 128 32 4 DAC Units 16 8 DAC Units AES EBU In 56 Stereo 4 Inputs amp Outputs on same module AES EBU Out 32 Stereo 4 Inputs amp Outputs on same module TC 9P MIDI Video 1 1 GPI In Out 12 1 Includes 48 Tracks of Dash Record Remotes MAD I In Out 112 2 Connections Direct to SP Rack Each I O Rack can have up to a maximum of 56 Audio Inputs and Outputs analogue or digital Dimensions amp Weight Equipment Width Height Depth Weight 24C24 Control Console 2516mm 1046mm 1215mm 382 kg 99 1 41 2 48 842 16 3 oz 24 0 Control Console 1620mm 1046mm 1215mm 221 kg 63 9 41 2 48 487 Ib 4 oz Signal Processor Rack 480mm 670mm 600mm 60 kg 19 26 5 15U 23 7 132 lb 4 oz Analogue Digital I O Rack 480mm 315mm 455mm 25 kg 19 12 5 70 18 0 55 lb 2 oz 17 Appendixes sexipueddy Specifications Supplied Accessories OXF CP3048 Control Panel Power Cable Operation Manual OXF SP3000 SP Rack PCII F Cable Power Cable 103000 I O Rack Power Cable DMSK R3 3096 Digital Console Software Software Disk License Agreement X2 DXT Xl Xl Xl 1 Product Identities Model Number Model Name OXF CP3024 Sony Control Panel OXF CP3048 Sony Control Panel OXF
379. r 3 Getting Started 5 Or press SEND to selectthe signal from tape 6 Open the Main Fader and turn up the CR Monitor level 7 Use the Channel Fader to adjust monitor level via the Main Output Bus 3 10 5 To Set Up a Stereo Headphone Mix for Foldback 1 O P ee a 05292995 955959959 LILILT ETE oo EXE ES E C31 OCGA oO a ws es Seo ofo adn oo 000 cuc EIE L gt nj n au 9 90 00 101010101 OJo Po
380. r 4 Signal Paths STEM monitor switch functions SENDS Push Button s Selects the sources being sent to tape for its stem or stems and inter cancels with RETS RETS Returns Push Button s Selects the return signal from tape for its stem or stems and inter cancels with SENDS In Multi Format Mode the SEND and buttons for channels assigned as Stem masters also inter cancel SOLO Push Button s Solos its stem or stems CUT Push Button s Cuts its stem or stems Stem monitor switching hierarchy The monitor switching is controlled top down allowing the flexibility of local overrides at the slave channel level Pressing either or on the remotes panel in order to change the monitor source will re synchronise slaves on the first press if any channels have been overridden locally A subsequent press will cause the monitor source to change The same principle applies to the master buttons in the GUI described in the next section 4 13 5 Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 49 jeubis 19 4 13 Multi Stem Set up 4 13 5 Stem Monitor Switching GUI Set up LJ remove D Lug oo gt __ roo __ ________ __ From OXF R3 LOGO page click on M STEM to view the MULTI STEM SET UP GUI Assigning Stems using the GUI Any of the Stems
381. r AES I O Outputs RET AES Alias names for AES I O Inputs MT Alias names for MADI Multitrack Returns NEXT Further pages of ADCs DACs AES amp MADI I O 5 94 Chapter 5 Control Screens MT SCRIBBLES 1 9 2 M T 10 DEN 18 GUITAR 26 MIT 3 m M T 27 pom M T 35 MT 4 FOHS R 20 M T 36 5 m 13 21 MT 23 MT 37 m 6 m 14 MIT 22 M T 30 m 7 15 m 23 m M T 33 6 m 16 BASS D 24 PIANO 32 E Ee PREFERENCES GUI MULTITRACK SCRIBBLES page layout Select DIALOG at the PREFERENCES GUI General The majority of I O assignments can have names associated with them which may be displayed on GUIs andelectronic scribbles This GUI allows customisation ofthe scribble name pop ups allowing frequently used pre set names to be listed and edited NAME Lower field Click on this to display a pop up Enteraname of up to 6 characters using the QWERTY keyboard Press ENTER when finished The Softkeys for this GUI TOP Selects the top level LOGO screen MORE Further page for naming scribbles MIDI TRACK amp GROUP MAIN Main Output
382. r an alternative User Passwords This field is generally set to NORMAL for legal may be entered by Users New passwords are automation operation but allows a NON LOCKING required to be entered twice a second time for option This option may be used where full machine confirmation synchronisation lock up may not be possible 7 28 Chapter 7 Session Management TIMECODE FORMAT Displays the current timecode format Click on it for a pop up to set an alternative timecode format For the system to function correctly the TIMECODE FORMAT selected here must match the incoming timecode IMPORTANT MACHINE CONTROLLER Displays the current Machine Control mode Click on to select an alternative from e MOTIONWORKER STANDARD MOTIONWORKER PERFECT NONE TIMECODE CHASE ONLY SELECT CURSOR Displays the current cursor format Click on it for a pop up to select an alternative RELOAD DATABASE This function is only available to User ADMIN and is not used during normal operation It allows the database to be re loaded from the system hard drive SYSTEM SHUTDOWN This function is available to User ADMIN only and must be confirmed via a dialogue pop up SAMPLE RATE The Sample Rate must match the incoming word clock IMPORTANT NOMINAL RATE Displays the current selected Sample Rate Click on for a pop up to select an alternative ACTUAL RATE Displays the Actual Rate of the incoming word clock MODE Displays t
383. r stem mixes The monitor path used to be via SSGs V3 0 Automation Data and systems using earlier S W Loading automation data created on a system using V3 0 into a system using an earlier version such as V2 1 is not defined and therefore cannot be supported Chapter 7 Session Management 7 7 juewebeuey uoisses 9 5595 7 4 Programme Material 7 8 Chapter 7 Session Management As described previously creating a title will require the user to enter start and end points as times It is assumed that the programme material is available on a machine tape recorder hard disc etc which is connected in such a way as to be able to locate to cue points and to execute normal functions such as play or roll back under the control of the automation system It is also assumed that the machine will inform the automation system of its current position e g by timecode while it is playing The machine may in fact be multiple tape recorders locked by synchronisers or a single hard disc machine This makes no difference to the operation of the console automation system 7 5 Mixing Overview 7 5 1 Getting Started The Session Manager Screens illustrated in this section are displayed on the LCD Control Screen in the centre section of the OXF R3 console The Mixing Overview is intended as an abbreviated guide to enable an experienced operator to start mixing as quickly as poss
384. ration between two locations which could be anywhere in the world so long as an ISDN link is feasible A simultaneous two way link allows changes at either end to affect the audio mix automation and machine control at the other PREFERENCES SESSION AUTOMATION POINTER DIAGS NETWORK SYSTEM STUDIO REMOTE STUDIO 1 MODE DISABLED RSL Remote Studio Link screen General The operation of RSL involves one studio which will be called the Primary System P S in running the source material from a multitrack system on tape or hard disc system The mix can be monitored locally and must be fed to the remote studio or Secondary System S S via a high quality external audio communications system The two way control link via ISDN will cause the settings in the P S to be mapped exactly to the remote S S The current title on the P S will apear in the titles list on the S S along with its cues All the transport commands such as PLAY TITLE PLAY CUE Quick Rollback work as normal on the S S Automation moves in the P S will be displayed on the S S New automation settings can be created on the S S using Audition 7 1 08 Chapter 7 Session Management Mode The new S S settings will be visible on the P S but can only be written using the P S Set up via an ISDN line allows near real time operation for the S S MASTER STUDIO CLIENT STUDIO Manual Control Movements Session Data Automation Data
385. red stem destination The button will light and its button in the ROUTE GUI will turn red Buttons A H inter cancel The system can be configured via the Config set up file so that routing selections for the current Stem are cleared automatically on selection of another Stem MULTI FORMAT Routing Buttons The surround routing buttons are laid out in the form of a surround sound LS layout Only those consistent with the format selected in the master section will be operable They are assigned to buttons in the ROUTE TO TRACKS section in the Multi Format set up When a surround routing button is selected it lights and so does the track button which is assigned to it in the set up The ROUTE GUI reflects this operation too by highlighting both buttons in red Q ROUTE TO TRACKS Routing Buttons Allow routing selections direct to Tracks independent of whether a Track is assigned to a Stem Definable Knobs Pan is the fire up default for the Definable Knobs indicated by being lit on the SELECT TO PANS panel This allows control on a channel by channel basis for L R pan settings for Stereo and L C R for surround modes Touch Sensitive Motorised Joystick Panner Any signal routed to two or more busses can be panned using one of the joysticks one at each side of the control surface The joysticks are assigned according to channel buttons They work in tandem with the pan knobs on the MULTITRACK panel and the L R Pan above the fa
386. replaced with AFL The Oscillator is locked out as is the Slate function REHEARSE Push Button Latches a relay closure for the Rehearse signal A further press unlatches it RED LIGHT Push Button Latches a relay closure for RED LIGHT signal A further press unlatches it CUE Push Button Enables a momentary relay closure to send a CUE signal SLATE Push Button Sends talkback to all normal destinations and additionally to the channel Group outputs Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 53 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 9 6 3 Central Section Panels SOLO AFL PFL SOLO SOLO CANCEL 6 54 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions Solo AFL amp PFL Modes SOLO Push Button Sets the channel fader SOLO buttons to destructive SOLO IN PLACE mode Stereo AFL continues to operate for all buttons designated as such AFL After Fader Listen Push Button Sets channel fader SOLO buttons to a non destructive AFL mode Other AFL buttons continue as normal PFL Pre Fader Listen Push Button Sets channel fader SOLO buttons to non destructive PFL mode Other AFL buttons continue as normal CANCEL Push Button Cancels any latched SOLO or AFL buttons SOLO INTER
387. restored rodr Project 16 restored WE Project 17 restored sss BACKUPS screen Backup Restoreand Copy procedure This procedure applies to specified files 1 Ifa Backup is being made to the Removable drive make sure an disk is inserted and that the drive itself is Mounted 2 ltis important to remember that if a Mix Title or Snapshot is to be copied the destination must have already been created i e a copy of a Title must have a suitable Project available and a Mix requires a Project and a Title Click on NEW to create a PROJECT or TITLE 1 Select the desired drives at the left side of the two rows 2 Click on the desired source files Any selection that has subordinate files such as a Title with Mixes will have all such files copied The background at the level to be copied will be highlighted so that the user is aware of exactly what will be copied Chapter 7 Session Management 7 99 juewebeueyy uoisses Jejdeu 1 uoisses 7 10 Backups TTT 3 Click on the desired destination file Again the background will be highlighted in the destination file area to make the user aware 4 Click on the Icon on the left side of the source row to action the Copy If for any reason the transaction cannot be completed a pop up will appear explaining why Note 1 Whilst the Copy is in operation an ABORT button appears in the left hand column between the drive b
388. rol Signal from the next channel to the right A set up using 1 and 2 above creates a stereo dynamics section 3 Repeat 1 and 2 above on further channels as desired For correct operation elements such as GATE COMPRESSOR etc must switched in on each channel involved in this type of group Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 1 9 1 5 y 4 11 Dynamics Side Chain Linking 4 11 2 Dynamics Side Chain Busses 1 4 CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 1 CONIROL CHANNEL 1 INPUT OUTPUT CONTRIBUTION TO SIDE CHAIN GROUP SC TO G1 SIDE CHAIN CHANNEL 1 CONTROLLED BY SIDE CHAIN GROUP SC FM G1 CHANNEL 2 po CHANNEL 2 GAIN CHANNEL 2 lt gt INPUT CONTRIBUTION TO SIDE CHAIN GROUP SC TO G1 CHANNEL 2 SIDE CHAIN MAX CHANNEL 2 CONTROLLED BY SIDE CHAIN GROUP SC FM G1 CHANNEL 3 CHANNEL 3H GAIN CONTROL CHANNEL 3 INPUT OUTPUT CONTRIBUTION TO SIDE CHAIN GROUP SC TO 61 SIDE CHAIN CHANNEL 3 CONTROLLED BY SIDE CHAIN GROUP SC FM 61 CHANNEL 4 CHANNEL 4 H GAIN roles CHANNEL 4 INPUT CHANNEL 4 OUTPUT CONTRIBUTION TO SIDE CHAIN GROUP SC TO G1 CHANNEL 4 SIDE CHAIN CHANNEL 4 CONTROLLED BY SIDE CHAIN GROUP SC FM G1 Block schematic to illustrate the switching for Dynamics Side Chain Bus 1 Dynamics Side Chain Busses 1 4 in general This function allows any channel to f
389. rround routing assignments set by the buttons in the MULTI FORMAT section of the ROUTING panel The buttons that are operational at any one time depend on the format set in the centre section see Chapter 4 for details They set assignments for the Main Output Bus or the M T Busses depending on whichis selected on the SELECT TO FADERS panel But note that assignments to M T Busses are possible only if at least one stem has been assigned to the M T Busses see Chapter 4 for details If is lit the assignments for the Main Output Bus are displayed and changes can be made using the buttons on the ROUTING panel or using a Trackerball and associated buttons If is lit then these buttons display Stem assignments for the current stem Stem buttons A H These buttons in the lower section of the GUI inter cancel and select which stem the 8 buttons in the LS layout are assigned to To avoid routing the same signals to multiple stems there is an automatic clear option so that when a new stem is selected assignments for the previous stem are de assigned Alternatively they can be cleared manually allowing assignments to multiple stems See the STEM CLEARING option in the section for the PREFERENCES GUI later in this Chapter Routing buttons 1 48 These buttons reflect routing assignments to the Multitrack or M T Busses Press any button on the ROUTING panel to make an assignment The output of the Send Fader controls the level If
390. rs are ARTIST PROJECTS TITLES and MIXES The level for MIXES may also contain CUES TRACK LISTS SNAPSHOTS and NOTES relating to the current TITLE see the following file structure diagram Refer also to the Screens Structure diagrams in Chapter 5 Control Screens REMOVABLE MEDIA INTERNAL DRIVE NETWORK ARTISTS PROJECTS TITLES Files Structure Chapter 7 Session Management 7 3 juewebeueyy uoisses 9 5 9 Ja dey9 7 2 Files Hierarchy and Automatable Controls ee 7 4 Chapter 7 Session Management ARTISTS PROJECTS Are the headings for the jobs in progress e g session album or show Associated with the project will be further information such as details about the session producer engineer etc TITLES Represent specific sections of programme material a track on an album for example or a scene in a show Creation of a new title implies defining a START and END time for the programme material e g against SMPTE timecode in the case of a present day tape recorder Once a TITLE has been defined it can be used for control of the programme e g PLAY TITLE ENTER in addition to being the reference as regards data storage START and END times can be re defined at any time MIXES A MIX is a specific performance of a title Each mix contains all the data necessary to play the title all its automated moves and all static settings including the
391. rs to be slaved A maximum gain of 10dB can be added to a channel using a Control Group Use the same procedure to release slaves except that once the Control Group ACCESS has turned amber and its slave ACCESS buttons are lit un latch the slaves as required Nested Control Groups Control Groups can be slaves to other Control Groups without limits except that they must have hierarchies Circular routes are blocked They are set up using their buttons in exactly the same way as channel faders are set as slaves 6 3 6 Control LCD Screen Panel Contains a 10 4 inch colour TFT LCD VGA screen It displays major System Set up details and all the Session Management information relating to dynamic automation including screens for Projects Titles Mixes Snapshots and Track Lists etc a A SELECT TO AUTO TO GLOB TOP HOLD END 50 READY READY READY ABSOLUTE TRIM CANCEL ROLL AUD TOUCH 160 AUTO AUTO E mon BUTT ON Control LCD Screen panel Push buttons x 8 Allow screen pages to be selected as indicated on labels within the screen area above each button SELECT Selects the cursor to t
392. rt Dynamics Pre Multitrack Send H alm ala du 0 L eio 000009 O ac ino iuo mio E OO O O O 0 g U g U g U go 1085100 100 m 4 3 26 Press for the desired Channel At the Input Channel amp Inserts panel select MULT in window number 5 using the and buttons either side Select its large button to insert the multitrack into the signal path At the same panel select DYN in a window before window 5 window 4 for example and select the large button to insert the dynamics processor into the signal path before the multitrack
393. rwards in one step Individual channel UNDO To undo automation actions for an individual channel press and hold for that channel then press UNDO All automation data for the last pass will be removed from any controls that were automated Repeat for other individual channels UNDO operations for individual channels cannot be reversed using REDO How to modify cuts using READY TRIM Note Although it is often easier to rewrite cuts rather than modify them the following online functions are available Offline adjustments can be made using the OFFLINE CUTS GUI 1 Ready Trim enable the cuts to be automated with the central button or Ready Trim enable the cuts using the local method described at the beginning of this section 7 15 Chapter 7 Session Management juewebeueyy uoisses 9 5 9 Ja dey9 7 5 Mixing Overview 2 Press GLOBAL DROP IN either before or after rolling the tape to drop all ready enabled cuts into automation record or press switches individually 3 Press GLOBAL DROP OUT after writing cuts and then READY CANCEL followed by to hear the result The bi colour LEDs in the cut switches help with the operation of these functions The red light indicates manual actions and amber those being performed by the computer Extra bright red amber indicates simultaneous manual and computer control Toaddanewcut Adding a
394. s scs PREFERENCES screen General The PREFERENCES GUI gives access to a number of options available previously in the system config file To access this GUI press the softkey below SCREEN at the right hand side of the central LCD A pop up list will appear Use the 4 on the Control Keyboard to highlight PREFERENCES and NER To access a preference move the cursor over the appropriate tab in the upper part of the GUI using a Trackerball Click on the tab using the activate button by the Trackerball Preferences are changed by clicking on the A and arrows Where a YES NO decision is required clicking on either will change the setting whereas numbers are incremented and decremented according to the direction of the symbols Each entry line in the GUI has a DEFAULT button which is only displayed when other than the default has been selected Click on this to obtain the system default setting Chapter 7 Session Management 7 1 01 juewebeueyy uoisses 9 5 9 7 11 Preferences P J ast 7 102 Chapter 7 Session Management SESSION Tab AUTOSAVE INTERVAL Sets the interval from to 60 minutes between Autosaves of the working mix Saves will occur only if there is new data which has not been saved AUTOSAVE ENA
395. s It is important that the I O racks are switched on in the sequence of the Sync Clock wiring loop connected to the clock inputs of the I O Racks 5 The Host Computer performs its start up and self test routines At the end of these routines a triple chevron prompt gt gt gt should be displayed on the monitor Type b then press to start the boot up process for the OXF R3 system If your Host Computer has been configured for Auto boot an option at set up the triple chevron prompt will not be displayed and boot up will proceed automatically 7 At the end of the boot up procedure the Login field will be displayed on the monitor Now switch on the power to the control panel All 7 LCD screens will show activity as programs are downloaded from the Host Computer to the computers within the console When downloading is completed an X is displayed in the centre of each screen 9 Log in at the Host Computer Note that the user name and password below are the system defaults Type sm case sensitive then press RETURN Type in the password oxf r3 case sensitive then press RETURN 1 oxf r3 is the default password This may be changed but its modification must be carried out with help from Sony personnel 2 Login can be initiated while programs are still being downloaded from the Host Computer It is not necessary to wait until all the console LCD screens are displaying X in their centres 10 Once log
396. s See illustration Global Touch and Audition keys GLOBAL DROP IN Key Causes all controls in automation ready status both ABS and to drop in to automation write GLOBAL DROP OUT Key Causes all controls in write to drop out of automation record returning to automation ready status Film Mode allows the system to be set up so that GLOBAL DROP IN and GLOBAL DROP OUT are operational on all controls except Faders Cuts and Pans see section 7 7 9 READY CANCEL Push Button Causes all controls in automation ready status both ABS and TRM to drop out of ready back to safe Any controls in write mode will not be affected To record absolute moves for a number of faders 1 Select ready ABS on the faders and their red LEDs flash They can be selected individually or in banks of 24 For a bank of 24 faders on the Select to Faders panel press and hold the bank button for example until it turns amber and then press an button on one of the faders The ABS LEDs for the whole bank of 24 then flash indicating ready ABS status 2 The faders can be dropped into write individually using their fader Write buttons or by touch in Touch Write mode To drop them all into write simultaneously use the GLOBAL DROP IN key on the Control Keyboard This works in Touch Write mode as well But remember that if a fader is touched it will drop out of write when released Press the but
397. s amp Cuts MAIN Main Fader ALL NONE Used in channel selection RANGE Used in channel selection To set the duration Data editing has to be within time constraints The time can be specified in three ways FM from Enter FM and TO The DURATION is set automatically Enter FM and DURATION The TO time is set automatically Enter TO and DURATION The FM time is set automatically The FM and TO times can be entered either directly by clicking on a timecode field for a pop up or by using cue times Enter a cue time by highlighting that cue in the cues list then click on the bar below the FM or TO legends to transfer the time The cue time will be entered and its name displayed If a timecode set by using a cue is subsequently altered the cue name will disappear To nudge times with the keys on the Control Keyboard click on a timecode field for a pop up then nudge as required For faders the transitions can be set as butt or ramp Click on the butt icon for it to change to ramp and vice versa Click on the ramp time for a pop up to set the ramp time In and out ramps can have different times OFFLINE FADERS EDIT PROCEDURE To select Faders For Channel Faders click on CHANS in the selector block It highlights red and the channel faders are displayed in the numbers field Click on the channels to be worked and they highlight red Click on them again to de select This procedure also applies to MTSEND
398. s the fire up default of Stereo will be assumed 3 10 1 To Route a Mic or Line Input to the Main Output Bus 00 000 009919 1905 91000109 0 oOo Hoo g U 00000000 00000000 00000000 Bo opo oOooOjoo 00000000 009000000 09000000 00000000 1 Press for the desired Channel 2 At the Input Channel amp Inserts panel press either or as requ
399. s always the user will be prompted to save it If any changes are made to any un automated controls the STATIC DATA flag will highlight this If the user tries to load another mix a pop up will ask if this data should be saved even though it is for static controls To delete a mix highlight the mix in the MIXES field then select DELETE MIX ENTER on the Control Keyboard Alternatively select ENTER A confirmation prompt will appear Click on the right hand column or highlight and press on the Control Keyboard for the NOTES pop up related to the mix on the same line To edit a Mix name Highlight and click on the name or press on the Control Keyboard to display a pop up dialogue box Type in a name using the QWERTY keyboard and press or click on OK To re order a Mix entry Click on its number in the left hand column for a pop up Overwrite the current number using the numeric pad on the Control Keyboard and press or click on OK The list will re order itself Partial Loading of Mixes This function allows the loading of specified channels or parts of channels according to the SNAPSHOT DEFAULTS Select the SNAPSHOTS COPY and LINK GUI to view SNAPSHOT DEFAULTS see section 7 6 8 All the following command lines apply to the currently highlighted mix in the MIXES amp CUES GUI Commandlines The commands for loading Partial Dynamic Mixes are all carried out using the Control Keyboard see section 6 3
400. s will always operate on whatever function is assigned to the Faders via the SELECT TO FADERS panel 4 13 Multi Stem Set up MULTI STEM in general Recording a stem works in much the same way as recording a mono or stereo signal to multitrack The differences are having surround sound panning instead of stereo and the Main Output Bus which is used as the monitor path must be set to a suitable surround format MTSEND FADER QU B S lt DO LC a MG INPUT CHANNEL GAIN 0 PROCESSING S E e A ij Sy Cin SOURCE CHANNELS MULTITRACK BUSSES Selected as STEM S According to Requirements MASTER SEND RETURN CHANNEL GROUP RECORDER MONITOR FADER SWITCHING gt i RECORD CHANNEL PROCESSING CHANNEL MATRIX STEM MASTERS ON SELECTED CHANNELS Usable as SOURCE CHANNELS too UNITY GAIN MAIN BUS 8 Busses EXT SOURCE mone ct Ti 51 LCRS 8 MON MON MON CUT CUT CUT N L L C L CUT 1 5 8 mI IS DIM CUT MONITOR VIA MAIN BUS Simplified signal path illustra
401. sed to specify an I O destination for the selected Insert Send Click on this for a pop up displaying possible destinations Click on the desired DAC to assign an analogue Send or fora digital output click on AES for the digital destinations Further pages of related pop ups can be accessed by clicking on Prev or Next Click on OFF to disable Send INSERT RETURN Third field The third field is used to select the I O Insert Return source for the channel Click on this fora pop up displaying possible return sources Click on the desired ADC for an analogue return source or click on AES for the digital return sources Further pages of related pop ups can be accessed by clicking on or Click on OFF to disable a Return WORD LENGTH Fourth field The fourth lowest field allows the insert Send and Return word length to be set if the insert device is digital Click on it to cycle through the word lengths 16 bit 20 bit and 24 bits It will be set for both send and return simultaneously Although the word length field is operable when analogue I O is selected it only affects digital T O The Softkeys for this GUI TOP Selects the top level LOGO screen Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 37 sueeJog 9 19 dey9 Jeideuo 5 2 Channel Screens DECUS sias NAE ee AES SAMPLE RATE CONVERTER SETUP GUI General This GUI allows Sam
402. shot on the SNAPSHOTS page A dialogue pop up will appear in order to make the user aware of which Snapshot will be overwritten as well as allowing the command to be cancelled Press SNAPSHOT ASNEW ENTER to make a new Snapshot and a pop up appears displaying a new default number which may be changed to a suitable name With this command the screen automatically switches to the SNAPSHOTS COPY and LINK GUI Select the key or click in the pop up to save the Snapshot To edit a Snapshot name Highlight and click on the name or press on the Control Keyboard to display a pop up dialogue box Type in a name using the QWERTY keyboard and press or click on OK To re order a Snapshot entry Click on its number in the left hand column for a pop up Overwrite the current number using the numeric pad on the Control Keyboard and press or click on OK The list will re order itself In this case although the pop up has a button cancelling affects only the naming process and the new Snapshot is always saved SnapshotLOAD using the dedicated keys Press LOAD SNAPSHOT ENTER to load the currently highlighted Snapshot Using the dedicated keys to load a Snapshot always loads the original complete Snapshot DELETE using dedicated keys Press DELETE SNAPSHOT ENTER to erase the currently highlighted Snapshot on the SNAPSHOTS page A pop up will appear allowing the command to be confirmed or cancelled Sna
403. sion Management CENTRE SECTION Selector The following buttons are for centre section settings and apply only to Snapshots SENDS Send levels and cuts MISC Send tone and stereo settings T O Send I O settings SSGS Super Send Groups levels and cuts MISC Super Send Groups inserts Super Send Groups I O settings GROUPS Control Group Faders CUTS Control Group Cuts MIDI MIDI Set up Pages 1 24 MAIN PROC e Main Fader I O Dynamics and EQ settings CEN MISC Talkbacks Foldbacks Monitoring and Metering SNAPSHOTS Snapshots can be saved and loaded by two basic methods using dedicated keys on the Control Keyboard or clicking on buttons in the Snapshot GUI The first method is the faster but is restricted to Snapshots of the whole system in the current title whilst the second allows full access to all Snapshot files with selective loading Channels can be selected down to individual component sections and controls according to the SNAPSHOT DEFAULTS A single channel can be used as a source for any number of destination channels Snapshot SAVE using the dedicated keys The most convenient way to save a Snapshot is by using the dedicated keys on the Control Keyboard This functions irrespective of the screen currently displayed Using the dedicated keys to save a Snapshot always saves a full console wide Snapshot Press SNAPSHOT ENTER to overwrite the currently highlighted Snap
404. ss WRITE again and the LED flashes If the moves are over just part of the Title then the exact position at the drop in point is assumed to the beginning Exactly the same fader level will also be applied to the end of the Title from the automation drop out point From then on the fader will snap back for the duration of the whole Title To take the setting after the last move to the end of the Title select under the central LCD To revise any moves just roll back and play again The moves from the previous pass will be displayed until the WRITE button is pressed once more The motorised fader will reflect previous moves unless the fader knob is touched Even when it is touched the previous moves will still be heard until WRITE is pressed when the absolute fader positions and moves will be heard as well as recorded Press again when recording moves for a fader is finished to make it safe It is also possible to press to drop out whilst the tape is rolling To record moves with TOUCH WRITE select beneath the central LCD and then if Ready is selected just touching the fader knob will write moves In the event of a mistake just roll back and try again The WRITE button in the fader knob is still operational in TOUCH WRITE 7 20 Chapter 7 Session Management 3 8 5 7 4 6 2 Fader controls Touch sensitive fader knob Automation Write button Q Yello
405. t DEFAULTS in the Snapshots GUI Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 69 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 suonduoseq jeoiuuoe 9 Jadeyo 6 3 Central Section Panels pee ee Se ey 6 70 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions Removes the moves data from the working mix for a range of channels for controls according to the Snapshot DEFAULTS in the Snapshots GUI see page 6 65 for details of how to specify Ranges and Lists MERGE Command Lines Comprehensive control of MERGE functions is available via GUI and is described in Chapter 7 MERGE command lines require ranges and or lists to be specified see page 6 65 for details of how to specify Ranges and Lists Mix data can be copied and pasted in the working mix or imported from other mixes Snapshot settings can also be merged into mixes The MERGE Command Line has the general form Source Range List from Specified Start Time to Specified End Time to New Specified Start Time Times can be specified in various ways CUE CUE or typed in using the numeric keypad on the Control Keyboard Where timecode is typed in a blank _ key must be used between numbers as a separator Examples 1 48 MIX CUE 3 CUE 6 CUE 9 ENTER Adds a new automation layer to the working mix that copies all the moves for channels 1 48 between Cue 3 and Cue 6 to repeat starting at Cue 9 1 2 SNAPSH
406. t steps 1 to 6 for further channels Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 29 peuels e paners geideuo 3 10 Basic Console Operations 3 10 12 To Set Up a De Esser Using Dynamics Side Chain EQ H oh O 0051605 iona 90000919 ollo o 009109 1505 0 0 m 000 g U 1 Press for the desired Channel 5 Now de select SIG EQ and select S C EQ to affect just the side chain signal 2 At the Input Channel amp Inserts panel select DYN in one of the eight w
407. t the METERS selector in the centre section monitor panel causes the channel meters to monitor the audio level in the digital domain post the channel input gain control stage METERS selector in the METERS METER PER central Monitor panel m fc d SED gt TAS CH INPUT PEAK PEAK ER SEND RETURN gs su ts QUIZ NC cu 5 CH Q Y e o ol MIC x OUTPUT GAIN Spee ____ CHANNEL Ste Seca Ne ND ee EE FADER CHANNEL INPUT OVERLOAD Channel metering Channel Meters to Input Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 1 5 y 4 10 Channel Metering _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 4 10 3 Send Monitor Selecting the button at the channel record remotes causes the Meter to take its source from signal being sent to tape indicated by the yellow S legend at the top of the Channel Meters CH INPUT SEND RETURN E amp h NU MAIN 67 1 PAN CH output DYN E fall CHANNEL FADER SEND POUTING 66
408. tape is rolling Switches can be put into write individually as they are pushed they will change state simultaneously Roll the machine with its remote and perform the switch actions Check which switches are being automated To check which switches have been set up for automation press master READY ABSOLUTE and just those switches in ready or write will flash When the tape is in play READY ABSOLUTE has a momentary action To revise any switches To revise any switches roll back and play again The automated switch actions will be replayed They will illuminate amber indicating control by the automation system 7 76 Chapter 7 Session Management Nothing will be overwritten until GLOBAL DROP IN is pressed once more or switches are pressed individually when they will drop into write and change state simultaneously GLOBAL DROP OUT may be used to drop back to a safe Ready state at any time To finish After pressing GLOBAL DROP OUT to drop all controls out of automation record select READY CANCEL to make all switches safe will work only for switches in a Ready state Switches in automation write will not be affected Switching manually when automation moves are present Once automated switch moves are safe the switches can be operated manually at any time The highest priority is given to manual operation which although it will override automation will not overwrite the autom
409. ter 4 Signal Paths Monitoring the multitrack To listen to the stereo Multitrack Send Monitor Bus select M T MON at the Ext Source section of the Monitor panel in the centre section This is a dedicated internal monitor bus designed specifically for use when making a parallel multitrack recording alongside a stereo mix To set up a monitor balance select at the Select To Faders panel and use the channels section faders The default monitor source is the Main Output bus Selecting M T MON at the Ext Source section allows direct comparison of the Multitrack Monitor mix and the Main Output bus mix The SEND and urn Ready Monitor switching on the control surface functions in the normal manner in Broadcast Mode 4 10 Channel Metering The Channel Meter sources are set automatically according to the functions in use in the channels 4 10 1 Channel Meter Default The fire up default for the Channel Meters is pre fader as illustrated in the following diagram This is denoted on the OXF R3 by the red legend at the top of the Channel Meters CH INPUT SEND RETURN pa PAN onu t 02 1 6091 CITE HC Ea J UNSERT 4 ich output MIC 83558 Y Sasso CHANNEL INPUT OVERLOAD CHANNEL FADER Channel metering Default 4 10 2 Channel Meters to Input Selecting MTRs TO INPUT a
410. the Panis switched in then the L output feeds odd numbered busses and the R feeds the even Stems A H which utilise groups of M T Busses and can be up to 7 1 wide are setup via the centre section see Chapter 4 for details When stems have been set up the tracks they have been assigned to are distinguished by colour coding of their outside borders There is a different colour for each stem They are automatically mapped to the buttons laid out in the form of a set of surround LS at the top of the GUI So for example if track 35 is assigned as the Centre track for a stem just press the button and the track 35 button lights too Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 9 sueeJog 9 SueeJoS 9 5 2 Channel Screens 5 10 Chapter 5 Control Screens Assignments made to tracks which are not set up as part of astemcan be routed as normal taking the output from the surround panner L to odd numbered tracks and to even Super Send Group SSG buttons 1 16 These buttons at the lower part of the GUI just above the Stem buttons A H indicate assignments to the 16 Super Send Groups The 8 SSG buttons onthe ROUTING panel labelledas 179 2 10 3 11 and so on They operate for SSGs 1 8 or 9 16 depending on whether SUPER SGs 1 8 or SUPER SGs 9 16 is selected in the centre section Since SSGs may be grouped they are colour coded in a similar way to
411. the drop in point i e when the knob is pressed becomes the null point for any trimming moves 3 When the moves are complete press the PAN knob to drop back to ready indicated by the green LED flashing again then press READY CANCEL on the panel below the central LCD to drop out completely 7 78 Chapter 7 Session Management 7 7 8 Automation Off and Selective Automation Isolate 4 SELECT WRITE TOUCH HOLD READY READY ABSOLUTE TRIM CANCEL GLOB TOUCH ISOL AUTO TO AUTO TAKE END OFF C GLOBAL DROP IN OIE REDO ALL C OOOO COICOICOICO MOCO gt GIO Automation Off and Isolate set up buttons Automation Off AUTO OFF Push Button Press to isolate automation control of the whole console setting all controls to a static mode when they can be freely adjusted In other words even though automation moves have been recorded the controls
412. this GUI TOP Selects the top level LOGO screen MASTER Selects the top level MASTER screen 5 48 Chapter 5 Control Screens Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions This chapter provides descriptions of the OXF R3 system including the location and function of all elements of the system The control surface layout and functions are described in detail For details of the signal flow in the OXF R3 system refer to the Signal Flow Block Diagram in Chapter 1 Overview Chapter 6 Contents 6 1 OXF R3 System Description 6 2 6 1 1 Control Surface Configurations 6 3 6 2 Channels Section Panels ccccccscscsssssssccscccssssssecsccccessssscceccecees 6 6 6 2 1 Rader Panel terne 6 6 6 2 2 Select to Faders Panel essere 6 9 8 622 3 Pans Panel ds 6 13 5 6 2 4 Select to Pans Panel 6 15 6 2 5 Input and Equaliser Panel esee 6 17 S 6 2 6 Free Assign Area amp Dynamics Panel 6 20 8 6 2 7 Multitrack Panel seen 6 25 5 6 2 8 Routing Panel 6 28 6 2 9 LCD Channel Screen Panel eere 6 31 9 6 2 10 Sends 1 24 Panel essere 6 32 2 6 3 Central Section Panels Leere eee ee eene eee reete eese tese eren a 6 38 6 3 1 Mast
413. ting the components for mixing to the Multi Channel Main Output Chapter 4 Signal Paths 4 29 4 13 Multi Stem Set up INPUT CH amp INPUT CH amp INPUT CH amp INPUT CH amp INSERTS INSERTS EQ amp EQ amp DYN ETC DYN ETC INSERTS EQ amp DYN ETC DYN ETC INDIVIDUAL LS TRIMS IN CALIBRATION MODE SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND PAN PAN PAN MULTI FORMAT MULTI FORMAT MULTI FORMAT MULTI FORMAT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 di 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 e D Q ww E
414. tively use the A and keys on the Control Keyboard to move the highlight and ENTER Other softkeys are not used on this screen page Chapter 7 Session Management 7 27 Q D 9 ay Co 9 5 5 D 3 D 3 5 9 7 6 The Session Management Screen Pages 7 6 2 The System Screen The SYSTEM screen allows the set up of various parameters most of which are session related The cursor is able to indicate which fields can be edited by changing shape or direction according to which cursor type has been selected as it is moved around the screen SYSTEM Date 25 May 1999 RELOADDATABASE Time 15 14 User ADMIN SYSTEM SHUTDOWN TIME DISPLAY TYPE TIMECODE MACHINE LOCKING NORMAL TIMECODE FORMAT PAL 25 SAMPLE RATE MACHINE CONTROLLER MOTIONWORKER Perfect NOMINAL RATE 5008 ACTUAL 48000 SELECT CURSOR BANANA TEE eet pese oes Trenes SYSTEM screen page Date The pop up also allows projects to be assigned to Displays today s Date which is set automatically Users or deleted from their accounts This operation may be carried out only by the User ADMIN Time Displays the current Time which is set automatically TIME DISPLAY TYPE Click on to select either Timecode or Bars and Beats User Displays the current User name Click on it for a pop MACHINE LOCKING up to select or ente
415. ton before letting go to continue to have data recorded To revise moves roll back and play again then press GLOBAL DROP IN at the right time As for all write functions the user can rewind and stop the tape before going into write mode 7 67 Chapter 7 Session Management juewebeueyy uoisses 9 5 9 Ja dey9 7 7 Dynamic Automation Moves OUCH WRITE TOUCH AUTO TO TAKE END READY READY ABSOLUTE CANCEL AUD MON 22 5 1501 AUTO AUTO BUTT RAMP ISOL OWA COKC ICOICO Ol CANCEL REPEAT Global Touch and Audition keys To take all faders out of write mode press GLOBAL DROP OUT on the Control Keyboard and then READY CANCEL below the central LCD to make the faders completely safe Totrim moves for a number of faders To trim moves for a number of faders put the desired faders into ready TRM individually or in banks of 24 as described
416. ts for channels 1 5 See page 6 65 for details of how to specify Ranges and Lists LOAD TITLE ENTER or LOAD TITLE ENTER Loads the appropriate CUES list for the currently highlighted TITLE or one specified by number LOAD MIX ENTER or LOAD ENTER Loads the currently highlighted MIX or one specified by number into memory Auto Saved mixes can be loaded as above MIX 0 is the most recent whilst MIX 1 and MIX 2 are earlier Auto Saves Ranges and Lists can be specified when loading Mixes 1 5 MIX ENTER or LOAD 1 5 MIX ENTER Loads the currently highlighted MIX or one specified by number according to SNAPSHOT Defaults for channels 1 5 See page 6 65 for details of how to specify Ranges and Lists PLAY Command Lines PLAY ENTER Plays from the last locate point PLAY Timecode ENTER Plays from a timecode point which is entered using the numeric key pad Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 67 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 suonduoseq jeoiuuoe 9 Jadeyo 6 3 Central Section Panels a ee ee m SSS 6 68 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions PLAY TITLE ENTER or PLAY TITLE ENTER Plays currently highlighted TITLE or one specified by number PLAY CUE ENTER or PLAY CUE ENTER lays from the currently highlighted CUE or from CUE vu PLAY CUE 3 CUE 4 ENTER lays from CUE number 3 to 4
417. ttings only COPY STATIC inter cancels with or it an be turned on and off when it returns to defaults USE MASK Push Button Sets Copy and Link operations according to the DEFAULTS in the SNAPSHOTS COPY amp LINK GUI see Chapter 7 for details EQ Push Button Limits Copy and Link functions to Equaliser A settings EQ B Push Button Limits Copy and Link functions to Equaliser B settings DYNAMICS Push Button Limits Copy and Link functions to Dynamics section settings inter cancels with EQ or EQ or DYNAMICS But EQ A EQ B and DYNAMICS can be used in any combination If and are on simultaneously the Filters are also included in Copy and Link operations OSCILLATOR 1 2 3 OSCILLATOR Section The Sine Wave oscillator source frequency and level are controlled from the definable knob above the CR Monitor level knob The frequency is variable from 20Hz to 20kHz and the level is variable between 70dB and OdB digital full scale in 1dB increments The default Oscillator output is OdB 1kHz The push button controls on the Monitor Panel function as follows Q ON Push Button Switches the oscillator on which also automatically sets monitor DIM on It can be switched off again if required TONE buttons in SSGs and Sends sections are inoperative unless the Oscillator ON is selected
418. uick Link or via GUI control Using the Quick method Copy and Link may be combined into a single operation that allows Copy and Link simultaneously Since Copy and Link functions can be performed together they will both be described in this section QUICK COPY Channels may be copied without using the GUI This is accomplished using the upper row of ACCESS buttons as follows Push and hold down the upper button for the source channel 7 54 Chapter 7 Session Management Its will light first red and then turn amber after half a second When it has changed to amber select the upper ACCESS buttons for the destination channels one by one This method is often quicker than using the GUI particularly for small numbers of channels The control settings copied in Quick Copy are set according to what is highlighted in the Copy DEFAULTS panel displayed on the COPY page Click on COPY in the banner at the top of the GUI to see the Copy DEFAULTS Quick Copy will copy static settings only Automation data must be copied using GUI operations QUICK LINK This is accomplished using the lower row of ACCESS buttons as follows Press and hold down the lower button for the source channel Its will light first red and then turn amber after half a second When it has changed to amber select the lower ACCESS buttons for the destination channels one by one In this case controls are linked
419. umber of faders 7 22 Mixing to main output bus block schematic of stereo and surround mix down 4 23 channel signal to the main output 4 26 clearing multitrack bus destinations 4 25 main bus to multitrack 4 25 main output bus set up 4 24 multi channel main output bus 4 22 routing stereo and surround panning in general 4 28 surround routing and panning when mixing to main output 4 27 Monitor panel 6 39 ancillary functions panel area 6 55 60 central stereo meters section 6 46 centre section meters 6 44 45 CR monitor section 6 40 43 external sources section 6 47 48 foldback groups 1 4 section 6 50 51 oscillator section 6 61 solo AFL amp PFL modes section 6 54 studio LS section 6 49 talkback amp listen section 6 52 53 Multi format buttons 3 12 Multi format LS calibration A 3 calibration procedure A 4 5 Multi stem set up 4 29 assigning stems using the GUI 4 50 automation switches for the motorised joysticks 4 46 block schematic 4 30 31 fold down matrix GUIs 4 52 monitor path 4 36 39 multi channel routing amp surround panning 4 42 43 multi format mode 4 44 45 other routing selections 4 45 routing and monitoring a signal 4 47 routing selections for other stems 4 45 routing selections for the active stem 4 44 set up procedure 4 32 34 source channels 4 40 41 stem monitor switch functions 4 49 stem monitor switch mapping 4 48 stem monitor switching 4 48 stem monitor switching GUI set up 4 50 stereo mode 4 44 sub level 4 47 Multitrack
420. uoe 9 Jadeyo 6 3 Central Section Panels sss ee ene E 6 84 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions Q SET M T STEMS Push Button Allows the format of the Multitrack Stems to be set STEREO LCRS 5 1 or 7 1 using the and buttons either side of the 8 character dot display which indicates the current format The SET M T STEMS function is locked unless has been pressed to unlock it first It inter cancels with the SET MAIN WIDTH button With SET M T STEMS set and lit indicating lock status the and buttons can be used to step through Stems A H indicated by the letter at the right in the 8 character display Set up settings relating to each Stem will be displayed accordingly in other sections of this panel Push Buttons either side of character display Enable the appropriate format to be selected for the Main Output Bus and Multitrack Stems depending on whether SET MAIN WIDTH or SET WT STEMS is selected must be pressed first to unlock the set up facility 8 Character Display Indicates the format selected STEREO LCRS 5 1 or 7 1 and stem one of L C R C R L S SUB and R S Push Buttons each with track number display These buttons combined with the and push buttons allow assignment of surround routing buttons in the MULTI FORMAT section of the Routing panel to the Multitrack Busses in order to set up Stems The set up proced
421. uration of the Title then the exact position prior to moves is assumed to the beginning of the Title The same fader level will also be applied after the last recorded fader move to the end of the Title From then on the fader will snap back for the duration of the whole Title To take the setting after the last move to the end of the Title select under the central LCD 1 Select ready ABS The red ABSolute write LED flashes 2 Press automation write in the fader knob The red LED lights solidly indicating that any moves will be recorded Press the Write button either before or after the tape is rolling Pressing the button once more drops the fader back to ready absolute indicated by the LED flashing again Pressing ABS will also drop out of record returning the fader to safe 3 For Touch Write latch beneath the central LCD Select ready so that the red ready LED flashes Then every time a fader knob is touched it will drop in to writing move data This will be indicated by the red LED lighting solidly for the touch period As soon as finger contact is released the LED will flash again To keep the fader in record just press whilst it is being touched Then when the finger is removed the red LED will still be fully on indicating data is still being written But remember that if the fader is touched again it will drop out of record when released unless is pressed and held whilst removing the finger The wr
422. ure is described in detail in Chapter 4 To make an assignment unlock LOCK then press and hold the desired destination L etc Step through the tracks with the and buttons until the desired track number is displayed in the two character display Release the destination button Press to re lock the set up or allow it to time out Push Buttons Combined with the buttons described in these buttons allow toggling through the Multitrack routing bus numbers in order to set up Stems using the Multitrack Busses Monitor Level Knob amp 8 Character Display Controls the overall level to the Control Room Monitor LS level when is not selected This control operates in parallel with the Monitor Level on the Monitor panel The 8 Character Dot Display indicates level setting in dB SPL including calibrated settings When is selected push and rotate to define a new calibration setting CAL MODE in the PREFS GUI must be set to ON in order that the calibrated settings are active indications are accurate only if the Calibration Procedure has been carried out as described in Appendix A 3 CAL Push Button Fixes the monitor level to the current calibration setting The knob is not operational when is selected DIM Push Button Dims all monitor LS outputs according to the dim level setting Operates in parallel with the button on the Monitor panel CUT Push Button Cuts all the Monitor LS outputs Operates
423. use will be stolen in all cases when the RANGE function is used To seta range of inputs to off Click on RANGE andits characters turn white and the background red e Click on OFF for a pop up displaying the channel numbers Click on the first and last ofthe range required NAME Lower field The lower field is used to enter an electronic scribble name Click on this to display a pop up as shown in Figure B Either click on a name in the listorclickon NEW ENTRY andusethe QWERTY keyboard totypeina new name of up to characters Press ENTER when finished Click on Track List at the top of the pop up to load the name in the Track List for Multitrack machines orMT2intheSessionManager These names assigned using the central LCD Click All Tracks to load the names for MT1 or MT2 These options are available only if one or more outputs from MTI or MT2 are actually assigned to inputs on the M T INPUTS GUI It is possible to load Track List names directly from the TRACK LISTS GUI This is described in Chapter 7 Chapter 5 Control Screens 5 17 sueeJog 9 Jeydeuo JOIJUOD G Jaydey9 5 2 Channel Screens Figure B LINE INPUTS pop ups 5 18 Chapter 5 Control Screens Assigning LINE INPUTS The middle 8 blocks entitled LINE each with 2 clickable fields and an indicator below are used for setting up LINE inputs INPUT Upper f
424. ut eene 4 15 4 10 3 Send Monitor mereerin rriren iiie 4 16 4 10 4 Return Monitor enne 4 16 4 10 5 MULTI in Channel Path eese 4 17 4 11 Dynamics Side Chain Linking c eeeeeeeeeeee eene tnus 4 18 4 11 1 Dynamics Side Chain Link Right 4 18 4 11 2 Dynamics Side Chain Busses 1 4 4 20 4 12 Mixing to the Main Output Bus e eere ee eren nenne 4 22 4 12 1 Main Output Bus Set up seen 4 24 4 12 2 Channel Signal to the Main Output 4 26 4 13 Multi Stem Set up Leere eee esee setae 4 29 4 13 1 Multi Stem Set up Procedure esses 4 32 4 13 2 Multi Stem Monitor Path sse 4 36 4 13 3 Multi Stem Source Channels 4 40 4 13 4 Stem Monitor Switching eene 4 48 4 13 5 Stem Monitor Switching GUI Set up 4 50 4 13 6 Fold Down Matrix GUIS eee 4 52 5 1 The Master Control Screens scccscssccssscsssscssccsscessescesesees 5 2 5 2 Channel Screens cccccccsssccssssssssssssscsscsscssssesessessesssseseesersesees 5 5 332 1 Routing GUI Ree tr enin 5 8 25 2 2 I Q GUI EER terti ie p ri debo edes 5 11 5 2 3 Equaliser amp Filt
425. utomation layer to the working mix that copies all the moves for channels 1 48 between Cue 3 and Cue 6 to start at Cue 9 MERGE SNAPSHOT 1 2 A B ENTER Adds new automation layer to the working mix that will switch to snapshot data at and back to existing data at for channels 1 and 2 MERGE MIX 01 032 2 01 Slides the moves on control group faders between 2 00 and 4 00 of highlighted mix to 2 01 on working mix 2 00 4 00 Menuoptions Menu options available using the softkey functions displayed at the foot of the Merge Assemble screen page are as follows A Selects the previous screen page SYSTEM Selects the SYSTEM screen page directly PROJECTS Selects the ARTISTS PROJECTS amp TITLE page MIXES Selects the MIXES amp CUES page SNAPSHOT Selects the SNAPSHOTS COPY amp LINK page OFFLINE Selects OFFLINE faders and cuts automation edit page BACKUPS Selects system BACKUP functions SCREEN Selects pop up showing all available screen selections Click on any one to select it Chapter 7 Session Management 7 45 jueureBeue v uoisses 5595 7 6 The Session Management Screen Pages 7 6 7 Track Lists Screen There are two independent Track List pages which are assignable to machines MT1 and 2 set up using the MACHINES GUI Track Lists can be imported from other Artist Projects a
426. utton lighting amber The other LS which are cut will light red De selecting MONO SOLO will resume normal operation including the previous LS Cut settings The Solo settings are memorised and will return if SOLO is selected again Definable Knob Controls a number of parameters as listed below LS2 LS3 The levels for LS2 and LS3 can be set independently relative to the LS1 setting which they track DIM Level TALKBACK Level LISTEN Level MAIN OSCILLATOR Frequency and Level for the general purpose tone source within the R3 system HEADPHONES Level Sets the Level for a separate Headphones output which is taken pre the Monitor LS level See Chapter 5 for assigning the Headphone output DIM Level Sets the output level of channels which not soloed when SOLO CHs UNDER is selected 8 Character Display Displays the current Definable knob function Push Buttons Select the Definable knob function MAIN Push Button Fixes the Main Output Bus as the source for all Monitor LS outputs FOLLOW MONITOR Push Button Allows LS to follow all monitor source selections including AFL signals Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 43 eoiuuoe 9 suonduoseq jeoiuuoe 9 Jaydeyo 6 3 Central Section Panels METERS AN 20
427. utton to remove unwanted background noises on a particular track or to cut certain passages at specific times The track may be cut at appropriate times and from then on the same operation should occur every time the same programme material is replayed From the above it can be seen that it is essential to have very flexible control over the automation system on an individual control basis To simply record every move and control action is the wrong approach More time would be spent subsequently sorting out what was to be kept compared to creating the mix in the first place During a single play of a music track many tens of balancing moves may be made with perhaps dynamic moves to be recorded on just a few controls other than faders This assessment of the engineer s requirements leads to the following system requirements for music mixing 1 By default the system assumes that automation of the static or balancing type is required As controls are moved the most recent values are stored and are applied throughout the duration of the programme 2 Controls may be set on an individual basis to be dynamically automated as required In this case the actual moves relative to programme time are recorded and played back on subsequent replays 7 2 Files Hierarchy and Automatable Controls 7 2 1 Files Hierarchy General Files Structure The automation data files are arranged in a traditional hierarchical manner The laye
428. uttons Click on this ABORT button to stop the operation Note ABORT is also available during the FORMAT operation 2 Whilst Backup operations are taking place a pop up gives details of the operation and its progress Command Dialogue At the base of the screen the User Command Dialogue Line bar displays commands from the dedicated Control Keyboard and QWERTY Keyboard forconfirmation before Menu options Menu options available using the softkey functions displayed at the foot of the Backups screen page are as follows Selects the previous screen page SYSTEM Selects the SYSTEM screen page directly PROJECTS Selects the ARTISTS PROJECTS amp TITLES page MIXES Selects MIXES amp CUES page SNAPSHOT Selects the SNAPSHOTS COPY amp LINK page ASSEMBLE Selects the mix compilation MERGE ASSEMBLE page REMOTES Selects the MACHINE REMOTES assignments matrix SCREEN Selects pop up showing all available screen selections Click on any one to select it 7 1 00 Chapter 7 Session Management 7 11 Preferences PREFERENCES SESSION 206 Power Dacs network AUTOSAVE INTERVAL 2 A v 1 80 MINUTES AUTOSAVE ENABLE VES OR NO AUTOSAVE STATIC CHANGES xu VES OR NO CANCEL KEY CANCELS CYCLES VES OR NO LOCK DISABLES FULL LOADS NS VES OR NO DISARI FS PARTIAL LOADS Ez ad i rewore
429. ve been used to automate the faders and cut buttons together with a small number of additional controls in order to record complex manipulations in synchronisation with the programme material This avoids the artistic result being limited by the engineer s dexterity memory and number of arms The OXF R3 console extends this concept in that all usefully automated functions can be controlled by the automated Session Management System During a typical music mixing session a number of tasks are being performed simultaneously The overall balance of the individual contributions is adjusted and many signal processing changes might be made such as equalisation or compression to achieve the desired sound from a particular set of sources These changes are static in nature for example the engineer may make a number of adjustments to an equaliser as the programme material is played listening to the result When satisfied the operator will stop moving the equaliser controls leaving them in the position which achieves this result The only setting or automation data of interest is the final position The audition moves are of no interest In other words the vast majority of control manipulations in a mixing session are of this static type At the same time as the balancing is being carried out some controls are being manipulated which do require to be replayed called dynamic automation moves An example would be the use of a cut b
430. verses the effect of UNDO commands one by one UNDO ALL Key Reverts all the way back to the last SAVE MIX command point REDO ALL Key Cancels the effect of the UNDO ALL key Ranges and Lists Channels Control Groups and the Main Fader can be specified in command lines for certain functions Ranges are specified with as a separator 1 108 Channels 1 108 01 032 Control Group Faders 1 32 00 Main Fader Individual items are separated by lt 2 4 25 Channels 2 4 and 25 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions 6 65 suonduoseq eoiuuoe 9 suonduoseq jeoiuuoe 9 Jadeyo 6 3 Central Section Panels 6 66 Chapter 6 Technical Descriptions Unlimited strings are possible in the same entry e g 00 01 03 05 08 1 24 48 56 65 Main Fader Control Group Faders 1 3 and 5 8 Channels 1 24 48 56 and 65 UNDO amp REDO for Static Settings Key used in conjunction with the key labelled SPARE 1 in the illustration C J on the Control Keyboard itself allows the undoing of static changes such as knob adjustments and button pushes Press and hold and then press to undo static changes one at a time Up to 256 static changes are held in memory Key Holding and pressing reverses the UNDOs one at a time for each press Key Holding ___ and pressing once removes all static changes in the memory Key Holding ____ and pressing once reverses the effect of the
431. view EON SNN Cp ANS ZENNY ZIANA LISTEN 5 STUDIO L S A lt FOLDBACK B 5 AUDIO ng CJ RACK i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i v 1 mi MOTIONWORKER PROTOCOL 1 TTL MASTER i PCM 3348 48 TRACK 4 lt gt 1 RECORD REMOTES amp TALLIES igi TRANSPORT 9P TRANSPORT 9P per I eene J SN Ex as gt ake TRANSPORT 9P TRANSPORT 9P soos ne i eM gt TC TC 1 7050 PCM 7050 Im PCM 9000 DAT MASTERDISC AES EBU lt gt TIME GODE CONTROL DATA AUDIO DATA oe O _ Studio Machine Room Chapter 1 Overview 1 5 Ja deyD 1 3 Signal Flow
432. w Touch LED Ready ABS Absolute Write button Red Absolute Write LED Ready Trim button Green Trim Write LED Bi colour Red Amber Fader Cut switch 7 5 7 Dropping Out of Write on Subsequent Mix Passes There are four ways to drop out of WRITE when dropping back to previous moves The buttons for these four modes are on the mid right part of the panel at the base of the central LCD SELECT READY CANCEL Central LCD Screen panel layout BUTT default Where jump occurs at the drop out point RAMP Where a user defined time is taken to slew to the previous move Set the time in MIXES amp CUES GUI AUTO TAKE Where the operator manually fades to the previous move TO END Where the fader position at the drop out point is recorded to the end of the Title for both absolute and trim functions These four buttons inter cancel but it is possible to use different modes on different faders This 1s achieved by working in one mode first and then rolling back to use another mode on other faders Different modes can be used on the same fader at different times TOP Push Button A related function allowing fader position to be recorded from an
433. w is a brief description of what control types each button will select Some of the controls such as Routing Switches are not automated dynamically but will be loaded as Snapshot Automation Each section below is annotated accordingly ALL Highlights All Channel Controls and I O CH I O Snapshot Channel Input sources and Output destinations with gain settings not channel insert INPUT Dynamic Mic Line and M T input selector and Phase switches PATH Dynamic 8 section Channel Path selector and IN buttons 7 82 Chapter 7 Session Management DYNAMICS Dynamic All Dynamics section controls F ASSIGN Dynamic All Free Assign Area controls currently just Delay in this version EQ Dynamic All Equaliser controls not Filters FILTERS Dynamic All Filter controls INSERT I O Dynamic Analogue or digital I O related to the Channel Insert SENDS Dynamic All Send levels their Pans and Cuts M T ROUTE Snapshot Multitrack Routing CH ROUTE Snapshot Channel Routing M T GROUP Dynamic Multitrack Group Cut and Trim M T MISC Dynamic Multitrack group monitor levels Pans and Cuts M T SND Dynamic Multitrack Send Fader CUT Dynamic Multitrack Send Cut switch PAN Dynamic Multitrack Send Pan setting CHAN Dynamic Channel Fader CUT Dynamic Channel Cut switch PAN Dynamic Channel Pa
434. y be set at between 1ms and 10s to a resolution of 1ms PRE ROLL bar The Pre roll time in seconds is displayed here When locating to a specific timecode point the machine parks ahead of that time by the value set in this field Highlight the field then click on or press on the Control Keyboard to obtain its pop up to set or adjust the Pre Roll time 7 35 Chapter 7 Session Management juewebeueyy uoisses Jeydeu 1 uoisses 7 6 The Session Management Screen Pages MIXES amp CUES RAMP TIME 9732 ms PRE ROLL 3 sec STATIC DATA TITLE BLAH BLAH OK YAH MIX RHYTHM FINE TUNE PARKED 22000 0 12 05 MEN MIXES amp CUES screen page Central largetimecode display Displays the current timecode for the master machine Automation status bar top right Indicates whether there is any static or dynamic data in the system memory that could be saved to the hard drive If the bar is blank then there is nothing to save STATIC DATA Indicates that some non automated controls have different static settings compared to the current mix and that those settings can be saved New 1 DYNAMIC LAYER PARKED New DYNAMIC LAYER Indicates that some unsaved automated moves are in memory The indicates how many layers have been made START TIME Located to the left of the large timecode display this field indicates the start time from w
435. y order and easily changed according to the task in hand Push Buttons Select the processor function into position in the signal chain but this will not be inserted and operational until the IN button is selected Step through them until the one required is displayed Press together to clear display 8 Character Display Indicates processor selection IN Push Button Puts the process displayed into operation Any processes in use may only be re ordered or de selected whilst their IN buttons are not lit i e whilst the process is out of the signal path Currently available processes and functions FILTERS EQ DYNAMICS MULTITRACK INSERT DELAY and FADER The FADER is automatically placed at the end of the bottom right block at the channel output unless it is selected in one of the blocks It need be selected only if for example Dynamics is required post fader EQUALISER amp FILTERS SECTION Equaliser and Filter parameters can be displayed on Channel Screens High and Low Pass Filters FREQ Knobs Set the turnover frequencies SLOPE Push Buttons Set dB Octave 6 36dB in 6dB increments LF Push Button Switches the high pass filter in out Hr Push Button Switches the low pass filter in out Five Band Equaliser LF LMF MF HMF amp HF Knobs Set the boost or cut levels FREQ Knobs Set the centre frequencies or turnover frequencies for shelf curves Q Knobs Set the ban
436. y point within the Title to the beginning for both absolute and trim If a fader is in record then it is the point at which is pressed which determines the level If is already on then it is the point the fader is dropped into record 7 21 Chapter 7 Session Management juewebeueyy uoisses Jejdeuo 5595 7 5 Mixing Overview 7 5 8 To Record Absolute Moves for a Number of Faders This functions in exactly the same way as for one fader except that once the desired faders are in ready ABS mode they may be put into full WRITE individually using their local WRITE buttons or simultaneously using the GLOBAL DROP IN button on the Control Keyboard GLOBAL DROP OUT takes all faders out of WRITE as with cuts 7 5 9 To Trim Fader Moves Select locally for the desired fader and its green LED flashes Press the WRITE button in the fader knob before starting the tape or while it is rolling and the LED goes on solid indicating that moves will be recorded If the tape is rolling previous moves will be heard and displayed on the fader before the knob is touched The moves will still be heard if the fader is touched and moved The previous moves will be heard whether or not WRITE has been pressed This also applies to TOUCH WRITE where WRITE buttons in fader knobs have been used to latch automation record Use the READY CANCEL button below the central LCD to
437. ynamic range is achieved where no digital amplification takes place In practice the best case noise floor set by any single input will vary depending on its gain setting as follows 4 Ch MIC ADC Source Variation from 106dBfs to 112dBfs 4 Ch LINE ADC Source Variation from 104dBfs to 110dBfs 8 Ch ADC MIC or LINE Source Variation from 102dBfs to 108dBfs The figures above are derived using a single input source The measurement is taken from a 24 bit digital output Appendixes A 1 3 sexipueddy Specifications Full Channels Equaliser amp Filters Section Gain Frequency Q Slope Overshoot LF Filter 6dB Steps 20 500Hz 0 36dB Oct LF Peak Shelf 20dB 20 400Hz 0 5 16 0 50 adjust in Shelf LMF 20dB 30 600Hz 0 5 16 MF 20dB 100Hz 6kHz 0 5 16 HMF 20dB 600Hz 18kHz 0 5 16 HF Peak Shelf 20dB 2 20kHz 0 5 16 0 50 adjust Shelf HF Filter 6dB Steps 1 20kHz 0 36dB Oct Return Channels amp MAIN Outputs Equaliser Section Gain Frequency Q Slope Overshoot LF Peak Shelf 20dB 20 400Hz 0 5 16 0 50 adjust in Shelf HF Peak Shelf 20dB 2 20kHz 0 5 16 0 50 adjust in Shelf Dynamics Dynamics Gain Reduction All levels in the table below are referenced to full scale and time constants apply to a 10dB gain change The time constant marked denotes a calculated value f

OXF-R3 - v3.0 - Complete

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents